2007 e Class Sedan

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Bild in der Größe

215x70 mm einfügen
Operator’s Manual
E-Class Sedan
E-Class Sedan
2 1 1 5 8 4 0 8 9 7
Order No. 6515 1186 13 Part No. 211 584 08 97 USA Edition B 2007
E 320 BLUETEC
E 350
E 350 4MATIC
E 550
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your signed to acquaint you with the opera-
desire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 35

Product information................................ 9 Exterior view......................................... 22 Unlocking ............................................. 36
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Cockpit................................................. 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 36
Service and warranty information .. 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 26 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 37
Important notice for California Multifunction steering wheel ................ 28 Starter switch positions.................. 37
retail buyers and lessees of Center console ..................................... 29 Adjusting .............................................. 41
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Upper part ...................................... 29 Seats .............................................. 41
Maintenance .................................. 12 Lower part ...................................... 30 Steering wheel................................ 45
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 31 Mirrors............................................ 47
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Storage compartments......................... 32 Driving.................................................. 49
Operating your vehicle outside Door control panel................................ 34 Fastening the seat belts ................. 49
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Starting the engine ......................... 52
Where to find it.................................... 14 Parking brake ................................. 55
Symbols............................................... 15 Driving ............................................ 55
Operating safety .................................. 16 Switching on headlamps................. 56
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Turn signals .................................... 57
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Windshield wipers........................... 58
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Problems while driving.................... 60
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Parking and locking.............................. 61
Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Parking brake ................................. 62
Information regarding electronic Switching off headlamps................. 63
recording devices........................... 19 Turning off engine........................... 63
Releasing seat belts........................ 64
Locking ........................................... 64
Contents
Anti-theft systems ............................. 106 Seats ................................................ 129

Safety and Security ........................... 67 Immobilizer .................................. 106 Front seat active head restraints . 129
Occupant safety................................... 68 Anti-theft alarm system................ 106 Rear seat head restraints............. 129
Air bags .......................................... 70 Lumbar support ........................... 131
Occupant Classification System Multicontour seat*....................... 131
(USA only) ...................................... 75 Controls in detail ............................. 109 Seat heating*............................... 132
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation Locking and unlocking ....................... 110 Seat ventilation* .......................... 133
system (Canada only) ..................... 81 SmartKey ..................................... 110 Memory function ............................... 134
Seat belts ....................................... 82 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 113 Storing positions into memory..... 135
Preventive occupant safety Checking batteries in the Recalling positions from memory. 135
(PRE-SAFE®) ................................... 86 SmartKey or SmartKey with Storing exterior rear view mirror
Active head restraints .................... 87 KEYLESS-GO* .............................. 119 parking position ........................... 136
Children in the vehicle.................... 88 Loss of the SmartKey or Lighting ............................................. 137
Blocking of rear door window SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 119 Exterior lamp switch .................... 137
operation........................................ 95 Opening the doors from the Combination switch ..................... 141
Panic alarm .......................................... 96 inside ........................................... 119 Corner-illuminating front fog
Activating ....................................... 96 Opening the trunk ........................ 120 lamps* ......................................... 142
Deactivating ................................... 96 Closing the trunk.......................... 122 Hazard warning flasher ................ 144
Driving safety systems......................... 97 Trunk emergency release ............. 125 Interior lighting in the front .......... 145
ABS ................................................ 97 Valet locking ................................ 126 Interior lighting in the rear ........... 146
BAS ................................................ 99 Automatic central locking ............ 127 Door entry lamps ......................... 147
Adaptive Brake ............................... 99 Locking and unlocking from the Trunk lamps ................................. 147
EBP............................................... 100 inside ........................................... 127
ESP® ............................................. 100
Four wheel electronic traction
system (4MATIC) with the ESP® ... 105
Contents
Instrument cluster ............................. 148 Gear ranges .................................. 189 Maximum cooling MAX COOL
Adjusting instrument cluster Automatic shift program ............... 190 (USA only)..................................... 214
illumination .................................. 148 Gear selector lever one-touch Air recirculation mode .................. 214
Coolant temperature indicator ..... 149 gearshifting................................... 191 Air conditioning ............................ 217
Trip odometer .............................. 149 Steering wheel gearshift control Residual heat and ventilation
Tachometer.................................. 149 one-touch gearshifting* ................ 192 (Canada only)................................ 218
Outside temperature indicator ..... 150 Manual shift program E 63 AMG ... 194 Rear passenger compartment
Control system .................................. 151 Emergency operation adjustable air vents ...................... 219
Multifunction display.................... 151 (Limp-Home Mode) ....................... 197 4-zone automatic climate control....... 220
Multifunction steering wheel........ 152 Good visibility ..................................... 198 Deactivating the climate control
Menus .......................................... 154 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 198 system .......................................... 225
Standard display menu ................ 157 Rear view mirrors.......................... 198 Operating the climate control
AMG menu ................................... 157 Sun visors ..................................... 201 system in automatic mode ........... 226
AUDIO menu ................................ 161 Rear window sunshade* ............... 202 Setting the temperature ............... 227
NAV* menu.................................. 163 Roller sunblind* in the rear doors Adjusting air distribution .............. 228
Distronic* menu........................... 163 (Canada only)................................ 202 Adjusting air volume ..................... 229
Vehicle status message Rear window defroster.................. 203 Front defroster ............................. 229
memory menu .............................. 164 Dual-zone automatic climate control .. 204 Maximum cooling MAX COOL
Settings menu.............................. 166 Deactivating the climate control (USA only)..................................... 230
Trip computer menu..................... 179 system .......................................... 209 Air recirculation mode .................. 231
TEL* menu ................................... 181 Operating the climate control Air conditioning ............................ 233
Automatic transmission..................... 184 system in automatic mode............ 209 Residual heat and ventilation
Gear selector lever....................... 184 Setting the temperature................ 210 (Canada only)................................ 234
Shifting procedure ....................... 185 Adjusting air distribution............... 211 Rear climate control ..................... 235
Gear selector lever positions ....... 186 Adjusting air volume ..................... 212
Driving tips................................... 188 Front defroster.............................. 212
Contents
Power windows.................................. 237 Parktronic system

Opening and closing the windows 237 (Parking assist)*........................... 269 Operation ......................................... 307
Synchronizing power windows ..... 239 Loading.............................................. 273 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ........ 308
Summer opening feature.............. 239 Roof rack*.................................... 273 Driving instructions ........................... 309
Convenience closing feature ........ 240 Ski bag* (Canada only) ................ 274 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 309
Power tilt/sliding sunroof .................. 242 Split rear bench seat* .................. 276 Drinking and driving..................... 309
Opening and closing the power Expanding the cargo area*........... 279 Pedals .......................................... 309
tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 242 Loading instructions..................... 279 Power assistance ......................... 310
Synchronizing the power Cargo tie-down rings* .................. 280 Brakes.......................................... 310
tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 244 Retaining hooks ........................... 281 Driving off .................................... 312
Panorama roof with power Useful features .................................. 282 Parking......................................... 313
tilt/sliding panel* .............................. 245 Storage compartments ................ 282 Tires............................................. 313
Opening and closing the roller Cup holders.................................. 284 Hydroplaning................................ 314
sunblinds for the panorama roof Ashtrays ....................................... 287 Tire traction ................................. 314
with power tilt/sliding panel ........ 245 Cigarette lighter ........................... 288 Tire speed rating .......................... 315
Opening and closing the Power outlet................................. 289 Winter driving instructions ........... 316
panorama roof with power Heated steering wheel Standing water............................. 317
tilt/sliding panel........................... 246 (Canada only) ............................... 289 Passenger compartment.............. 317
Synchronizing the panorama Floormats..................................... 290 Driving abroad ............................. 317
roof with power tilt/sliding panel . 248 Telephone* .................................. 291 Control and operation of radio
Driving systems ................................. 249 Tele Aid ........................................ 294 transmitter................................... 318
Cruise control............................... 249 Garage door opener ..................... 301 Catalytic converter
Distronic*..................................... 252 (gasoline engine).......................... 318
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 319
(only available on E 550, Emission control .......................... 319
E 550 4MATIC, E 63 AMG) ........... 265 Coolant temperature.................... 320
Contents
At the gas station .............................. 321 Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Refueling ...................................... 321 Standards (U.S. vehicles).............. 357 Practical hints .................................. 379
Check regularly and before a Tire ply material ............................ 359 What to do if … ................................... 380
long trip........................................ 323 Tire and loading terminology......... 359 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 380
Engine compartment ......................... 325 Rotating tires ................................ 362 Lamp in center console ................ 393
Hood ............................................ 325 Winter driving ..................................... 364 Vehicle status messages in the
Engine oil ..................................... 327 Winter tires ................................... 364 multifunction display .................... 396
Transmission fluid level................ 329 Block heater* (Canada only) ......... 365 Where will I find ...? ............................ 432
Coolant level ................................ 330 Snow chains.................................. 365 First aid kit.................................... 432
Battery ......................................... 331 Maintenance....................................... 366 Spare wheel.................................. 432
Windshield washer system and Maintenance service indicator Luggage box ................................. 433
headlamp cleaning system*......... 332 message ....................................... 366 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 434
Tires and wheels................................ 333 Calling up the maintenance Vehicle jack .................................. 434
Important guidelines .................... 333 service indicator display ............... 368 Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 436
Tire care and maintenance........... 334 Resetting the maintenance Unlocking the vehicle ................... 436
Direction of rotation..................... 336 service indicator ........................... 368 Locking the vehicle....................... 437
Loading the vehicle ...................... 336 Vehicle care........................................ 369 Manually unlocking the gear
Recommended tire inflation Cleaning and care of vehicle ......... 369 selector lever ................................ 438
pressure....................................... 341 Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 439
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 342 Power tilt/sliding sunroof or
Tire labeling.................................. 350 panorama roof with power
Load identification ....................... 354 tilt/sliding panel* ......................... 439
DOT, Tire Identification Number Resetting activated head restraints.... 440
(TIN) ............................................. 355 Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 441
Maximum tire load ....................... 356 SmartKey/SmartKey with
Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 357 KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 441
Contents
Replacing bulbs ................................. 443 Fuses ................................................. 469 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc........... 491
Bulbs ............................................ 443 Fuse box in passenger Capacities .................................... 491
Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 446 compartment ............................... 470 Engine oils ................................... 495
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 448 Fuse box in trunk ......................... 470 Engine oil additives ...................... 495
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 450 Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 495
Placing wiper arms in vertical Brake fluid.................................... 495
position ........................................ 450 Technical data ................................. 473 Premium unleaded gasoline
Removing wiper blades ................ 451 Parts service...................................... 474 (gasoline engine).......................... 496
Installing wiper blades.................. 451 Warranty coverage............................. 475 Fuel requirements........................ 496
Flat tire .............................................. 452 Loss of Service and Warranty Gasoline additives
Preparing the vehicle.................... 452 Information Booklet ..................... 475 (gasoline engine).......................... 497
Mounting the spare wheel............ 452 Identification labels ........................... 476 Coolants ...................................... 498
Bleeding the fuel system Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 478 Windshield washer system and
(diesel engine only) ............................ 459 E 320 BLUETEC............................ 478 headlamp cleaning system*......... 500
Battery ............................................... 460 E 350/E 550 ............................... 478
Disconnecting the battery ............ 461 E 63 AMG..................................... 478
Removing the battery ................... 462 Engine................................................ 479 Index................................................. 501
Charging and reinstalling the Rims and tires.................................... 481
battery.......................................... 462 Same size tires............................. 482
Reconnecting the battery ............. 463 Mixed size tires ............................ 485
Jump starting ..................................... 464 Spare wheel ................................. 487
Towing the vehicle ............................. 466 Electrical system ............................... 488
Installing towing eye bolt.............. 468 Main dimensions and weights............ 489
Main dimensions .......................... 489
Weights ........................................ 490
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts,
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from New York, and Vermont Emission Con-
the actual equipment of your vehicle. trol System Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts,
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s New York, and Vermont only)1
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures. The
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.
1
Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice. The service advisor will record each
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
service in the booklet for you. Customer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram brochure in your vehicle literature able to the next operator.
portfolio.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that: write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat. you. and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Registered trademarks®: 컄 page This symbol tells you where to
앫 ESP® is a registered trademark of
Warning! G look for further information on a
topic.
DaimlerChrysler. Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
앫 BabySmartTM is a trademark of ards that may endanger your health or life,
Siemens Automotive Corp. or the health or life of others. a warning which is continued on
the next page.
앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
of Prince, a Johnson Controls Compa- ! Highlights hazards that may result in dam-
ny. age to your vehicle. a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
The following symbols are found in this i Helpful hints or further information you may
find useful. -> This symbol is used to indicate
Operator’s Manual:
cross-references to term defini-
* Optional equipment is identified 왘 This symbol points to instructions for tions.
with an asterisk. Since standard you to follow.
equipment varies between models, Display Words appearing in the multi-
왘 A number of these symbols appearing function display are printed in
the descriptions and illustrations in in succession indicates a multiple-step
this manual may differ slightly from the type shown here.
procedure.
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle

Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage to and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance, manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- or you suspect that damage to your vehicle 앫 traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your has occurred, you should turn on your haz-
vehicle. ard warning flashers, carefully slow down, 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
and drive with caution to an area which is a dards
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for repairs or modifications to elec- safe distance from the road.
tronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Trunk 6 Towing eye bolt 468 a Windshield wipers 58
앫 Unlocking 120 General information 466 Wiper blades, replacing 450
앫 Opening and closing 120, 7 Rims and tires 481 Wiper blades, cleaning 374
122 앫 Checking tire inflation 342 b Window, cleaning 374
앫 Spare wheel 432 pressure c Roofs
앫 Vehicle tool kit 434 앫 Spare wheel 432 앫 Power tilt/sliding sun- 242
2 Rear lamps 445 앫 Flat tire 452 roof
3 Rear window, defrosting 203 8 Front lamps 444 앫 Panorama roof with 245
4 Fuel filler flap 321 9 Hood, opening 325 power tilt/sliding panel*
Gasoline 496 Engine oil 327 d Exterior rear view mirror 47
5 Doors Coolant 330 Parking position 136
앫 Locking and unlocking 110 e Headlamp cleaning system* 198
앫 Opening and closing 119
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit

1 Combination switch 7 Front Parktronic* warning 269 f Starter switch 38
앫 Turn signals 57 indicator g Steering wheel adjustment 45
앫 Windshield wipers 58 8 Dual-zone automatic 204 stalk
climate control Heated steering wheel 289
앫 High beam 57
4-zone automatic climate 220 (Canada only)
2 Cruise control lever control* h Headlamp cleaning button* 198
앫 Cruise control 249 9 Overhead control panel 31 j Parking brake pedal 55, 62
앫 Distronic* 252 a Mobile phone/Glasses box 282 k Hood lock release 325
3 Instrument cluster 26, b Glove box lid release, glove 282
148 l Parking brake release 55
box lock
4 Multifunction steering 28, m Door control panel 34
c Glove box 282
wheel 152 n Exterior lamp switch 137
d COMAND system, see sepa-
5 Horn rate operating instructions o Steering wheel gearshift 192
6 Lever for Voice Control control*
e Center console 29
System*, see separate
operating instructions
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster

1 L Left turn signal 8 Tachometer with: ú Engine malfunction 384
indicator lamp 1 Supplemental 390 indicator lamp,
2 v ESP® warning lamp 381 Restraint System (SRS) USA only
3 Speedometer indicator lamp ± Engine malfunction 384

- Antilock Brake System 380 indicator lamp,
4 Multifunction display 151 Canada only
(ABS) indicator lamp
5 l Distance warning lamp 387 H Low tire pressure tell- 391
< Seat belt telltale 388
Vehicles without Distronic*: tale*, Canada only
B Low beam headlamp 56
Warning lamp without func- q Preglow indicator 53
indicator lamp
tion. It illuminates when the lamp, diesel engine
ignition is on. It should go out A High beam headlamp 142 only
when the engine is running. indicator lamp
b Fuel display with:
6 K Right turn signal 9 Main odometer with:
indicator lamp A Fuel tank reserve 387
앫 Gear selector lever 52 warning lamp
7 Coolant temperature 149 position
indicator with: c Reset button for:
앫 Program mode 190
앫 Resetting trip odometer 149
• Coolant temperature 386 a Clock with: 171
warning lamp 앫 Adjusting instrument 148
; Brake warning lamp, 383 cluster illumination
USA only
앫 Confirming new time 171
3 Brake warning lamp, 383 settings
Canada only
27
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page

1 Multifunction display 151 4 Menu systems:
Operating control system 152 Press button
2 Selecting the submenu or è for next menu

setting the volume: ÿ for previous menu
Press button 5 Moving within a menu:
æ up/to increase Press button
ç down/to decrease j for next display
3 Telephone*: k for previous display
Press button
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
28
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Seat heating*, driver’s side 132 8 Seat heating*, front passen- 132
2 Rear window sunshade 202 ger side
switch* 9 Seat ventilation*, front pas- 133
3 Rear seat head restraints 130 senger side
switch, folding down a Central locking switch 127
4 Hazard warning flasher 144 b Opening/closing button for
switch CD changer, see separate
5 Front passenger front air 79 COMAND operating instruc-
bag off indicator lamp tions
6 Central unlocking switch 127 c Seat ventilation*, driver’s 133

side
7 Electronic Stability Program 102
(ESP®) control switch
29
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page Item Page

1
1 Ashtray 287 6 Vehicle level control switch 266
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 39 7 Thumbwheel for setting 261
button distance for Distronic*
3 Gear selector lever for 52, 8 Distance warning function* 261
automatic transmission 186 on/off switch
4 Parking assist (Parktronic 272 9 Program mode selector 190
system)* deactivation switch for automatic
switch transmission
5 Adaptive Damping System 265
(ADS) switch1
1
Only available on E 550, E 550 4MATIC and
E 63 AMG.
30
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off 145 8 Front reading lamps 145
2 Automatic interior lighting 145 9 Garage door opener 301
3 Front interior lighting on/off 145 a Hands-free microphone for
4 Right reading lamp on/off 145 Tele Aid (emergency call 294
system), telephone*, and 181
5 Tilt/sliding sunroof or 242, Voice Control System*, see
tilt/sliding panel* 245 separate operating instruc-
6 Tele Aid (emergency call 294 tions
system) button b Ambient lighting 175
7 Rear view mirror 198 c Interior lighting
d Left front reading lamp 145
on/off
31
At a glance
32
At a glance

1 Glove box 282 9 Retaining hooks 281 j Mobile phone/Glasses box 282
2 Front passenger seat storage 432 a Door pocket k Parcel net in front passenger 284
compartment with first aid kit b Ruffled storage bag 283 footwell
3 Door pocket c Ashtray 287 l Storage compartment with 285
4 Ashtray 287 cup holders/telephone* com-
d Door pocket partment
5 Ruffled storage bag 283 e Driver’s seat storage compart- m Rear storage compartment in 282
6 Door pocket ment the rear center console
7 Side storage pocket in trunk* f Sun visor card clip n Cup holder in the rear armrest 285
8 Luggage box under the trunk 433 g CD changer o Storage compartment in the 283
floor h Ashtray with cigarette lighter 287 rear armrest
33
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Inside door handle 119
2 Seat adjustment 43
3 Memory function (for stor- 134
ing seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel settings)
4 Exterior rear view mirror ad- 47
justment
5 Switches for opening/clos- 237
ing front and rear side win-
dows, rear window override
switch
6 Remote trunk release 121
switch, trunk opening/clos-
ing system*
34
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
35
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

overview of the vehicle’s most basic Warning! G
functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz own-
ers should pay special attention to the in- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
formation given here. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
If you are already familiar with the basic children unattended in the vehicle, or with
functions described here, the “Controls in access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s un-
detail” section will provide you with further supervised access to a vehicle could result
information. The corresponding page refer- in an accident and/or serious personal inju-
ences are located at the end of each seg- ry.
ment.
SmartKey with remote control
왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
1 ‹ Lock button SmartKey.
2 Š Opening button for trunk
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 96) 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 110).
36
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Pull an outside door handle. Starter switch positions
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once. Warning! G
the remote control buttons on the 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
SmartKey and start the engine without in- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
move up.
serting the SmartKey in the starter switch. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis- from the starter switch, take it with you, and
armed.
Warning! G lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Get in the vehicle.
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the For more information, see “SmartKey with cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 113). and/or serious personal injury.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no fur-
ther than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the door.
37
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
consumers) and driving position. starter switch with the gear selector lever in
All lamps (except low beam headlamp position P.
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp in-
dicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
i If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
lamps unless activated) in the instru- no longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
instrument cluster fails to come on SmartKey from the starter switch and reinsert.
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
a lamp in the instrument cluster re- sufficiently charged.
Starter switch mains on after starting the engine or
앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
0 For removing SmartKey comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps (컄 page 462).
1 Power supply for some electrical con- in instrument cluster” (컄 page 380).
앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 464).
sumers, such as seat adjustment 3 Starting position
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica- completely discharged battery, always remove
tor and warning lamps (except low beam head- the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
lamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp engine is not in operation.
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) in the instrument cluster come For information on starting the engine us-
on. The indicator and warning lamps (except low ing the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam head- SmartKey” (컄 page 52).
lamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps if activated) should go out when the en-
gine is running. This indicates that the respective
systems are operational.
38
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Position 0

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/
the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO stop button, the vehicle’s on-board elec-
start/stop button on the gear selector le- tronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey re-
ver corresponds to turning the SmartKey moved).
to the various starter switch positions.
If you firmly depress the brake pedal dur- Position 1
ing pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
button, the engine starts automatically. once.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button This supplies power for some electrical
i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function. 1 USA only consumers, such as seat adjustment.
2 Canada only
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be start/stop button
located in the vehicle. 앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) is
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set switched on
to P. 앫 twice, the power supply is again switched off
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
Ignition (or position 2) i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except low beam head-
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
lamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
twice. indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
This supplies power for all electrical unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
consumers. All lamps in the instrument on. The indicator and warning lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam head-
cluster (except low beam headlamp in-
lamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
dicator lamp, high beam headlamp indi- lamps if activated) should go out when the en-
cator lamp, and turn signal indicator gine is running. This indicates that the respective
lamps unless activated) come on. If a systems are operational.
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
For information on starting the engine us-
come on when the ignition is switched
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
on, have it checked and replaced if nec-
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
essary. If a lamp in the instrument clus-
(컄 page 53).
ter remains on after starting the engine
or comes on while driving, see “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 380).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Seats
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 49).
tening of seat belts, must be done before Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Observe the following points:
the vehicle is put into motion. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
앫 Adjust the backrest until your arms are
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
slightly angled when holding the steer-
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat ing wheel.
backrest in an excessively reclined position 앫 Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
as this can be dangerous. You could slide position that still allows you to reach the
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po-
under it, the seat belt would apply force at sition should be as far to the rear as pos-
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- sible, consistent with ability to properly
rious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat operate controls.
belts provide the best restraint when the 앫 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
wearer is in a nearly upright position and close to the head as possible and the
seat belts are properly positioned on the center of the head restraint supports
body. the back of the head at eye level.
앫 Never place hands under the seat or
near any moving parts while a seat is be-
ing adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning! G Warning! G According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Canada only: Children 12 years old and un- rear seating positions than in the front seat-
SmartKey or the SmartKey with der must never ride in the front seat, except ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take in a Mercedes-Benz authorized that children be placed in the rear seats
it with you, and lock the vehicle. BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which whenever possible. Regardless of seating
operates with the BabySmartTM system in- position, children 12 years old and under
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey must be seated and properly secured in an
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start- stalled in the vehicle to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag when it is properly appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
er switch or the SmartKey with restraint, or booster seat recommended for
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, installed. Otherwise they will be struck by
the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this the size and weight of the child. For addi-
the power seats can be operated when the tional information, see “Children in the vehi-
respective door is open. Therefore, do not happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
cle” (컄 page 88).
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re- significantly increased if the child restraints
sult in an accident and/or serious personal are not properly secured in the vehicle and
injury. the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment i The memory function (컄 page 134) lets you Seat cushion tilt
store the settings for the seat position together
The seat adjustment switches are located 왘 Press the switch up or down in direc-
with the settings for the steering wheel and the
on the front doors. exterior rear view mirrors. tion of arrow 4 until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
! When moving the seat, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Oth- Head restraint height
erwise you could damage the seats.
왘 Press the switch up or down in direc-
Seat fore and aft adjustment tion of arrow 5.
왘 Press the switch forward or backward i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
in direction of arrow 1. it is as close to the head as possible.
i Depending on the set height of the head re-

straint, the seat fore and aft position is Warning! G
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment automatically pre-set.
2 Backrest tilt For your protection, drive only with properly
3 Seat height Backrest tilt positioned head restraints.
4 Seat cushion tilt
왘 Press the switch forward or backward Adjust head restraint so that the center of
5 Head restraint height
in direction of arrow 2. the head restraint supports the back of the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
Seat height tial for injury to the head and neck in the
or
event of an accident or similar situation.
왘 Open the respective door. 왘 Press the switch up or down in direc-
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
tion of arrow 3.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint adjusting Comfort head restraint* adjusting To move the head restraint forward or
backward:
왘 Pull or push head restraint in direction
of arrow 2.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
For more information on seats, see “Seats”
(컄 page 129).
Manually adjust the head restraint. 1 Head restraint side adjustment

왘 Push or pull on the upper edge of the 2 Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
head restraint cushion to the desired
position. Warning! G
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the
mounting post. You could otherwise be
trapped.
To adjust the head restraint sides:

왘 Pull or push sides 1 into desired posi-
tion.
44
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment i The memory function (컄 page 134) lets you
store the settings for the steering wheel together
The steering wheel adjustment stalk is lo-
with the settings for the exterior rear view mir-
Warning! G cated on the lower left of the steering col-
umn.
rors and the driver’s seat position.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- Adjusting steering column in or out
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- 왘 Move stalk in direction of arrows 1
ing could cause the driver to lose control of until a comfortable steering wheel posi-
the vehicle. tion is reached with your arms slightly
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the bent at the elbow.
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take Adjusting steering column up or down
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
왘 Move stalk in direction of arrows 2.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
Make sure your legs can move freely
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start- 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
and all the displays (incl. malfunction
er switch or the SmartKey with 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
and indicator lamps) on the instrument
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). cluster are clearly visible.
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is open. or
Therefore, do not leave children unattended 왘 Open the driver’s door.
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
Easy-entry/exit feature With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:
This feature allows for easier entry into and hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
exit from the vehicle. When entering and Children could open the driver’s door and 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit switch
its uppermost position. feature, which could result in an accident
or
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
앫 open the driver’s door with the
ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub-
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, SmartKey in starter switch position 0
menu of the control system (컄 page 178). or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you: button (컄 page 39) in position 1
Warning! G i If the current position for the steering wheel
앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
You must make sure no one can become wheel will no longer be able to move upward
trapped or injured by the moving steering or when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
activated. when the engine is started.
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of start/stop button (컄 page 39) once
the following: with the driver’s door closed
앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄 page 45). i The last set steering wheel position is stored
when
앫 Press one of the memory buttons
앫 the ignition is switched off (컄 page 63)
(컄 page 135).
앫 the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 135)
46
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

Warning! G 왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
Let the system complete the adjustment mirror.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
procedure before setting the vehicle in mo- good view of the road and traffic condi- For more information, see “Rear view mir-
tion. All steering wheel adjustment must be tions. rors” (컄 page 198).
completed before setting the vehicle in mo-
G
tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still Exterior rear view mirrors
adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-
Warning!
trol of the vehicle.
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may Warning! G
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks. Exercise care when using the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
The mirror surface is convex (outwardly
low the liquid to come into contact with
curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob-
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
jects in mirror are closer than they appear.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
Check your interior rear view mirror or
area with water, and seek medical help if
glance over your shoulder before changing
necessary.
lanes.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with

the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
removed while in their liquid state and by apply-
ing plenty of water.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the driver’s ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
door. pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is now properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
i The memory function (컄 page 134) lets you

store the settings for the exterior rear view mir-
rors together with the settings for the steering
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror wheel and the driver’s seat position.
button For more information, see “Activating exte-
2 Adjustment button rior rear view mirror parking position”
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- (컄 page 200).
ror button
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). rors” (컄 page 198).
왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side ex-
terior rear view mirror or button 3 for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the desired
setting.
48
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and

position your seat belt greatly increases
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- your risk of injuries and their likely severity Canada only: Children 12 years old and un-
structing the pedals’ range of movement. in an accident. You and your passengers der must never ride in the front seat, except
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- should always wear seat belts. in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in If you are ever in an accident, your injuries BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still can be considerably more severe without operates with the BabySmartTM system in-
have sufficient clearance. your seat belt properly buckled. Without stalled in the vehicle to deactivate the front
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers your seat belt buckled, you are much more passenger front air bag when it is properly
the objects could get caught between the likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be installed. Otherwise they will be struck by
pedals. You could then no longer brake or ejected from it. You can be seriously injured the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and or killed. happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
injury. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or According to accident statistics, children
death is lessened if you are wearing your are safer when properly restrained in the
Fastening the seat belts seat belt. The air bags can only provide the rear seating positions than in the front seat-
protection they were designed to afford if ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the occupants are using their seat belts that children be placed in the rear seats.
Warning! G (컄 page 82). Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
Always fasten your seat belt before driving properly secured in an appropriately sized
off. Always make sure all of your passengers infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
are properly restrained, even those sitting in seat recommended for the size and weight
the rear. of the child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 88). 컄컄
49
Getting started
Driving
컄컄
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
Warning! G
are not properly secured in the vehicle and Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
the child is not properly secured in the child backrest in an excessively reclined position
restraint. as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
Warning! G the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi-
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
tion and the seat belt is properly positioned
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
on the body.
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
1 Belt outlet
section (컄 page 72) and (컄 page 83).
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the seat
belt from belt outlet 1.
50
Getting started
Driving
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the seat Proper use of seat belts 앫 Check your seat belt periodically
belt across the top of your shoulder during travel to make sure that it is
앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fasten-
and the lap portion across your hips. properly positioned.
ing.
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until 앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
it clicks. portion is located as close as possible fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to to the middle of the shoulder (it should
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion not touch the neck). Never pass the
up. shoulder portion of the seat belt under Warning! G
your arm.
Belt outlet height adjustment Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
They could tear.
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment mecha-
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly
nism. This could damage the seat belt.
upright position.
Never attempt to make modifications to
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one seat belts. This could impair the effective-
person at a time. ness of the seat belts.
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
person and another object at the same severely weaken them. In a crash they may
time. When using a seat belt to secure not be able to provide adequate protection.
1 Release button
infant restraint or toddler restraint or
왘 Press release button 1 and move the Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
children in booster seats, always follow
seat belt height adjuster upward or highly stressed in an accident must be re-
the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
downward. placed. Contact an authorized
tions.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
51
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

For information on turning off the engine
Warning! G with the SmartKey, see “Turning off en-
gine” (컄 page 63).
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
Gasoline engine:
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
consciousness and possible death. to P.
Do not run the engine in confined areas 왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
(such as a garage) which are not properly
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission to position 3 and hold until the engine
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
starts (컄 page 38).
have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever
immediately. If you must drive under these lock i You can also use the “touch-start” function.
conditions, drive only with at least one win- R Reverse gear Turn the SmartKey to position 3 (컄 page 38) and
dow fully open. N Neutral release it again immediately. The engine then
D Drive position starts automatically.
For more information, see the “Controls in

detail” section (컄 page 189).
52
Getting started
Driving
Diesel engine: Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P. Warning! G
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
to position 2 (컄 page 38). Therefore, never leave children unattended
The preglow indicator lamp q in the in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
instrument cluster comes on. dentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
왘 As soon as the preglow indicator KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lamp q goes out, turn the SmartKey 1 USA only
in the starter switch to position 3 2 Canada only
(컄 page 38) and release it.
unlocked vehicle.
The engine starts automatically. Gasoline engine:
i If the engine is at operating temperature, You can start your vehicle without the
the preglow indicator lamp q may not stay on SmartKey in the starter switch using the to P.
and you can start the engine without preglowing. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the
gear selector lever. starting procedure. Do not depress ac-
For information on turning off the engine celerator.
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with The gear selector lever lock is released.컄컄
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 64).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
53
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Starting difficulties 왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 53) once. (컄 page 52). Remember that extended
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
starting attempts can drain the battery.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with position 0 for an extended period of time,
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle. it can no longer be turned in the switch. In 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 464).
this case, the steering is locked.
If the engine does not start after several
Diesel engine:
왘 To unlock remove SmartKey from the starting attempts, there could be a mal-
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set starter switch and reinsert. function in the engine electronics or in the
to P. If the engine does not start as described,
fuel supply system.
왘 Depress the brake pedal during the carry out the following steps: 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
starting procedure. Do not depress ac- Center.
왘 If you are starting the engine with the
celerator.
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
The gear selector lever lock is released. switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 53) once. 왘 If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
The engine begins to preglow and will
may be open to allow for better detec-
start automatically.
tion of the SmartKey with
If the engine is at operating temperature, KEYLESS-GO.
the preglow indicator lamp q may not Or:
stay on and you can start the engine with- Start the engine with the SmartKey as
out preglowing: radio signals from another source may
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button be interfering with the SmartKey with
(컄 page 53) until the engine is running. KEYLESS-GO.
54
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake Driving

Warning! G
왘 Depress the brake pedal.
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position D or R.
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not i Wait for the gear selection process to com-
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle leave children unattended in the vehicle, or plete before setting the vehicle in motion.
and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
왘 Release the brake pedal.
cle’s brake lights do not light up when the could release the parking brake, which
parking brake is engaged. could result in an accident and/or serious 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator
personal injury. pedal.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on central locking system engages and the locking
release handle 1. knobs drop down.
The automatic door lock feature can be deacti-
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
vated (컄 page 176).
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out. You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so. 컄컄
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
55
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 ! If you hear a warning signal and the mes- Switching on headlamps

sage Release parking brake appears in the Warning! G
multifunction display when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake. It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- Low beam headlamps
Release the parking brake (컄 page 62). ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- The exterior lamp switch is located on the
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
After a cold start, the automatic transmis- on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
This allows the catalytic converter could lose control of the vehicle and hit
(gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst someone or something. Only shift into gear
(diesel engine) to reach its operating tem- when the engine is idling normally and when
perature earlier. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Warning! G For more information on driving, see “Driv-

ing instructions” (컄 page 309).
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator Exterior lamp switch
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and 1 Off
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
drivetrain wear. 2 Low beam headlamps on
vent this type of loss of control.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps and the low
beam headlamp indicator lamp B in
the instrument cluster come on
(컄 page 26).
56
Getting started
Driving
High beam Turn signals The combination switch resets automati-

cally after major steering wheel move-
The combination switch is located on the
The combination switch is located on the ments.
left of the steering column.
left of the steering column.
i To signal minor directional changes such as
changing lanes, press combination switch only
to point of resistance and release. The corre-
sponding turn signals will flash three times.
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
왘 Push the combination switch in direc-
왘 Press the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1.
tion of arrow 1 or 2.
The high beam headlamps and the high
The corresponding turn signal indicator
beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
lamp L or K in the instrument
the instrument cluster come on
cluster flashes (컄 page 27).
(컄 page 142).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 137).
57
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when If windshield wipers fail to function at all in com-
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on bination switch position U or V,
The combination switch is located on the a windshield might scratch the glass and/or 앫 set the combination switch to the next high-
left of the steering column. damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on er wiper speed
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, al-
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ways operate the windshield wipers with wind-
shield washer fluid (컄 page 59).
Switching on/off windshield wipers
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers 왘 Turn the combination switch to the de-
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
ly. sired position depending on the inten-
sity of the rain.
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and M Windshield wipers off
앫 remove SmartKey from starter switch U Slow intermittent wiping
Combination switch or Rain sensor operation with low
1 Switching on windshield wipers 앫 turn off the engine by pressing the sensitivity.
2 Single wipe KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and V Fast intermittent wiping
Wiping with windshield washer fluid open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
Rain sensor operation with high
door open, starter switch is in
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). position 0, same as with SmartKey re- sensitivity.
moved from starter switch) u Slow continuous wiping
before attempting to remove any blockage.
t Fast continuous wiping
앫 Remove blockage.
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. i When the windshield wipers are switched on
and you brake the vehicle to a stop, the time in-
terval between wiper operations is increased.
58
Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping After the initial wipe, pauses between Wiping with windshield washer fluid
wipes are automatically controlled by the
Only switch on intermittent wiping under 왘 Push the combination switch in direc-
rain sensor.
wet weather conditions or in the presence tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 58) past the
of precipitation. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the resistance point.
vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
! Do not leave windshield wipers in This protects persons getting into or out of the
The windshield wipers operate with
intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to vehicle from being sprayed. washer fluid.
an automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the Intermittent wiping will be continued when i To prevent smears on the windshield or
presence of water sprayed on the windshield, 앫 all doors are closed noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind-
and windshield wipers may be damaged as a re- shield washer fluid every now and then even
and when it is raining.
sult.
앫 the gear selector lever is in position D or R
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on For information on filling up the windshield
or washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an 앫 the wiper setting is changed using the com- system and headlamp cleaning system*”
undesired fashion. This could then damage the bination switch (컄 page 332).
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield Single wipe
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
왘 Turn the combination switch to direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 58) to
position U or V. the resistance point.
The wipers move across the wind- The windshield wipers wipe one time
shield. Afterward, the wiping intervals without washer fluid.
are determined by the wetness of the
windshield.
59
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

248°F (120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
앫 An ignition cable may be damaged cumstances.
(gasoline engine only). 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
a safe location and turn off the engine.
앫 The engine electronics may not be op- ties.
Allow engine and coolant to cool off.
erating properly. If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered termined:
ant if necessary (컄 page 330).
the catalytic converter and damaged it 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
(gasoline engine only). Center.
왘 Give very little gas. If no damage can be determined on the
왘 Have the problem repaired by an 앫 major assemblies
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible. 앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
60
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G 앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
your vehicle. End your drive as follows. start/stop button (vehicles with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
KEYLESS-GO*).
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
exhaust system, as these materials could be
With the engine not running, there is no leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
power assistance for the brake and steering
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
systems. In this case, it is important to keep ! Vehicles with Airmatic: If you have selected
in mind that a considerably higher degree of damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result the Comfort suspension tuning (컄 page 265),
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- of vehicle movement, before turning off the the vehicle lowers slightly when you lock it within
hicle. engine and leaving the vehicle always: approximately 60 seconds after switching off the
engine. When parking, make sure that your vehi-
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
cle cannot come into contact with other objects,
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. such as a curb, while lowering. Your vehicle
Warning! G 앫 Move the gear selector lever to could otherwise be damaged.
position P.
Vehicles with Airmatic: If you have selected
the Comfort suspension tuning 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
(컄 page 265), the vehicle lowers slightly 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
when it is locked. You should therefore wheel towards the road curb.
make sure that no one is standing near the
wheel arches or lying underneath the vehi-
cle when it is being locked. Otherwise, per-
sonal injury could result.
61
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
Warning! G
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle children unattended in the vehicle, or with
and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi- access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
cle’s brake lights do not light up when the could release the parking brake and/or
parking brake is engaged. Make sure not to 1 Release handle move the gear selector lever from
endanger any other road users when you en- 2 Parking brake pedal position P, either of which could result in an
gage the parking brake. accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the warn-
ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
62
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps Turning off with the SmartKey

Warning! G 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 38) to position 0 and remove
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- (컄 page 56).
lector lever not fully engaged in position P is it.
For more information, see “Lighting” The immobilizer is activated.
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
(컄 page 137).
position P alone may not prevent your vehi- i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
cle from moving, possibly hitting people or starter switch with the gear selector lever in
Turning off engine
objects. position P.
Always set the parking brake in addition to 왘 Move the gear selector lever to
shifting to position P. position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 62).
towards the road curb.
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
road curb.
63
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* Releasing seat belts Locking

왘 Place the gear selector lever in
왘 Press the seat belt release button
position P.
(컄 page 50). Warning! G
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
Allow the retractor to completely re-
ton to shut off the engine. To prevent possible personal injury, always
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
keep hands and fingers away from the door
With the driver’s door closed, the start- plate.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
er switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that cially careful when small children are
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get around.
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
removed from starter switch mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and Before closing doors, make sure that there
(컄 page 38). impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or is no possibility of someone getting caught
cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan- in a door during closing.
i If you hear a warning signal, you have tried el. Such damage is not covered by the
to turn off the engine while the gear selector le- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ver was not in position P.
In addition, the message Gear selector le-
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact Warning! G
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ver in Park position appears in the multi-
function display. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Place the gear selector lever in position P.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s un-
supervised access to a vehicle could result
in an accident and/or serious personal inju-
ry.
64
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
the trunk. button 1 on an outside door handle.
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot- 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening times.
the driver’s door.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
In addition the message Switch off lights times.
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
move down.
Locking with the SmartKey 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock armed.
1 Lock button
button ‹ on the SmartKey For more information, see “SmartKey with
(컄 page 36). KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 113).
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
times.
move down.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄 page 110).
65
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
important facts about the restraint sys- the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 Front passenger front air bag off indica-
tems of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
tor lamp (컄 page 79)
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The restraint systems are
앫 USA only: The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 82) Front passenger seat with Occupant cluster lights up when the ignition is
Classification System (OCS) switched on and goes out no later than a
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 89)
(컄 page 75) few seconds after the engine has been
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for started.
앫 Canada only:
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 94)
Front passenger seat with The SRS components are in operational
Additional protection is provided by BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys- readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) tem (컄 page 81) lit when the engine is running.
with As independent systems, their protective A malfunction in the system has been
앫 Air bags (컄 page 70) functions work in conjunction with each detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
other.
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash 앫 fails to go out after approximately
sensors) i For information on infants and children trav- 4 seconds after the engine was started
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys-
앫 Emergency Tensioning Device tems for infants and children, see “Children in 앫 does not come on at all
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 85) the vehicle” (컄 page 88). 앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 87) or while driving
앫 Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) (컄 page 86)
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G If it is necessary to modify an air bag system

to accommodate a person with disabilities,
Modifications to or work improperly con- In the event that the 1 indicator lamp contact your local authorized
ducted on restraint systems (such as seat comes on during driving or does not come Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags) malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details.
or their wiring, as well as tampering with in- recommend that you visit an authorized
terconnected electronic systems, can lead Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
to the restraint systems no longer function- the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
ing as intended. not be activated when needed in an acci-
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, dent, which could result in serious or fatal
for example, could deploy inadvertently or injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
fail to deploy in accidents although the de- unnecessarily which could also result in
celeration threshold for air bag deployment injury.
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re- In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec- creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
tronic components or their software. tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal improperly seated position and to wear their 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side respective seat belts. able to accomplish this by a combina-
impact air bags and window curtain air bags) For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
or rollovers (window curtain air bags). How- steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
ever, no system available today can totally lems, please contact your authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Center.
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to
The activation of the air bags temporarily re- erly positioned on your body.
the steering wheel or dashboard.
leases a small amount of dust from the Since the air bag inflates with considerable
air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju- 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
rious to your health, nor does it indicate a wheel rim. Placing hands and arms
on steering wheel position will help to keep inside the rim can increase the risk and
fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause you at a safe distance from the air bag. potential severity of hand/arm injury
some temporary breathing difficulty for peo- Occupants who are unbelted, out of position when driver front air bag inflates.
ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. or too close to the air bag can be seriously
To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates possible rearward from the dashboard
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you with great force in the blink of an eye: when the seat is occupied.
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
position with your back against the seat
then get fresh air by opening a window or
backrest.
door.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 Occupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
Warning! G
heads in the area of the door where the occupants. Accident research shows that the safest
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should If you sell your vehicle, it is important that place for children in an automobile is in the
the air bag be triggered. Always sit near- you make the buyer aware of this safety rear seat.
ly upright, properly use the seat belts information. Be sure to give the buyer this It should be noted that with respect to both
and use an appropriately sized infant re- Operator’s Manual. front and rear side impact air bags there is a
straint, toddler restraint, or booster seat possibility for a side impact air bag related
recommended for the size and weight of
injury if occupants, especially children, are
the child.
not properly seated or restrained when next
앫 Canada only: Children 12 years old and to a side impact air bag which needs to de-
under must never ride in the front seat, ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
job.
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
system installed in the vehicle to deacti- follow these guidelines:
vate the front passenger front air bag
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
never place their bodies or lean their
they will be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri- heads in the area of the door where the
ous or fatal injury will result. side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed. 컄컄
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 i Air bags are designed to deploy only in cer- Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
tain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts emergency tensioning device and
the seat belts and for children 12 years
(side impact and window curtain air bags) which air bag
old and under, use an appropriately exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, (window curtain air bags). Only during these
or booster seat recommended for the events will they provide their supplemental pro- Warning! G
size and weight of the child. tection.
The driver and passengers should always wear 앫 Damaged seat belts or seat belts that
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for were highly stressed in an accident
If you believe that, even with the use of air bags to provide their supplemental protec- must be replaced and their anchoring
these guidelines, it would be safer for your tion. points must also be checked. Use only
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount- seat belts installed or supplied by an au-
In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-
ed side impact air bags deactivated, then low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
deactivation can be accomplished upon not be deployed. The driver and passenger will 앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning de-
your written request to do so at your autho- then be protected to the extent possible by a vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
cost. seat belt is also needed to provide the best pro- that was activated must be replaced.
tection in a rollover.
Please contact your local authorized 앫 No modifications of any kind may be
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the made to any components or wiring of
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. the SRS. This includes changing or re-
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
It is important to your safety and that of your pas- moving any component or part of the
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
sengers that you replace deployed air bags and SRS, the installation of additional trim
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure material, badges etc. over the steering
that the vehicle will continue to provide supple- wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
mental crash protection for occupants. cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels,
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
or door frame trims, and installation of

additional electrical/electronic equip-
앫 Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
Warning! G
ment on or near SRS components and touch.
Only use seat covers which have been test-
wiring. Keep area between air bags and 앫 In addition, improper repair work on the ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
occupants free from objects (e.g. pack- SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
ages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). inoperative or causing unintended
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
air bag deployment. Work on the SRS
앫 Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. the side impact air bags. Contact your au-
must therefore only be performed by
They could tear. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availabil-
qualified technicians. Contact an autho-
앫 Do not make any modification that could rized Mercedes-Benz Center. ity.
change the effectiveness of the seat
앫 For your protection and the protection
belts. When you sell your vehicle we strongly
of others, when scrapping the air bag
앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this unit or emergency tensioning device, urge you to give notice to the subsequent
may severely weaken them. In a crash our safety instructions must be fol- owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
they may not be able to provide ade- lowed. These instructions are available alerting them to the applicable section in
quate protection. from your authorized Mercedes-Benz the Operator’s Manual.
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers Center.
from the coat hooks or handles over the 앫 Given the considerable deployment
door. These items may turn into projec- speed, required inflation volume, and
tiles and cause head and other injuries the textile structure of the air bags,
when the window curtain air bag is de- there is the possibility of abrasions or
ployed. other, potentially more serious injuries
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument resulting from air bag deployment.
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been The front passenger front air bag will only
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the be deployed if:
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
앫 the system senses that the front pas-
based on the rate of vehicle deceleration as as-
sessed by the air bag control unit. senger seat is occupied
USA only: 앫 the 75 indicator lamp in
On the front passenger side, the front air bag de- the center console is not lit
ployment is additionally influenced by the pas- (컄 page 79)
senger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS) 앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
(컄 page 75). ment threshold
USA only:
1 Driver front air bag The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
! Canada only:
Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
2 Front passenger front air bag the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required the front passenger seat. This could cause the
for the second stage inflation of the air bag. front or side impact air bag on the front passen-
Driver and front passenger front air bags
are deployed: The air bags will not deploy in impacts ger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- system’s deployment threshold.
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment ed by the fastened seat belts.
threshold
앫 independently of the side impact
air bags
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact air bags, window curtain In addition, the window curtain air bags 2 Occupant Classification System
air bags are deployed: (USA only)
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The side impact air bags 1 and window automatically turns the front passenger
curtain air bags 2 are not deployed in im- front air bag on or off based on the classi-
pacts which do not exceed the system’s fied occupant weight category determined
deployment threshold. by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
i The system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact air bag, the window cur-
tain air bag and the emergency tensioning de-
1 Side impact air bags vice.
2 Window curtain air bag Occupants must sit properly belted in a po-
The side impact air bags 1 and window sition that is as upright as possible with
curtain air bags 2 are deployed: their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-
ment threshold ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able
앫 independently of the front air bags to properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

pear to increase or decrease due to Warning! G When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being up
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
If the 75 indicator lamp illumi- to or less than the weight of a typical
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
nates when an adult or someone larger than 12-month-old child in a standard child re-
underneath the seat or stuffed between
a small individual is in the front passenger straint, the 75 indicator lamp
seat and middle console or between seat
seat, have the front passenger re-position will illuminate when the engine is started
and door or due to objects applying pres-
himself or herself in the seat until the and remain illuminated, indicating that the
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
75 indicator lamp goes out, or front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
sure that the seat has clearance in all di-
rections at all times. check whether objects are caught under or When the OCS senses that the front passen-
around the seat. ger seat is classified as being empty, the
i If your seat, including your trim cover and More information about air bag display mes- 75 indicator lamp will illumi-
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take nate when the engine is started and remain
the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz sages (컄 page 403).
illuminated, indicating that the front passen-
Center. In the event of a collision, the air bag control ger front air bag is deactivated.
Only seat accessories approved by unit will not allow front passenger front
Mercedes-Benz may be used. air bag deployment when the OCS classified
Both driver and the front passenger should the front passenger seat occupant as being
always use the 75 indicator up to or less than the weight of a typical
lamp as an indication of whether or not the 12-month-old child in a standard child re-
front passenger is properly positioned. straint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passen-

ger seat occupant is classified as being
If the 75 indicator lamp is illu-
minated, the front passenger front air bag is
Warning! G
heavier than the weight of a typical deactivated and will not be deployed. According to accident statistics, children
12-month-old child seated in a standard If the 75 indicator lamp is not are safer when properly restrained in the
child restraint or as being a small individual illuminated, the front passenger front air rear seating positions than in the front seat-
(such as a young teenager or a small adult), bag is activated and will be deployed: ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the 75 indicator lamp will illu- that children be placed in the rear seats
minate for approximately 6 seconds when 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
the engine is started and then, depending on 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
position, children 12 years old and under
occupant weight sensor readings from the threshold
must be seated and properly secured in an
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 앫 independently of the side impact appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
75 indicator lamp illuminated, air bags mended for the size and weight of the child.
the front passenger front air bag is deacti- If the front passenger front air bag is
vated. With the 75 indicator The infant or child restraint must be properly
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
influenced by:
activated. belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration and top tether strap, fully in accordance
When the OCS senses that the front passen- as assessed by the air bag control unit with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
앫 front passenger’s weight category as tions.
someone larger than a small individual, the identified by the Occupant Classification
75 indicator lamp will illumi- Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
System (OCS).
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the seat belts and for children 12 years old and
engine is started and then go out, indicating under, use an appropriately sized infant re-
that the front passenger front air bag is acti- straint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
vated. recommended for the size and weight of the
child. 컄컄
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Children can be killed or seriously injured by 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child re- 앫 If you have to place a child in a
an inflating air bag. Note the following im- straint on the front passenger seat be- forward-facing child restraint on the
portant information when circumstances re- cause circumstances require you to do front passenger seat, move the seat as
quire you to place a child in the front so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
passenger seat: 75 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and se-
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag ger front air bag is deactivated. Should cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
technology designed to turn off the front the indicator lamp not illuminate or go seat belt according to the child seat
passenger front air bag in your vehicle out while the restraint is installed, manufacturer’s instructions. For
when the system senses the weight of a please check installation. Periodically children larger than the typical
typical 12-month-old child or less along check the indicator lamp while driving to 12-month-old child, the front passenger
with the weight of a standard appropri- make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the front air bag may or may not be activat-
ate child restraint on the front passen- 75 indicator lamp goes out ed (컄 page 77).
ger seat. or remains out, do not transport a child
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on on the front passenger seat until the
the front passenger seat will be serious- system has been repaired. A child in a
ly injured or even killed if the front pas- rear-facing child restraint on the front
senger front air bag inflates in a collision passenger seat will be seriously injured
which could occur under some circum- or even killed if the front passenger front
stances, even with the air bag technolo- air bag inflates.
gy installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does The 75 indicator lamp is lo-
not mean that the front passenger front air bag cated in the center console. Warning! G
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 75) If the 1 indicator lamp and the
may have determined: 75 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical Occupant Classification System. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated
child restraint - both instances where the in this case.
system suppresses deployment of the front
In order to ensure proper operation of the
passenger front air bag even though the im-
pact met the criteria and was of sufficient air bag system and OCS:
severity to deploy the driver front air bag 앫 Have the system checked as soon as
앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
1 Indicator lamp possible by qualified technicians.
ual (such as a young teenager or a small The 75 indicator lamp 1 will Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
adult) or a child weighing more than the be illuminated, except with the SmartKey Center.
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
removed or in starter switch position 0
standard child restraint - instances where the ruffled storage bag on the back of
the system may suppress deployment of the (컄 page 38).
the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the
front passenger front air bag even though
OCS may not be able to properly approx-
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
imate the occupant weight category.
cient severity to deploy the driver front
컄컄
air bag
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-

앫 Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat. tem (USA only) Warning! G
앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any After turning the SmartKey in the starter If the 75 indicator lamp should
items to the seats. switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
앫 Do not stuff objects such as books be- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tween the middle console and the front twice, the 75 indicator lamp Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat. located in the center console illuminates. If passenger seat.
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
앫 Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects. front passenger seat and the system sens-
es the occupant as being an adult, the For more information, see the “Practical
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright hints” section (컄 page 393).
75 indicator lamp will illumi-
position with your back against the seat
nate and go out after approximately
backrest.
앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
6 seconds. Warning! G
self from the seat by using the handle If the seat is not occupied and the system
Never place anything between seat cushion
over the door as this may cause the OCS senses the front passenger seat as being
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
to be unable to correctly approximate empty, the 75 indicator lamp
the occupant weight category. the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
will illuminate and not go out.
cation System. The bottom of the child seat
앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced
must make full contact with the passenger
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
Center.
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
앫 Read and observe all warnings in this of an accident, instead of increasing protec-
chapter.
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation The 75 indicator lamp locat-

system (Canada only) ed in the center console will be illuminat- Warning! G
ed, except with the SmartKey removed or
in starter switch position 0. The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
i The system does not deactivate the side im- designed to operate with it. It will not work
pact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
emergency tensioning device.
compatible.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special Never place anything between seat cushion
child seat installed (Canada only) and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
After turning the SmartKey in the starter tem. The bottom of the child seat must
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the make full contact with the passenger seat
1 75 indicator lamp KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
Special BabySmartTM compatible child twice, the 75 indicator lamp could cause injuries to the child in case of an
seats, designed for use with the located in the center console comes on for accident, instead of protecting the child.
Mercedes-Benz system, are required for approximately 6 seconds and then goes
out. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
use with the BabySmartTM air bag deactiva-
installation of special child seats.
tion system. Please contact your autho- If the 75 indicator lamp
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for should not come on or is continuously lit,
information on availability. With the special the system is not functioning. You must
child seat properly installed, the front pas- see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
senger front air bag will not deploy. before seating any child on the passenger
seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 395).
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
When using a BabySmartTM compatible child Do not place powered-on laptops, cell restraint systems is required by law in all
seat on the front passenger seat, the front phones, electronic tags such as those used 50 states, the District of Columbia, the
passenger front air bag will not deploy only in ski passes and like electronic devices on U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
if the 75 indicator lamp re- the front passenger seat. Signals from such
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
mains illuminated. devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
Please be sure to check the indicator every system. Such signal interference may cause
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
time you use the special system child seat. the 75 indicator lamp not to
Should the indicator lamp go out while the come on during self-test or be continuously For more information, see “Fastening the
restraint is installed, please check installa- lit, indicating that the system is not function- seat belts” (컄 page 49).
ing.
tion. If the indicator lamp remains out, do i For information on infants and children trav-
not use the BabySmartTM restraint to trans- eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys-
port children on the front passenger seat un- tems for infants and children, see “Children in
til the system has been repaired. the vehicle” (컄 page 88).
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
off. Always make sure your passenger is backrest in an excessively reclined position highly stressed in an accident must be re-
properly restrained. as this can be dangerous. You could slide placed and their anchoring points must also
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide be checked.
sition your seat belt greatly increases your under it, the seat belt would apply force at Only use seat belts which have been ap-
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- proved by Mercedes-Benz.
accident. You and your passengers should rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint Do not make any modifications to the seat
always wear seat belts. belts. This can lead to unintended activation
when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi-
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries tion and the seat belt is properly positioned or to failure.
can be considerably more severe without on the body. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
your seat belt properly buckled. Without severely weaken them. In a crash they may
your seat belt buckled, you are much more not be able to provide adequate protection.
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
Warning! G Have all work carried out only by qualified
or killed. technicians. Contact an authorized
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Center.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or than there are seat belts available. Be sure
death is lessened if you are properly wearing everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
they are designed if the occupants are prop- use a seat belt for more than one person at
erly wearing their seat belts. a time.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G The system is designed to enhance the

protection offered to properly belted oc-
앫 Never wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
cupants in certain frontal (front air bags such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
and ETD) and side (side impact and win- etc., as these might cause injuries.
앫 Seat belts can only work when used dow curtain air bags and ETD) impacts 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
properly. Never wear seat belts in any on your hips and not across the abdo-
which exceed preset deployment
other way than as described in this sec- men. If the lap belt is positioned across
thresholds and in certain rollovers (win-
tion, as that could result in serious inju- your abdomen, it could cause serious in-
ries in case of an accident. dow curtain air bags and ETD).
juries in a crash.
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul- 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
belt at all times, because seat belts help person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
reduce the likelihood of and potential der. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would in- belt around a person and another per-
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- son or other objects.
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint crease the chance of head and neck in-
system includes SRS (driver front air juries. The shoulder belt would also 앫 Seat belts should not be worn twisted.
bag, front passenger front air bag, side apply too much force to the ribs or abdo- In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full
impact air bags, window curtain air bags men, which could severely injure inter- width of the seat belt to distribute im-
for side windows), ETD (seat belt emer- nal organs such as your liver or spleen. pact forces. The twisted seat belt
gency tensioning device), and front seat against your body could cause injuries.
knee bolsters.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the After a vehicle standstill the warning
앫 Pregnant women should also always use
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion front passenger’s seat belt (with the front chime is reactivated and the seat belt
should be positioned as low as possible passenger seat occupied) is not fastened telltale < is flashing again if the ve-
on the hips to avoid any possible pres- with front doors closed, hicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
sure on the abdomen. (25 km/h).
앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument minated for as long as either the driv- The seat belt telltale < will only go out
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not if both the driver’s and front passenger’s
keep both feet on the floor in front of the fastened. seat belt (with the front passenger seat oc-
seat. If you and/or your passenger release cupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant the seat belt during driving, the seat standing still and a front door is opened.
restraint or toddler restraint or children belt telltale < starts flashing and
in booster seats, always follow the child For more information, see “Practical hints”
the warning chime sounds. (컄 page 388).
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a seat belt force limiter
telltale < will always illuminate
warning chime sounds with increasing
for 6 seconds to remind you and your pas- The seat belts for the front and rear outer
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
sengers to fasten your seat belts. seats are equipped with emergency ten-
or until the driver’s and the front pas- sioning devices and seat belt force limit-
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened senger’s seat belt are fastened. ers.
when the engine is started, an additional
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
warning chime will also sound for a maxi- The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
seat belt remains unfastened after
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s lowing cases:
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
seat belt is fastened.
sounding, the seat belt telltale < 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
stops flashing but continues to be illu- ing the system deployment threshold
minated. 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 if the restraint systems are operational Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt Preventive occupant safety
and functioning correctly, (PRE-SAFE®)
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 68)
seats reduces the retracting force of the
i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
vate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Warning! G
plate properly inserted into buckle).
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to re-
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate duce the effects of a crash on properly
with or without the respective seat belts fas-
seat-belted vehicle occupants. Despite hav-
tened.
ing the PRE-SAFE® system in your vehicle,
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- the possibility of injuries occurring as a re-
es remove slack from the seat belts. Seat sult of an accident cannot be eliminated.
belt force limiters reduce the peak force Therefore, you should always drive carefully
exerted by the seat belts on occupants and adjust your driving to the prevailing
during a crash. road, weather, and traffic conditions.
Warning! G Your vehicle automatically takes preven-

tive measures to better protect the occu-
An Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) that pants in the following hazardous
was activated must be replaced. situations:
When disposing of the emergency tension- 앫 You execute an emergency braking ma-
ing device, our safety instructions must be neuver and the Brake Assist System
followed. These are available at your autho- (컄 page 99) is activated.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The PRE-SAFE® system detects a criti-
cal driving dynamics situation.
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In such cases, the following systems are i The PRE-SAFE® system is activated in the Active head restraints
automatically activated: previously described circumstances only at
speeds exceeding 20 mph (30 km/h). The active head restraints are intended to
앫 The front seat belts are pre-tensioned
When the critical driving dynamic situation has offer the driver and front passenger in-
electrically.
passed without an accident occurring, the creased protection from whiplash type in-
앫 If the vehicle is in a severe skid or is pre-tensioning on the seat belts is deactivated. juries. In the event of a rear-end collision,
spinning, the door windows and the You can then adjust the seat, the door windows the active head restraints on the driver’s
tilt/sliding sunroof close until a small and the tilt/sliding sunroof to their previous po- and front passenger’s seats are designed
gap remains. sition. to move forward in the direction of travel,
If the seat belts do not release: providing the head with increased support
i If the closing procedure of the tilt/sliding earlier on in the collision sequence. The ac-
sunroof or door window is blocked, the tilt/slid-
왘 Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to tive head restraints move forward whether
ing sunroof or door window will stop and open
slightly. the rear until the seat belt tension is di- the seat is occupied or not.
minished.
Vehicles with front passenger seat memo-
ry function*: The locking mechanism releases. Warning! G
앫 If the seat is in an unfavorable position, Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
it will be adjusted to a better position. the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
tive head restraints may not function prop-
erly or offer the degree of protection they
were designed for in the event of a collision.
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
For information on resetting the activated Children in the vehicle

active head restraints, see “Resetting acti- Warning! G
vated head restraints” (컄 page 440). If an infant or child is traveling with you in
For your protection, drive only with properly the vehicle:
You cannot remove the active head re- positioned head restraints.
straint on the driver’s and front passen- 왘 Secure the child using an infant or child
ger’s seats. Adjust the head restraint so that the center restraint appropriate to the age and
For removal of the active head restraints of the head restraint supports the back of size of the child.
we recommend that you contact an autho- the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
왘 Make sure that the infant or child is
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. tential for injury to the head and neck in the
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Warning! G Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- Infant and child restraint seats and
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- information on choosing an appropriate
Only use seat or head restraint covers which restraint system can be obtained from any
have been tested and approved by dent.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Us-
ing other seat or head restraint covers may For information on head restraint adjust-
interfere with or prevent the activation of ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 41). Warning! G
the active head restraints. Contact your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availabil- Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
ity. hicle, even if they are secured in a child re-
straint system. The children could
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫 be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold.
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems

Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s We recommend all infants and children be
Warning! G
metal parts, for example, could become very properly restrained at all times while the Never release the seat belt buckle while the
hot, and the child could be burned on these vehicle is in motion. vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
parts. belt retractor will be deactivated.
Canada only:
If children open a door, they could Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
앫 restraint for the front passenger seat in
injure other persons i Information on child seats with mounting fit-
this vehicle. tings for tether anchorages (컄 page 92).
앫 get out of the vehicle and injure them-
selves or be injured by following traffic. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s For information on LATCH-type child seat an-
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the seat belt have special seat belt retractors chors (컄 page 94).
passenger compartment or trunk unless for secure fastening of child restraints. The use of infant or child restraints is
they are firmly secured in place. For more in- To fasten a child restraint, follow child required by law in all 50 states, the District
formation, see “Loading” (컄 page 273) and restraint instructions for mounting. Then of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
“Useful features” (컄 page 282). pull the shoulder belt out completely and Canadian provinces.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a Infants and small children should be
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate seated in an appropriate infant or child
of: that the special seat belt retractor is acti- restraint system properly secured in
vated. The seat belt is now locked. Push accordance with the manufacturer’s
앫 strong braking maneuvers
down on child restraint to take up any instructions for the child restraint, that
앫 sudden changes of direction slack. complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
앫 an accident
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
belt can again be used in the usual man- 213 and 210.2.
ner.
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A statement by the child restraint

manufacturer of compliance with these Warning! G The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
standards can be found on the instruction
Canada only: Children 12 years old and un- belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
label on the restraint and in the instruction
der must never ride in the front seat, except and top tether strap, fully in accordance
manual provided with the restraint.
in a Mercedes-Benz authorized with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
When using any infant or child restraint BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which tions.
system, be sure to carefully read and operates with the BabySmartTM system in- Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
follow all manufacturer’s instructions for stalled in the vehicle to deactivate the front seat belts and for children 12 years old and
installation and use. passenger front air bag when it is properly under, use an appropriately sized infant re-
Please read and observe warning labels installed. Otherwise they will be struck by straint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this recommended for the size and weight of the
infant or child restraints. happens, serious or fatal injury will result. child.
According to accident statistics, children Children can be killed or seriously injured by
are safer when properly restrained in the an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
rear seating positions than in the front seat- portant information when circumstances re-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend quire you to place a child in the front
that children be placed in the rear seats passenger seat:
whenever possible. Regardless of seating 앫 USA only: Your vehicle is equipped with
position, children 12 years old and under air bag technology designed to turn off
must be seated and properly secured in an the front passenger front air bag in your
appropriate infant or child restraint recom- vehicle when the OCS senses the weight
mended for the size and weight of the child. of a typical 12-month-old child or less
along with the weight of a standard ap-
propriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
90
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child re- 앫 If you have to place a child in a
the front passenger seat will be serious- straint on the front passenger seat be- forward-facing child restraint on the
ly injured or even killed if the front pas- cause circumstances require you to do front passenger seat, move the seat as
senger front air bag inflates in a collision so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
which could occur under some circum- 75 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
stances, even with the air bag technolo- nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and se-
gy installed in your vehicle. The only ger front air bag is deactivated. Should cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
means to completely eliminate this risk the indicator lamp not illuminate or go seat belt according to the child seat
is to never place a child in a rear-facing out while the restraint is installed, manufacturer’s instructions. For
child restraint in the front seat. We please check installation. Periodically children larger than the typical
therefore strongly recommend that you check the indicator lamp while driving to 12-month-old child, the front passenger
always place a child in a rear-facing make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the front air bag may or may not be activat-
child restraint in the back seat. 75 indicator lamp goes out ed (컄 page 77).
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Not foldable rear seat backrest

Warning! G When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
Infants and small children should never seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
share a seat belt with another occupant. becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
During an accident, they could be crushed cident.
between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is hicle, even if the children are secured in a
significantly increased if the child restraints child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
the child is not properly secured in the child hicle equipment and may cause an accident
restraint. and/or serious personal injury. 1 Cover
Children too big for a toddler restraint must 왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage
Installation of infant and child restraint
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
systems ring 3 (컄 page 93).
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
왘 Store cover 1 in a convenient place
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
chorages for a top tether strap at each of (e.g. glove box).
necessary to achieve proper seat belt posi-
tioning for children over 41 lb until they the rear seating positions. 왘 Guide tether strap between head re-
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits straint and top of the seat back.
properly without a booster. Head restraint must be installed (if re-
movable) and positioned such that the
top tether strap can pass freely be-
tween the head restraint and the top of
the seat back.
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Make sure the tether strap is not twist- 왘 Install the child restraint system and
ed. tighten the top tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Foldable rear seat backrest*

왘 Fold rear seat backrest slightly forward
(컄 page 277).
왘 Remove cover from anchorage ring 3.
왘 Guide tether strap between head re- 2 Hook
straint and top of the seat back. 3 Anchorage ring
2 Hook
Head restraint must be positioned such 왘 Securely fasten the hook 2, which is
3 Anchorage ring
that the top tether strap can pass freely part of the tether strap, to the anchor-
왘 Securely fasten the hook 2, which is between the head restraint and the top age ring 3.
part of the tether strap, to the anchor- of the seat back.
age ring 3. i For safety, make sure the hook 2 has at-
왘 Make sure the tether strap is not twist- tached to the anchorage ring 3 beyond the
i For safety, make sure the hook 2 has ated. safety catch, as illustrated. 컄컄
tached to the anchorage ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is at-
tached, the child restraint itself can be se-
cured.
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Child seat anchors - LATCH type

This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a “LATCH”
child seat with the matching mounting fit-
tings.
The anchors are located behind an uphol-
stery blend.
2 Hook 1 Indicates the position of the anchors
3 Anchorage ring 2 Anchors
왘 Swing rear seat backrest to the rear un- 왘 Lift up upholstery blend to access the
til it engages. anchors 2.
왘 Check the rear seat backrest to be 왘 Install child seat according to the
locked in its upright position manufacturer’s instructions.
(컄 page 412).
! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat
Once the top tether anchorage hook is can operate freely with a child seat installed.
attached, the child restraint itself can be
i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be
secured. used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
왘 Install the child restraint system and seat belt system (컄 page 88). Install child seat
tighten the top tether strap according according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
to the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.
94
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation

Children too big for a toddler restraint must Activate the override switch when children
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi- are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul- The children may otherwise injure them-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
necessary to achieve proper seat belt posi- dow opening.
tioning for children over 41 lb until they When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
properly without a booster. from the starter switch, take it with you, and
Install child seat according to manufactur- lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
1 Override switch
er’s instructions. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
2 Indicator lamp
The child seat must be firmly attached to the unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
왘 Press override switch 1. cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
right and left side anchors 2 (컄 page 94).
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear and/or serious personal injury.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result door windows can no longer be operat-
in serious injury or death to the child. ed using the switches located in the For more information on power windows,
rear doors. see the “Controls in detail” section
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or (컄 page 237).
child seat mounting fittings must be re- ! Operation of the rear door windows with the
placed. switches located on the door control panel of the
driver’s door is still possible.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
95
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior i Canada only: Activating

lamps will operate briefly. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
two conditions: 1 second.
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re- Deactivating
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. 왘 Press button 1 again.
Any unauthorized modification to this device or
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. 왘 Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch.
1 Â button
or
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two button.
conditions:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- be inside the vehicle.
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
equipment.
96
Safety and Security
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
앫 Adaptive Brake accidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
The ABS, BAS, ESP®, Adaptive Brake, and effectiveness.
앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic 4MATIC cannot reduce this risk.
Traction System)
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
vailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, the The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
ESP®, and 4MATIC is only achieved with winter proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
tires (컄 page 364), or snow chains as required. of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is run-
ning.
97
Safety and Security
Braking Emergency brake maneuver

At the instant one of the wheels is about to 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
Warning! G
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
the regulating mode.
Warning! G it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the yond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal while experiencing the When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
pulsation. and the ESP® are also switched off. forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels including those resulting from excessive
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
may lock during hard braking, reducing speed in turns, following another vehicle too
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
steering capability and extending the brak- closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
namely braking power and the ability to
ing distance. tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
steer the vehicle.
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
tion of hazardous road conditions and less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
functions as a reminder to take extra care ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
while driving. others.
For more information, see the “Practical

hints” section (컄 page 380).
98
Safety and Security
BAS Adaptive Brake

Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of braking safety as well as increased braking
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can comfort.
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that
tially reducing the braking distance. afforded by the condition of the vehicle Important notes on using the brake
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. system
왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
until the emergency braking situation is 앫 Following extended periods of only mi-
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
over. nor loads to your brake system, you
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
The ABS will prevent the wheels from should occasionally apply the brakes
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
locking. when traveling at high speeds. This im-
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
proves the grip of the brake pads.
When you release the brake pedal, the pabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
brakes function again as normal. The BAS never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
is then deactivated. ous manner which could jeopardize the us- Warning! G
er’s safety or the safety of others.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
Warning! G users when carrying out these braking ma-
neuvers.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
99
Safety and Security
앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered EBP ESP®

roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
produces heat which serves to dry the enhances braking effectiveness by allow- operational as soon as the engine is run-
brake disks and help prevent corro- ing the rear brakes to supply a greater pro- ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction
sion. portion of the braking effort in straight line (force of adhesive friction between the
breaking without a loss of vehicle stability. tires and the road surface) and handling.
앫 On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spin-
prevent the brakes from overheating Warning! G ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
and to reduce brake wear. plying the brakes to the appropriate wheel
When the EBP is malfunctioning, the ABS, and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to BAS, and ESP® are also switched off. works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
drive on for some time so that the air
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys- especially useful while driving off and on
stream will cool down the brakes fast-
tem will still function with full brake boost. wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
er.
However, the rear wheels could lock up dur- also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
앫 Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo- and steering maneuvers.
ing emergency braking situations, for exam-
nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in- ple. You could lose control of the vehicle and The ESP® warning lamp v in the
stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads not cause an accident. Adapt your driving style instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
approved by Mercedes-Benz may im- to the changed driving characteristics. is engaged.
pair the safety of your vehicle.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
100
Safety and Security
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:

Warning! G Warning! G Because the ESP® operates automatically, the
engine and the ignition must be shut off
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in- physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol- it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® or 1) when:
lows: cannot prevent accidents, including those 앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or test dynamometer
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible. hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- raised
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
pabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
tor.
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- erwise seriously damage the brake system.
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to ous manner which could jeopardize the us- For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see
the prevailing road conditions.
er’s safety or the safety of others. “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
Failure to observe these guidelines could with the ESP®” (컄 page 105).
cause the vehicle to skid.
! The ESP® will only function properly if you For more information, see the “Practical
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- use wheels of the recommended tire size hints” section (컄 page 381) and
ing from excessive speed. (컄 page 481). (컄 page 402).
101
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
Warning! G more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-
Switching off the ESP® ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
(except E 63 AMG) Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore- However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve-
mentioned circumstances do not apply any- hicle.
more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize
Warning! G the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
wheel is spinning.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the When you switch off the ESP®
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
maneuvers.
앫 the engine output is not limited, which
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare allows the drive wheels to spin and
wheel is mounted. thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫 the traction control will still apply the
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch brakes to a spinning wheel
off the ESP® in driving situations where it 1 ESP® switch
would be advantageous to have drive 앫 the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking 왘 With the engine running, press ESP®
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as: switch 1 until the ESP® warning
앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
lamp v in the instrument cluster
앫 when driving with snow chains or the Distronic*
comes on.
앫 in deep snow 앫 the cruise control or Distronic* switch
The ESP® is switched off.
off if currently activated
앫 in sand or gravel
102
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® (E 63 AMG only) When you switch off the ESP®
Warning! G 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
When the ESP® warning lamp v is Warning! G 앫 the engine output is not limited, which
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is ® allows the drive wheels to spin
The ESP should not be switched off during
switched off or is not operational due to a
normal driving. Disabling of the system will 앫 the traction control will still apply the
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
result in the following: brakes to a spinning wheel
driving maneuvers is reduced.
앫 no restriction to engine torque 앫 the ESP® operates while you are brak-
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
앫 loss of system supported traction ing
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®. control 앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closed or the Distronic*
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex- 앫 the cruise control or Distronic* switch
tended period with the ESP® switched off. This and understeer characteristics are desired
off if currently activated
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain and requires a highly skilled and experi-
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz enced driver able to handle these critical i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
Limited Warranty. driving situations. more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
You could lose control of your vehicle and However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve-
cause an accident. hicle.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
103
Safety and Security
The switch is located on the center con- Switching on the ESP®

sole. Warning! G 왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
When the ESP® warning lamp v is warning lamp v in the instrument
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is cluster goes out.
switched off or is not operational due to a You are now again in normal driving
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard mode with the ESP® switched on.
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
1 ESP® switch
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
왘 With the engine running, press ESP® tended period with the ESP® switched off. This
switch 1 until the ESP® warning may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
lamp v in the instrument cluster which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
104
Safety and Security
Four wheel electronic traction system

The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
(4MATIC) with the ESP® the engine and the ignition must be shut off
ing from excessive speed.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
Models with all-wheel-drive only. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
! Do not tow with one axle raised. or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a
The 4MATIC improves the vehicle’s ability brake test dynamometer.
to use available traction, e.g. during winter Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged,
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
operation in mountains under slippery road Limited Warranty. erwise seriously damage the brake system.
conditions, by applying power to all four
Operational tests with the engine running can
wheels. ! Performance testing must only be conduct- only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
ed on a two-axle dynamometer.
Warning! G Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged,

which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
If you see the ESP® warning lamp v
flashing in the instrument cluster, proceed
as follows:
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor.
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
105
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized With the SmartKey Once the alarm system has been armed, a
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
someone opens:
Activating
With KEYLESS-GO* 앫 a door
With the SmartKey 왘 Start the engine by means of the 앫 the trunk
start/stop button on the gear selector 앫 the hood
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
lever.
switch. The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
i In case the engine cannot be started (yet the ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
With KEYLESS-GO* vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not diately closed.
operational. Contact an authorized
왘 Turn off the engine by means of the Mercedes-Benz Center or call The alarm system will also be triggered
start/stop button on the gear selector 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or when
lever. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
앫 the vehicle is opened using the
왘 Open the driver’s door. mechanical key
앫 someone opens a door from the inside
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system*
(컄 page 294) provided Tele Aid service was sub-
scribed to and properly activated, and that nec-
essary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
106
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three Canceling the alarm
times, one of the following elements may not be
The indicator lamp located in the central
properly closed: With the SmartKey
locking switch in the center console.
앫 a door 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
앫 the trunk switch.
Close the respective element and lock the vehi- or
cle again.
왘 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
Disarming the alarm system SmartKey.
왘 Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
With KEYLESS-GO*
or KEYLESS-GO*.
왘 Pull an outside door handle.
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
1 Indicator lamp
disarmed. be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
i The alarm system will rearm automatically or
KEYLESS-GO*.
after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
The turn signal lamps flash three times nor the trunk was opened. button (컄 page 39).
to indicate that the alarm system is
armed. The indicator lamp 1 begins to The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
flash after approximately 30 seconds be inside the vehicle.
after arming the alarm system.
107
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Dual-zone automatic climate
control
4-zone automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
109
Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and
find detailed information on how to oper- unlocking, see “Getting started”
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- (컄 page 36) and (컄 page 64).
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section SmartKey
will be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The locking tabs for the mechanical key
given at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ- SmartKey with remote control
ent color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Opening button for trunk
The SmartKey provides an extended oper- (컄 page 121)
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is 3 Mechanical key locking tab
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when 4 Œ Unlock button
you are in close proximity to it. 5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 96)
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
앫 the doors posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-
앫 the trunk lid magnetic radiation.
앫 the fuel filler flap
110
Controls in detail
i Canada only: ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi-

Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry cle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the
Canada. Operation is subject to the following SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is mal-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the two conditions: functioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it (1) This device may not cause interference, and 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey and re-
(2) this device must accept any interference replace them if necessary (컄 page 441).
children unattended in the vehicle, or with ceived, including interference that may 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible cause undesired operation of the device. driver’s door (컄 page 436) and the trunk
for children to open a looked door from the Any unauthorized modification to this device (컄 page 437).
inside, which could result in an accident could void the user’s authority to operate the 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
and/or serious personal injury. equipment. door (컄 page 437) and the trunk
(컄 page 126).
i You can also open and close the windows 앫 Have the vehicle battery checked by an
i USA only: and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* us-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ing the SmartKey (컄 page 239).
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an
conditions: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
cause undesired operation.
equipment.
111
Controls in detail
Factory setting Global unlocking Global locking

i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with 왘 Press button Œ. 왘 Press button ‹.
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. With the trunk and all doors closed:
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If you
wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz times.
Center. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move up. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
armed. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
The vehicle will lock again automatically move down.
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
within approximately 40 seconds of un- armed.
locking if:
Selective setting
앫 neither door nor trunk is opened
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
to reprogram the SmartKey so that press-
starter switch
ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s
앫 the central locking switch is not door, the storage compartment under the
activated armrest, the glove box, and the fuel filler
flap.
112
Controls in detail
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ 앫 The locking knobs in the doors SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un- move up.
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 110) Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
flashes twice. with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
armed.
each with remote control and a removable
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
mechanical key.
lows: Global locking
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
왘 Press button ‹.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler portion of the two SmartKeys with
flap With the trunk and all doors closed: KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three distinguish each SmartKey with
왘 Press button Œ once.
times. KEYLESS-GO unit.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
times.
앫 The locking knob on the driver’s validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
앫 The locking knobs in the doors is checked every time you pull an outside
door move up. move down. door handle.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
armed.
armed. your vehicle unlocks
Global unlocking 앫 the doors
Restoring to factory setting
왘 Press button Œ twice. 앫 the trunk
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. simultaneously for about 5 seconds un- 앫 the fuel filler flap
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 110)
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
flashes twice.
113
Controls in detail
i Canada only:
Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
When leaving the vehicle, always take the two conditions:
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and (1) This device may not cause interference, and
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an ceived, including interference that may
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children cause undesired operation of the device.
to open a locked door from the inside, which Any unauthorized modification to this device
could result in an accident and/or serious could void the user’s authority to operate the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO personal injury. equipment.
1 ‹ Lock button i You can also open and close the windows
2 Š Opening button for trunk i USA only: and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* us-
(컄 page 121) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
3 Mechanical key locking tab Rules. Operation is subject to the following two (컄 page 239).
conditions:
4 Œ Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 96)
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex- ceived, including interference that may
posing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high cause undesired operation.
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
equipment.
114
Controls in detail
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi- Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
cle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, located outside the vehicle within ap-
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunction- KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
ing or the vehicle battery is drained. (컄 page 110).
trunk lid.
앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey with 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary 앫 In order to start the engine with the
tions with normal SmartKey functions
(컄 page 441). (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv- locking with button ‹). 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
er’s door (컄 page 436) and the trunk must be located in the vehicle.
(컄 page 437). 앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 The brake pedal must be firmly de-
앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
door (컄 page 437) and the trunk
pressed. Do not depress the accel-
앫 Never store the SmartKey with
(컄 page 126). erator.
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫 Have the vehicle battery checked by an au- 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
앫 Electronic items such as a cellular
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. positioned farther away from the vehi-
phone or another SmartKey with
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc- cle, the system may no longer recog-
KEYLESS-GO
tioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
Center. 앫 Metallic objects such as coins or The vehicle cannot be locked or the
metal foil engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
Doing so could impair the function of system.
the KEYLESS-GO system. 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
moved from the vehicle (e.g. if passen-
ger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO)
115
Controls in detail
앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO 앫 Remember that the engine can be Factory setting
start/stop button or trying to lock started by anyone with a SmartKey
the vehicle with the outside door with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or with the KEYLESS-GO function
handle the message Key not rec- vehicle. an acoustic signal sounds. The acoustic signal is
ognized appears in the multifunc- Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with activated at the factory. If you wish to deactivate
tion display KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one the feature, or adjust its signal volume, contact
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 with the engine running, the mes-
the vehicle):
sage Key not recognized appears
If you leave the SmartKey with Global unlocking
in the multifunction display while
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and 왘 Pull an outside door handle.
driving off.
locking the vehicle, no message
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or appears in the multifunction display. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
change its present location immediate- Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
seat or insert it in shirt pocket). 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle): move up.
앫 If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you When exiting and trying to lock the ve- 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
can turn it off again with: hicle, the message Key still in ve- armed.
hicle appears in the multifunction
앫 the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button The vehicle will lock again automatically
display. The vehicle will not be locked.
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in- within approximately 40 seconds if:
serted in the starter switch, when
the automatic transmission is in 앫 neither a door nor the trunk is opened
position P 앫 the central locking switch is not acti-
vated
116
Controls in detail
Global locking Selective setting Global unlocking

왘 Press lock button on an outside door If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Pull any outside door handle other than
handle (컄 page 65). to reprogram the SmartKey with the driver’s outside door handle.
KEYLESS-GO so when you pull the driver’s
With the trunk and all doors closed: 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
outside door handle, only the driver’s door
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three and the fuel filler flap unlocks. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
times.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three simultaneously for about 5 seconds un- move up.
times. til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 114) 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
앫 The locking knobs in the doors flashes twice. armed.
move down. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is then function as follows:
armed.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫 The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.
armed.
117
Controls in detail
Global locking Global locking using the KEYLESS-GO 왘 Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid.
lock button on the trunk lid*
왘 Press lock button on an outside door With the trunk and all doors closed:
handle (컄 page 65). Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle may be equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
With the trunk and all doors closed: times.
lock button on trunk lid.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
times. times.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
times. move down.
앫 The locking knobs in the doors 앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
move down. armed.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
armed. the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehi-
i You can also lock the vehicle using the 1 KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid cle or in the trunk.
KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid (depending
on vehicle production date) or, vehicles with i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock
trunk opening/closing system*, KEYLESS-GO button on an outside door handle (컄 page 65) or,
locking/ closing switch (컄 page 121). vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*,
KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch
Restoring to factory setting (컄 page 121).
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹

simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 114)
flashes twice.
118
Controls in detail
Checking batteries in the SmartKey or Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with Opening the doors from the inside
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*
You can open a locked door from the in-
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with side. Open door only when conditions are
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you safe to do so.
The battery check lamp (컄 page 110)
should do the following:
or (컄 page 114) comes on briefly to in-
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in or- KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an autho-
der. rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! If the battery check lamp does not come on 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey,
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the me-
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. chanical key immediately to your car
Replace the batteries (컄 page 441). insurance company.
You can obtain the required batteries at any au- 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. necessary. 1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
i If the batteries are checked within signal Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or will be glad to supply you with a replace-
Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. ment.
119
Controls in detail
i If the vehicle has previously been locked Front doors Opening the trunk
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. tive front door to open door.
Warning! G
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey move up. Make sure the trunk is closed when the en-
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. gine is running and while driving. Among
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot- other dangers, such as blocked visibility, ex-
앫 Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch. the driver’s door. haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
These fumes are damaging to your health.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* In addition the message Switch off lights
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button appears in the multifunction display.
(컄 page 39). Switch off the headlamps. You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle. Rear doors A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
앫 Pull an outside door handle. 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the (1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be respective rear door to unlock door. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the
head clearance.
respective rear door to open door.
120
Controls in detail
Opening the trunk from the outside ! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem*: To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Opening the trunk from the inside
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-

tem*
1 Trunk lid handle
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with 왘 Pull switch 1 until the trunk begins to
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and open.
begins to open. Vehicles without trunk opening/closing The trunk opens. The indicator lamp on
or system* the switch comes on and remains lit
1 Remote trunk opening switch until the trunk is closed.
왘 Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 126).
vehicle must be unlocked.
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked tem*: To stop the opening procedure, press or
separately (컄 page 126). pull the remote trunk opening/closing* switch.
121
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk Closing trunk from the outside

manually Warning! G
Warning! G Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with two or three handles.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
Make sure the trunk is closed when the en- opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-
gine is running and while driving. Among cially careful when small children are
other dangers, such as blocked visibility, ex- around.
haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
These fumes are damaging to your health. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
trunk. You may lock yourself out. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
i If the vehicle was previously centrally cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after 1 Handles
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times
왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
to confirm locking.
handles 1.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possi-
ble inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open auto- 왘 Close trunk with hands placed flat on
matically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is trunk lid.
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals
flash three times. If you are carrying a second
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, you can
still lock the vehicle.
122
Controls in detail
Closing trunk from the inside i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an To interrupt the closing procedure:
automatically* object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
왘 Release switch 1.
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
Warning! G opens slightly. Closing the trunk from the outside au-
tomatically*
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem* you can close the trunk from the in-
the door mounted switch. Monitor the clos-
ing procedure carefully to make sure that no side using the remote trunk opening/ Warning! G
one is in danger of being injured. closing* switch.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or make sure no one is in danger of being in-
pull the door mounted remote trunk open- jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
ing/closing* switch. always keep hands and fingers away from
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter Be especially careful when small children
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are around. To stop the closing procedure,
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk do one of the following:
opening/closing* switch can be operated. 앫 press button Š on the SmartKey or
Therefore, do not leave children unattended SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked 1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch 앫 press or pull the remote trunk open-
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a ing/closing* switch (on the driver’s
왘 Press switch 1 until the indicator
vehicle could result in an accident and/or door)
serious personal injury.
lamp on the switch goes out and the
trunk is closed. 앫 press the trunk closing switch
(컄 page 124) 컄컄
123
Controls in detail
컄컄
앫 press the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing* switch (컄 page 125)
앫 pull the trunk lid handle
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO* Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a 1 Trunk closing switch
1 Trunk closing switch
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury. 왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem* you can close the trunk separately i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
from the outside using the trunk closing piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
switch. closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
opens slightly.
124
Controls in detail
Closing trunk and locking vehicle from 왘 Press switch 1 briefly. Trunk emergency release
outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
With all doors closed:
With the emergency release button, the
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
앫 The locking knobs in the doors trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
tem* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
move down.
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO 앫 The trunk starts to close automati-
locking/closing switch. cally.
times to confirm locking once the
trunk has closed completely.
times.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system is
1 Emergency release button
armed.
왘 Briefly press emergency release
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an button 1.
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the The trunk unlocks and the trunk opens.
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
KEYLESS-GO with you. opens slightly. i The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
125
Controls in detail
Illumination of the emergency release but- i If the vehicle has previously been locked us- Valet locking
ton: ing the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening the
앫 The button will flash for 30 minutes af-
trunk from the inside using the emergency re- i To deny any unauthorized person access to
lease button will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys- the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
ter opening the trunk. tem. lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave
앫 The button will flash for 60 minutes af- To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: only the SmartKey or SmartKey with
ter closing the trunk. KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
앫 Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.
i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk, if the vehicle battery is dis- 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey
charged or disconnected. or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫 Pull an outside door handle.
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 39).
inside the vehicle. 1 Neutral position
2 Locked
왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 122).
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 436).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
126
Controls in detail
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to Automatic central locking Locking and unlocking from the inside
position 2 to lock the trunk.
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
when the ignition is switched on and the Warning! G
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock- proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ing mode by means of the mechanical key. The locking knobs in the doors move down. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk You can open a locked door from the in-
lid lock. side. Open door only when conditions are
왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock- safe to do so.
wise to neutral position 1 to unlock the i The doors are designed to unlock automati- cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
trunk. cally after an accident if the force of the impact and/or serious personal injury.
exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks au-
You can now open the trunk tomatically when the ignition is switched on and
(컄 page 120). the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap- You can lock or unlock the doors and the
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could trunk from inside using the central locking
therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle switch. This can be useful, for example, if
앫 is pushed or towed you want to lock the vehicle before starting
앫 is on a test stand
to drive.
You can deactivate the automatic locking The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
mode using the control system locked with the central locking switch.
(컄 page 176).
127
Controls in detail
i You can open a locked door from inside at Locking

any time. Open door only when conditions are
왘 Press lower half 2 of the central lock-
safe to do so.
ing switch.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will If all doors are closed, the vehicle
not unlock using the central locking switch. locks.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen-
tral locking switch: Unlocking
앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with 왘 Press upper half 1 of the central lock-
KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the ing switch.
Central locking switch complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside The vehicle unlocks.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking 앫 and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
only the door opened from the inside is un-
locked
128
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For more information on seat adjustment, For removal of the active head restraints
see “Adjusting” (컄 page 41). we recommend that you contact an autho- Warning! G
For more information on folding the seats, For your protection, drive only with properly
see “Loading” (컄 page 273). i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that positioned head restraints.
Front seat active head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
For information on head restraint adjust- straint supports the back of the head at eye
ment, see “Seat adjustment” (컄 page 43). level. This will reduce the potential for injury
Warning! G For information on active head restraints, to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 87). cident or similar situation.
For your protection, drive only with properly Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
positioned head restraints. Rear seat head restraints head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Adjust the head restraint so that the center ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
of the head restraint supports the back of dent.
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po- Warning! G Do not interchange head restraints from
tential for injury to the head and neck in the front and rear seat.
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat when the rear seats are occupied. i The rear seat head restraints cannot be ad-
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- justed.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
dent.
folding operation of the head restraints.
You cannot remove the active head re-

straint on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seats.
129
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding head restraints back with Placing head restraints upright Removing and installing rear seat head
switch in the center console restraints* (vehicles with split rear
bench seat* only)
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it

locks into position.
1 Release catch
! Make sure the head restraints engage when
1 Head restraint release switch placing them upright. Otherwise their protective
function cannot be assured. Removing rear seat head restraints
왘 Fold the backrest forward
왘 Press the symbol-side on switch 1 to (컄 page 277).
release the head restraints.
왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 130).
The head restraints will fold backward.
왘 Press head restraint release catch 1
and pull the head restraints out of the
guides.
왘 Fold the backrest back to its original
position.
130
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing rear seat head restraints 왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction

of the arrows until you have reached a
i When installing the head restraints, make comfortable seating position.
sure that:
앫 you place the correct head restraint on the Multicontour seat*
middle seat. It is marked with the letter “M”
on the outside of the metal bars.
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
앫 the head restraints engage fully. cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lum-
Lumbar support bar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest 1 Backrest side bolster
The curvature of the front seats can be ad- cushion height and curvature can be con- 2 Backrest center
justed to help enhance lower back support tinuously varied with switches on the right 3 Backrest bottom
and seating comfort. side of the seat on the driver side, or the 4 Seat cushion depth
left side of the seat on the passenger side.
Seat cushion depth

왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 4.
Backrest contour
왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to
1 Adjustment lever
the desired position using æ or
ç. 컄컄
131
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 왘 Move the backrest support cushion to Seat heating*

the bottom by using button 3 or to the
center by using button 2. The red indicator lamps on the switch
show the heating level selected.
Backrest side bolsters
Level
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using 3 Three indicator lamps on
switch 1. (highest level).
The seat heating automatically
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer
provides the desired contour, then repeat the ad- switches to level 2 after approxi-
1 Front seat heating switch
justment procedure. mately 5 minutes.
2 Two indicator lamps on.
switches to level 1 after approxi-
mately 10 minutes.
1 One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
switches off after approximately
20 minutes. 1 Rear seat heating switch (Canada only)
off No indicator lamp on. Depending on production date, your
vehicle may not be equipped with the rear
seat heating.
132
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching seat heating on Level Switching seat ventilation on

왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). 3 Three indicator lamps on 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the
(highest level). desired ventilation level is set.
왘 Press switch 1.
2 Two indicator lamps on. One or more blue indicator lamps on
Three red indicator lamps on the switch
the switch show the selected ventila-
come on. 1 One indicator lamp on
tion level.
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until de- (lowest level).
sired seat heating level is reached. off No indicator lamp on. Switching seat ventilation off
왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all in-
Switching seat heating off i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat can dicator lamps go out.
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in- be activated using summer opening feature
dicator lamps go out. (컄 page 239). i If one or more of the lamps on the seat ven-
tilation switch are flashing, there is insufficient
i If one or more of the lamps on the seat heat- voltage available since too many electrical con-
ing switch are flashing, there is insufficient volt- sumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
age available since too many electrical switches off automatically.
consumers are turned on. The seat heating The seat ventilation will switch back on again au-
switches off automatically. tomatically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
The seat heating will switch back on again auto- able.
matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
able.
Seat ventilation*
1 Seat ventilation switch
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
133
Controls in detail
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up Each stored position on the front
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different settings. passenger side includes the following
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- settings:
Each stored position on the driver’s side
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
includes the following settings: 앫 Front passenger seat, backrest, head
control, reach and comfort. The head re-
restraint position
straint should also be adjusted for proper 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest, head restraint
height. See also the section on air bags position 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
(컄 page 70) for more information on prop- setting
앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
er seat positioning. setting
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to 앫 Steering wheel position
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
앫 Exterior rear view mirrors’ position
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision. Warning! G
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-
Do not activate the memory function while
dren should be seated in a properly se-
driving. Activating the memory function
cured restraint system that complies with
while driving could cause the driver to lose
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
control of the vehicle.
dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
134
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and ! Do not operate the power seats using the
exterior rear view mirrors to the de- memory button if the seat backrest is in an ex-
sired position (컄 page 41). cessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
damage to front or rear seats.
왘 Press memory button M.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
왘 Release memory button M and press
왘 Press and hold memory position
memory position button 1, 2 or 3 with-
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
in 3 seconds.
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
M Memory button All the settings are stored to the select- have completely moved to the stored
1, 2, 3 Memory position button ed position. positions.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). i Releasing the memory position button stops
movement to the stored positions immediately.
or
The multicontour seat* will continue to be ad-
왘 Open the respective door. justed.
135
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
ing position with adjustment button 3 so that you
see the rear wheel and the road curb.
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
왘 Press memory button M 4.
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as 왘 Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad-
soon as you engage reverse gear R. justment button 3.
For information on activating the parking The parking position is stored if the
position, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror does not move.
mirror parking position” (컄 page 200).
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror i If the mirror does move, repeat the above
button steps. After the setting is stored, you can move
the mirror again.
2 Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror button
3 Adjustment button
4 Memory button M
왘 Stop the vehicle.
왘 Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
136
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
headlamps and use the turn signals, see stops)
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 56)
and see “Turn signals” (컄 page 57). 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left
one stop)
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive 3 M Off
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have Daytime running lamp mode
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low (컄 page 139)
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 4 U Automatic headlamp mode
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* Daytime running lamp mode

headlamps: Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 139)
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor your 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker
steering angle and driving speed, then automati- lamps, tail lamps, license plate
cally shift their beams to either side to better fol- lamps, instrument panel lamps)
low the curvature of the road ahead, increasing
usable illumination over conventional head- 6 B Low beam headlamps or high
lamps. beam headlamps when the com-
bination switch is pushed for-
ward. The tail lamps, license
plate lamps, side marker lamps,
parking lamps and instrument
panel lamps also come on.
7 ‡ Front fog lamps
8 † Rear fog lamp
137
Controls in detail
Lighting
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot-

ten to switch off the headlamps before opening Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the driver’s door.
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
In addition the message Switch off lights times.
appears in the multifunction display. 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
Switch off the headlamps. edly when the system senses bright am-
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic. position U.
Manual headlamp mode
앫 the headlamps will not be automatically With the SmartKey in starter switch
The low beam headlamps and the parking switched on under foggy conditions. position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
lamps can be switched on and off with the start/stop button pressed once, only
exterior lamp switch. To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp the parking lamps and the side marker
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to switch to B when driving or when traffic lamps will switch on and off automati-
position B. and/or ambient lighting conditions require cally.
you to do so. When the engine is running, the low
Automatic headlamp mode beam headlamps, the tail and parking
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
The following lamps switch on and off au- switch from position U to B with the lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
tomatically depending on the brightness of vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. side marker lamps will switch on and
the ambient light: Switching from U to B will briefly off automatically.
앫 switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
Low beam headlamps i USA only:
driving in low ambient lighting conditions With the automatic headlamp mode activated
앫 Tail and parking lamps may result in an accident. you can switch on the high beam headlamps in
앫 License plate lamps low ambient lighting conditions.
앫 Side marker lamps
138
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode Canada only: When the engine is running, and you
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is manda- 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U. tory and therefore in a constant mode. position C, the parking lamps and
When the engine is running, the low the side marker lamps switch on addi-
i With the exterior lamp switch in tionally.
beam headlamps are automatically position M or U, you cannot switch on the
switched on. high beam headlamps. 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
In low ambient light conditions, the fol- The high beam flasher is available at all times. position B, the manual headlamp
lowing lamps will switch on additional- For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp mode has priority over the daytime run-
ly: switch in position B to permit activation of ning lamp mode.
the high beam headlamps. The corresponding exterior lamps
앫 Tail and parking lamps
When the engine is running, and you shift switch on (컄 page 137).
앫 License plate lamps from a driving position to position N or P,
앫 Side marker lamps the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a 3 minute delay.
i With the daytime running lamp mode activat-
ed and the engine running, you cannot switch off
the low beam headlamps manually.
139
Controls in detail
Lighting
USA only: Locator lighting and night security illu- i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
mination lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
is deactivated. Activate the daytime run- Locator lighting and night security illumi- low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
ning lamp mode using the control system, nation are described in the “Control sys- Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode tem” section, see (컄 page 174) and permissible lamp operation.
(USA only)” (컄 page 173). (컄 page 175).
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
i With the daytime running lamp mode activat- Fog lamps exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch
ed and the exterior lamp switch in position M, on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps. position B first.
The high beam flasher is available at all times. Warning! G
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch in position B or U to permit activa- In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
tion of the high beam headlamps. only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
When the engine is running, and you turn
Switching from U to B will briefly
the exterior lamp switch to
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
position C or B, the manual head-
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
lamp mode has priority over the daytime
may result in an accident.
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 137).
140
Controls in detail
Lighting
Front fog lamps Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch
왘 Switch on the low beam 왘 Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄 page 137). headlamps B (컄 page 137).
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to sec-
stop. ond stop.
The front fog lamps switch on. The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on The yellow indicator lamp † in the
(컄 page 137). exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 137).
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
Combination switch
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
The front fog lamps switch off. 1 High beam
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the 2 High beam flasher
The rear fog lamp switches off.
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* Driving forward

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im- Switching on corner-illuminating front
position B (컄 page 137).
prove illumination of the area in the direc- fog lamps
왘 Push the combination switch in direction into which you are turning.
왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will (컄 page 57), depending on whether
beam.
operate with the engine running and with you are turning left or right.
The high beam headlamp indicator
앫 the exterior lamp switch in The respective front fog lamp comes on
lamp A in the instrument cluster
position B (컄 page 137) and illuminates the area in the direc-
comes on (컄 page 26).
or tion into which you are turning.
왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
앫 the exterior lamp switch in or
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam. position U (컄 page 137) 왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc-
The high beam headlamp indicator or tion.
lamp A in the instrument cluster 앫 the daytime running lamp mode The front fog lamp on the side of your
goes out. activated (컄 page 139). steering direction comes on.
High beam flasher i With the automatic headlamp mode activat- i If you have switched on the turn signal for
ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will one side but turn the steering wheel in the oppo-
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. site direction, the corner-illuminating front fog
direction of arrow 2. lamp comes on for the side indicated by the turn
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph signal.
(40 km/h), the corner-illuminating function is The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
not available. for a maximum of 3 minutes. Afterward, it goes
out even if the turn signal is still switched on.
142
Controls in detail
Lighting
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem- If the turn signal should stay on after mak- Driving in reverse
porarily come on on both sides of the vehicle if ing the turn, the turn signal and the cor-
you turn the steering wheel in one direction and ner-illuminating front fog lamps can be Switching on corner-illuminating front
then again in the other direction shortly thereaf- switched off by returning the combination fog lamps
ter. switch to its original position.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will i There may be a brief delay before the cor- position R.
come on automatically depending on the steer- ner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
ing angle, even if you did not switch on either The front fog lamp opposite to your
turn signal. steering direction comes on.
If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out automati- Switching off corner-illuminating front
cally depending on the steering angle. fog lamps
왘 Place the gear selector lever out of
Switching off corner-illuminating front
position R.
fog lamps
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
were activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
143
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘 Press the hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
The hazard warning flasher can be
switch 1. again.
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch All turn signals lamps are flashing. i If the hazard warning flasher has been acti-
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* vated automatically, press hazard warning flash-
removed from the vehicle.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated er switch 1 once to switch it off.
and the combination switch set for either left or
The hazard warning flasher switches on au- right turn, only the respective left or right turn
tomatically when an air bag deploys. signals will operate when the ignition is switched
on.
The hazard warning flasher switch is locat-
ed on the upper part of the center console.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
144
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front 1 Left front reading lamp on/off 앫 open a door
2 Automatic control on/off
앫 open the trunk
The controls are located in the overhead 3 Rear interior lighting on/off
control panel. 4 Right front reading lamp on/off
Activating automatic control
5 Front interior lighting on/off
6 Interior lighting 왘 Press switch 2.
7 Ambient lighting The interior lighting switches on in
8 Front reading lamps darkness, when you:
! An interior lamp switched on manually does 앫 unlock the vehicle
not go out automatically.
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON posi-
starter switch
tion for extended periods of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged battery. 앫 open a door
앫 open the trunk
Deactivating automatic control
The interior lighting switches off after a
i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto- preset time (컄 page 176).
matic mode.
왘 Press switch 2. i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
switches off automatically after approximately
The interior lighting remains switched 5 minutes.
off in darkness, even when you: An interior lamp switched on manually does not
go out automatically.
앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
145
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control Ambient lighting Interior lighting in the rear

You can switch the ambient lighting 7
Switching front/rear interior lighting on The overhead control panel is located
(컄 page 145) on and off, using the “Control
and off above the rear seat bench.
system” (컄 page 175).
왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 5 or 3 (컄 page 145) to switch
on the desired interior light.
왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 5 or 3 again to switch off the
respective interior light.
Switching front reading lamps on and off

The front reading lamps are located in the
lower edge of the interior rear view mirror. 1 Left rear reading lamp on/off
2 Left rear reading lamp
왘 Press front reading lamp 3 Ambient lighting switch, to brighten
switch 1 or 4 (컄 page 145) to 4 Ambient lighting
switch on the desired front reading 5 Right rear reading lamp
lamp. 6 Right rear reading lamp on/off
왘 Press front reading lamp 7 Ambient lighting switch, to dim
switch 1 or 4 again to switch off the 8 Rear interior lamp
respective front reading lamp.
146
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear reading lamps Door entry lamps Trunk lamps

왘 Press rear reading lamp
For better orientation in the dark, the cor- The trunk lamps switch on if the trunk is
switch 1 or 6 to switch on the re-
responding door entry lamps will switch on opened.
spective rear reading lamp.
in the darkness when you open a door and
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
왘 Press rear reading lamp the automatic control is activated.
lamps switch off automatically after ap-
switch 1 or 6 again to switch off the
The door entry lamps will switch off when proximately 10 minutes.
respective rear reading lamp.
the corresponding door is closed.
Ambient lighting i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the head-
왘 Press ambient lighting switch 3 or 7 lamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for ap-
repeatedly until ambient lighting 4 proximately 5 minutes.
has reached the desired intensity.
You can switch the ambient lighting on and
off, using the “Control system”
(컄 page 175).
147
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Adjusting instrument cluster illumina-

cluster can be found in the “At a glance” Warning! G tion
section of this manual (컄 page 26).
No messages will be displayed if either the Use the reset button 1 to adjust the illu-
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- mination brightness for the instrument
play is inoperative. cluster.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
i The instrument cluster illumination is
mation about your driving conditions, such dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
as speed or outside temperature, warning/ bient light conditions.
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes- The instrument cluster illumination will also be
sages or the failure of any systems. Driving adjusted automatically when you switch on the
characteristics may be impaired. vehicle’s exterior lamps.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
1 Reset button with added caution. Visit an authorized To brighten illumination
The instrument cluster is activated when Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 왘 Turn the reset button 1 in the instru-
you ment cluster clockwise.
앫 open a door The instrument cluster illumination will
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 37) brighten.
앫 press the reset button 1 To dim illumination

앫 switch on the exterior lamps 왘 Turn the reset button 1 in the instru-
You can modify the instrument cluster set- ment cluster counterclockwise.
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of The instrument cluster illumination will
the control system (컄 page 169). dim.
148
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature indicator ! Excessive coolant temperature triggers the Trip odometer
coolant temperature warning lamp (컄 page 386)
and (컄 page 415) and a warning in the multifunc- Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-
Warning! G tion display (컄 page 386) and (컄 page 415). ter display (컄 page 151).
The engine should not be operated with the cool- 왘 If it is not displayed, press button è
앫 Driving when your engine is overheated ant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so
or ÿ repeatedly until the trip
can cause some fluids which may have may cause serious engine damage which is not
leaked into the engine compartment to covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited odometer appears.
catch fire. You could be seriously Warranty. 왘 Press and hold the reset button 1
burned. (컄 page 148) until the trip odometer is
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may reset.
cause serious burns which can occur rise close to 248°F (120°C).
just by opening the engine hood. Stay Tachometer
away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. The red marking on the tachometer de-
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle notes excessive engine speed.
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
149
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
front bumper area. Due to its location, the ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
sensor can be affected by road or engine garage), you will notice a delay before the
Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. This lower temperature is displayed.
means that the accuracy of the displayed
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
The outside temperature indicator is not de- temperature can only be verified by com-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and parison to a thermometer placed next to
perature indications caused by heat
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. the sensor, not by comparison to external
radiated from the engine during idling or
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
slow driving.
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in

the instrument cluster (컄 page 26).
150
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
position 1. The control system enables you conditions must always be his/her primary
to: focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to set the language for Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Outside temperature
messages in the instrument cluster dis- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Trip odometer
play, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Automatic transmission program mode
ly 14 m) every second. 4 Main odometer
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of 5 Current gear selector lever position
the language selected. The control system relays information to Above illustration shows the standard
the multifunction display. display.
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 154).
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display 5 Moving within a menu:

Operating the control system Press button
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting j for next display
(컄 page 151) are controlled by the buttons the volume: k for previous display
on the multifunction steering wheel. Press button
æ up/to increase Depending on the selected menu
(컄 page 154), pressing the buttons on the
ç down/to decrease
multifunction steering wheel will alter what
3 Telephone*: is shown in the multifunction display.
Press button
The information available in the multifunc-
s to take a call tion display is arranged in menus, each
to dial containing a number of functions or sub-
to redial menus.
t to end a call The individual functions are then found
to reject an incoming call within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
4 Menu systems: erations under AUDIO, for example). These
Press button functions serve to call up relevant informa-
è for next menu tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
ÿ for previous menu
152
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions
functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for
ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ re-
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 166).
peatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
앫 If you press button k or j re-
is installed in your vehicle.
peatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in The menus are described on the following
the current menu. pages.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5

Standard display AMG1 AUDIO NAV* Distronic*
(컄 page 157) (컄 page 157) (컄 page 161) (컄 page 163) (컄 page 163)
Commands/submenus
Digital speedometer Engine oil temperature Selecting radio station Show route guidance in- Calling up settings
Calling up maintenance Vehicle supply voltage Selecting satellite radio structions, current direc-
system display station* tion traveled
RACETIMER Operating CD player

Overall analysis
Lap analysis
1
AMG vehicles only.
155
Controls in detail
Control system
Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9

Vehicle status mes- Settings Trip computer TEL*
sage memory1
(컄 page 164) (컄 page 166) (컄 page 179) (컄 page 181)
Calling up vehicle mal- Resetting to factory set- Fuel consumption statis- Loading phone book
function, warning and tings tics since start
Commands/submenus
system status messages Instrument cluster sub- Fuel consumption statis- Searching for name in
stored in memory menu tics since the last reset phone book
Time/Date submenu Resetting fuel consump-
tion statistics
Lighting submenu Distance to empty
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are

designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-
tem and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
The first function displayed in each menu will au-
tomatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu AMG menu Use buttons k or j to select the fol-
lowing functions in the AMG menu:
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly i This function is only available in AMG vehi-
to select the functions in the standard cles. Function Page
display menu. Vehicle supply voltage 158
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
The following functions are available: you the gear currently engaged as well as RACETIMER 158
the engine oil temperature. Overall analysis 160
Function Page
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Lap analysis 160
Calling up digital speedometer 157
until the AMG menu appears.
Calling up maintenance service 366
indicator i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to
Display digital speedometer gear indicator 1 as a reminder to upshift.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer appears
in the multifunction display. 1 Gear indicator
2 Engine oil temperature
i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full en-
gine speed.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle supply voltage RACETIMER

왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears. Warning! G
왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
see the vehicle supply voltage.
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads 1 Gear indicator
is prohibited under all circumstances and 2 RACETIMER
the driver is and must always remain re- 3 Lap
sponsible for following posted speed limits.
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
The RACETIMER allows you to time and position 2 (컄 page 37).
1 Gear indicator save driving stretches in hours, minutes
2 Vehicle supply voltage and seconds. i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you cannot adjust the volume using
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly buttons æ or ç.
until you see the AMG menu.
Starting the RACETIMER
왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
see the RACETIMER. 왘 Press button æ.
The timer starts.
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Displaying intermediate time Saving lap time and starting a new lap
왘 Press button ç while the timer is i You can save up to nine laps.
running.
왘 Press button ç while the timer is
The intermediate time is shown for running. The intermediate time will be
5 seconds. shown for 5 seconds.
왘 Press button ç within the next 1 Gear indicator
Stopping the RACETIMER
5 seconds. 2 RACETIMER
왘 Press button æ. 3 Best lap time
The intermediate time shown will be
The timer stops. 4 Lap number
saved as a lap time.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the The RACETIMER begins timing the new
Smartkey to position 1 (컄 page 38) or, in vehi- lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and soon as the intermediate time is called
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
up.
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on (컄 page 38) or
restart the engine (컄 page 52) and then press
the æ button.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting current lap Overall analysis Lap analysis

왘 Press button æ while the timer is i These functions are only available if you i These functions are only available if you
running. have saved at least one lap and have stopped the have saved at least two laps and have stopped
RACETIMER. the RACETIMER.
The timer stops.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
왘 Press button ç.
until you see the AMG menu. until you see the AMG menu.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
왘 Press button j repeatedly until you 왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
see the overall analysis. see the lap analysis.
Deleting all laps
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘 Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘 Press the reset button twice 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 1 Lap number
(컄 page 27). 2 Overall driving time 2 Lap time
왘 Press button æ. 3 Maximum speed 3 Maximum speed
4 Overall distance driven 4 Lap length
The timer starts. The saved laps are de- 5 Average speed 5 Average speed during lap
leted.
왘 Press button j or k to see other
i When you switch off the engine, the lap analyses.
RACETIMER will be reset to “0” after
30 seconds. All laps are deleted. i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
AUDIO menu Selecting radio station Selecting satellite radio station*

(USA only)
왘 Turn on COMAND and select radio. Re-
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
fer to separate COMAND operating in- The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap-
the audio equipment which you currently
structions. plication.
have turned on.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Select SAT radio with the correspond-
If no audio equipment is currently turned
until you see the currently tuned sta- ing softkey in the radio menu.
on, the message AUDIO off appears in the
tion in the multifunction display.
multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Selecting radio station 161
Selecting satellite radio station* 161
1 SAT mode and preset number
Operating CD player 162 1 Waveband setting 2 Setting for station selection using
2 Station frequency memory
3 Channel name or number
until the desired station is found. 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found. 컄컄
i You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio, see separate
operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual man-
ner.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 i Additional optional satellite radio equipment Operating CD player i To select a CD from the CD changer maga-
and a subscription to satellite radio service pro- zine, press a number on the COMAND system
vider are required for satellite radio operation. i The COMAND system and the CD changer key pad located in the center console.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center can play audio CDs as well as MP3-CDs.
for details and availability for your vehicle. Selecting MP3-CD track
For more information, refer to separate
Selecting CD track
왘 Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD.
COMAND operating instructions. 왘 Turn on COMAND and select CD or
Refer to separate COMAND operating
CD changer. Refer to separate
instructions.
COMAND operating instructions.
until the settings for the MP3-CD cur-
until the settings for the CD currently
rently being played appear in the multi-
being played appear in the multifunc-
function display.
tion display.
1 MP3 mode
1 Current CD (for CD changer)
2 Current track
2 Current track
until the desired track is selected.
until the desired track is selected.
162
Controls in detail
Control system
i Level of information displayed will vary de- NAV* menu Distronic* menu
pending on the information contained on the
MP3-CD insert in the single CD player of the The NAV menu contains the functions Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
COMAND system. needed to operate your navigation system. rent settings for your Distronic system.
To select a MP3-CD from the CD changer maga- What information is shown in the multi-
zine, press a number on the COMAND system function display depends on whether the
until you see the message NAV in the
key pad located in the center console. Distronic system is active or inactive.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
앫 If COMAND is switched off, the mes-
tion of this manual (컄 page 252) for in-
sage NAV off appears in the multifunc-
tion display. structions on how to activate Distronic.
앫 With COMAND switched on but route
until you see one of the following two
guidance not activated, the direction of
pictures in the multifunction display.
travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveled on appear in
the multifunction display.
앫 With COMAND switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
structions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Vehicle status message memory menu

When Distronic is deactivated, you will see With Distronic activated, the Distronic
Use the vehicle status message memory
the standard display in the multifunction display is shown in the multifunction dis-
menu to scan malfunction and warning
display. play and one or two segments around the
messages that may be stored in the sys-
set speed are illuminated in the
tem. Such messages appear in the multi-
speedometer.
function display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected stored.
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
164
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status messages have been re- 왘 Press button k or j.

Warning! G corded
The stored messages will now be dis-
Malfunction and warning messages are only If conditions have occurred causing status played in the order in which they have
indicated for certain systems and are inten- messages to be recorded, the number of occurred. For malfunction and warning
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction messages appears in the multifunction dis- messages, see “Vehicle status messag-
and warning messages are simply a remind- play: es in the multifunction display”
er with respect to the operation of certain (컄 page 396).
systems and do not replace the owner’s Should the vehicle’s system record any
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain conditions while driving, the number of
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all messages will reappear in the multifunc-
required maintenance and safety checks tion display when the SmartKey in the
performed on the vehicle and by bringing starter switch is turned to position 0 or re-
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz moved from the starter switch.
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 396). i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-
er switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly see high priority messages in the multifunction
until the vehicle status message mem- display (컄 page 396).
ory appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there are
no messages stored.
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings
available in the Settings menu:
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
In the Settings menu there are two func-
Function Page menus to the factory settings.
tions:
Resetting all settings 166 왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
앫 The function To reset: Press reset
ment cluster (컄 page 148) for approxi-
button for 3 seconds, with which you Submenus in the Settings menu 167
mately 3 seconds.
can reset all the settings to the original Instrument cluster submenu 169
factory settings. In the multifunction display you will see
Time/date submenu 171 the request to press the reset button
앫 A collection of submenus with which
Lighting submenu 173 again to confirm.
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle. Vehicle submenu 176 왘 Press the reset button again.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Convenience submenu 178 The functions of all the submenus will
until the Settings menu is seen in the reset to factory settings.
i The settings you have changed will not be re-
set unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time. After approximately
5 seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the
For safety reasons, the Headlamp mode func-
tion in the Lighting submenu is not reset while
driving.
166
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.

Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
왘 Press button j.
with button æ.
In the multifunction display you see the With the selection marker on the desired
collection of the submenus. submenu, use the button j to access
the individual functions within that sub-
menu. Once within the submenu, you can
use the button j to move to the next
function or the button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
왘 Press button ç. button æ or ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
167
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience

(컄 page 169) (컄 page 171) (컄 page 173) (컄 page 176) (컄 page 178)
Selecting speedometer display Synchronizing the time Setting daytime running Setting automatic Activate easy-en-
mode lamp mode (USA only) locking try/exit feature
Selecting language Setting the time (hours) Setting locator lighting Audio search function Setting parking posi-
tion for exterior rear
view mirror1
Selecting display (speed dis- Setting the time (minutes) Ambient lighting
play or outside temperature)
for status line
Selecting display (speed dis- Setting the date (month) Setting headlamps de-
play or outside temperature) layed shut-off
for basic display Setting the date (day) Setting interior lighting
Setting the date (year) delayed shut-off
1
If equipped.
168
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language

Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. clus- button æ or ç to the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr.
ter submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
cluster display settings. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
functions are available:
until the message Display unit until the message Language appears in
Function Page Speed-/odometer appears in the multi- the multifunction display.
function display. The selection marker is on the current
Selecting speedometer display 169
mode The selection marker is on the current setting.
setting.
Selecting language 169
Selecting display (speed display 170
or outside temperature) for sta-
tus line display
Selecting display (speed display 170
or outside temperature) for basic 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
display 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the language to be used for the multi-
speedometer unit to km or miles. function display messages. 컄컄
169
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 Available languages: Selecting display (speed display or out- Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature) for status line display side temperature) for basic display
앫 German
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
앫 English
button æ or ç to the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr.
앫 French cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
앫 Italian 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Spanish until the message Status line dis- until the message Basic display ap-
play appears in the multifunction dis- pears in the multifunction display.
앫 Dutch play. The selection marker is on the current
앫 Danish The selection marker is on the current setting.
앫 Swedish setting.
앫 Portuguese
앫 Turkish
앫 Russian
i Russian is available for Canada vehicles
only. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
왘 Press button æ or ç to select the display permanently shown in the
the status line to Speed or Outside multifunction display.
temp..
i You will see the status indicator when you

have called up a different display from the stan-
dard display.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Synchronizing the time Setting the time (hours)

Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can only be seen when time
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date sub- with COMAND and navigation module*. synchronization is switched off.
menu to change the time and date display
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
settings. The following functions are avail-
button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
able:
submenu. submenu.
Function Page 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Synchronizing the time 171 until the message Time, synchroniz. until the message Time, hours Press
with Head Unit appears in the multi- R to confirm appears in the multifunc-
Setting the time (hours) 171
function display. tion display.
Setting the time (minutes) 172
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the hour set-
Setting the date (month) 172 setting. ting.
Setting the date (day) 172
Setting the date (year) 173
i Information on setting the time, refer to sep-

arate COMAND instructions.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the

the desired setting. hours.
왘 Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄 page 148).
171
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the time (minutes) Setting the date (month) Setting the date (day)
This function can only be seen when time 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
synchronization is switched off. button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
submenu. until the message Set date Month ap- until the message Set date Day ap-
pears in the multifunction display. pears in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Time, minute(s) The selection marker is on the month The selection marker is on the day set-
Press R to confirm appears in the setting. ting.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the

month. day.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the

minutes.
왘 Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄 page 148).
172
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (year) Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘 Move the selection marker with Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
button æ or ç to the Time/Date tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu i This function is not available in countries
submenu. to change the lamp and lighting settings on where the daytime running lamp mode is manda-
your vehicle. The following functions are tory and therefore in a constant mode.
available: 왘 Move the selection marker with
until the message Set date Year ap-
pears in the multifunction display. Function Page button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
The selection marker is on the year set- Setting daytime running lamp 173
ting. mode (USA only) 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamp mode ap-
Setting locator lighting 174
pears in the multifunction display.
Setting ambient lighting 175
The selection marker is on the current
Setting headlamps delayed 175 setting.
shut-off
Setting interior lighting delayed 176
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the shut-off
year.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select

manual operation (manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (constant) activat-
ed. 컄컄
173
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 With daytime running lamp mode activated Setting locator lighting 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
and the exterior lamp switch in until the message Function Surround
With the locator lighting feature activated
position M or U, the low beam lighting appears in the multifunction
and the exterior lamp switch in
headlamps are switched on when the en- display.
position U, the following lamps will
gine is running.
switch on during darkness when the vehi- The selection marker is on the current
In low ambient light conditions the follow- cle is unlocked using button Œ on the setting.
ing lamps will switch on additionally: SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
앫 Parking lamps
앫 Parking lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 Side marker lamps 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
For more information on the daytime run- the locator lighting function On or Off.
ning lamp mode, see “Lighting” 앫 Front fog lamps
(컄 page 137). 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
The locator lighting switches off when the position U when exiting the vehicle.
i For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting driver’s door is opened.
submenu to factory settings while driving The locator lighting feature is activat-
If you do not open a door after unlocking ed.
(컄 page 166) will not deactivate the daytime
running lamp mode. the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approxi-
The following message appears in the multifunc-
mately 40 seconds.
tion display: Lighting - Cannot be com-
pletely reset to factory settings 왘 Move the selection marker with
while driving. button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
174
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting ambient lighting Setting night security illumination 왘 Move the selection marker with
(Headlamps delayed shut-off) button æ or ç to the Lighting
Use this function to adjust the brightness
submenu.
of the ambient lighting. Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
15 seconds during darkness after exiting until the message Headlamps delayed
button æ or ç to the Lighting
the vehicle and closing all doors. shut-off appears in the multifunction
submenu.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated display.
and the exterior lamp switch in The selection marker is on the current
until the message Ambient light lev-
position U before the engine is turned setting.
el appears in the multifunction display.
off, the following lamps will switch on
The selection marker is on the current when the engine is turned off:
setting.
앫 Parking lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Side marker lamps 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
Headlamps delayed shut-off On or
앫 Front fog lamps Off.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select If after turning off the engine you do not 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
the desired brightness of the ambient open a door or do not close an opened
lighting. position U before turning off the en-
door, the lamps will automatically switch gine. 컄컄
The setting 1 represents the darkest off after 60 seconds.
level and setting 5 the brightest level.
The ambient light is switched off at set-
ting 0.
175
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 Youcan temporarily deactivate the de- Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off Vehicle submenu
layed shut-off feature:
Use this function to set whether you would Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set-
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the like the interior lighting to remain on for tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
SmartKey in the starter switch to 10 seconds during darkness after you have make general vehicle settings. The follow-
position 0. removed the SmartKey from the starter ing function is available:
switch.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to Function Page
position 0. 왘 Move the selection marker with
Setting automatic locking 176
The delayed shut-off feature is deacti- button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu. Audio search function 177
vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
switch. Setting automatic locking
until the message Interior lighting
delayed shut-off appears in the mul- Use this function to activate or deactivate
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
tifunction display. the automatic central locking. With the au-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- tomatic central locking system activated,
ton on the gear selector lever the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
setting.
(컄 page 39). speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch

Interior lighting delayed shut-off
On or Off.
176
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Setting station selection mode 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
until the message Automatic door the desired station selection mode.
Use the Audio search function to select
locking appears in the multifunction You can select:
the manual or memory station selection
display.
mode for the radio (컄 page 161). 앫 frequenc.
왘 Move the selection marker with 앫 memory selects next stored station
setting.
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
until the message Audio search func-
tion appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch The selection marker is on the current
Automatic door locking On or Off. setting.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

Access the Convenience submenu via the
Warning! G until the message Easy-entry func-
tion appears in the multifunction dis-
Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub- You must make sure no one can become play.
menu to change the settings for a number trapped or injured by the moving steering
of convenience features. The following wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is The selection marker is on the current
functions are available: activated. setting.
Function Page To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
Activating easy-entry/exit fea- 178 the following:
ture 앫 Move steering column stalk
Setting parking position for exte- 179 (컄 page 45).
rior rear view mirror1 앫 Press one of the memory position but-
1 tons (컄 page 135). 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
If equipped.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- Easy-entry function On or Off.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
Use this function to activate and deacti- unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
vate the easy-entry/exit feature feature, which could result in an accident
(컄 page 46). and/or serious personal injury.

button æ or ç to
the Convenience submenu.
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Trip computer menu
view mirror until the message Mirror adjust.
parking aid appears in the multifunc- Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
Depending on production date, your vehi-
tion display. tistical data on your vehicle. The following
cle may not be equipped with this function.
information is available:
Use the Mirror adjust. parking aid The selection marker is on the current
setting. Function Page
function to select whether the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror should be Fuel consumption statistics 180
turned downward during parking maneu- since start
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For Fuel consumption statistics 180
additional information, see “Activating ex- since last reset
terior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 200). Resetting fuel consumption 180
statistics
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
Mirror adjust. parking aid On or Distance to empty 181
button æ or ç to
the Convenience submenu. Off.
179
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since start Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu. trip computer menu. trip computer menu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message From start appears until the message Since reset appears until you see the reading that you want
in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display: to reset in the multifunction display.
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 26) until
the value is reset to 0.
1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since start 3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last re-
set
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
180
Controls in detail
Control system
Distance to empty TEL* menu

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly A driver’s attention to the road must always
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
until the message Range: appears in be his/her primary focus when driving. For
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
the multifunction display. your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
personal injury.
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
The calculated remaining driving range
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
based on the current fuel tank level ap- You can use the functions in the Tel menu
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
pears in the multifunction display. to operate your telephone, provided it is
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele- connected to a hands-free system and
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- switched on.
tions permit. 왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- steering wheel repeatedly until the Tel
hicle. menu appears in the multifunction dis-
i If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a ve- play.
hicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
range. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is Which messages will appear in the multi-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- function display depends on whether your
ly 14 m) every second. telephone is switched on or off:
앫 If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL off.
181
Controls in detail
Control system
앫 If the telephone is on: Answering a call Ending a call or rejecting an incoming

call
The telephone will then search for a When your telephone is ready to receive
network. During this time the multi- calls, you can answer a call at any time. In 왘 Press button t.
function display is empty. the multifunction display you will then see
the message, or if available, the caller ID Dialing a number from the phone book
As soon as the telephone has found a
(number and name):
network, READY appears in the multi- If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
function display. you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the Tel menu in the mul-
tifunction display.
왘 Press button s.
This standby message indicates that your You have answered the call. In the mul-
telephone is ready for use and you can op- tifunction display you see the length of
erate it using the control system. the call.
182
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button j or k. 왘 Press button s. Redialing

The control system reads the phone The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most recent-
book which is stored in the telephone. number. ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
This may take several minutes. In the the need to search through your entire
앫 If the connection is successful, the
multifunction display you will see the phone book.
name of the party you are calling
message Please wait.
and the duration of the call will ap- 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
When the message Please wait disappear in the multifunction display. until you see the Tel menu in the mul-
pears, the phone book has been load- tifunction display.
ed.
왘 Press button s.
In the multifunction display you see the
until the desired name appears in the
first number in the redial memory.
The stored names are displayed in as-
앫 If no connection is made, the con- until the desired name appears in the
cending or descending alphabetical or-
trol system stores the dialed num- multifunction display.
der.
ber in the redial memory. 왘 Press button s.
i If you press and hold button j or k
for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rap- The control system dials the selected
idly through the list of names until you release phone number.
the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing
button t.
183
Controls in detail
For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever

automatic transmission, see “Automatic Warning! G
transmission” (컄 page 52). The gear selector lever is located on the
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- lower part of the center console.
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear structing the pedals’ range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between the
automatic transmission reacts by pedals. You could then no longer brake or
adjusting its shift program. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission injury.
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
converter (gasoline engine) or oxidation catalyst
(diesel engine) to heat up more quickly to oper- P Park position
ating temperature. R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i The current gear selector lever position P,
R, N or D appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 186).
184
Controls in detail
Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.

Warning! G Do not place full load on the engine until the
The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
lever out of park position P or neutral when the vehicle is stopped.
앫 gear selector lever position D
position N if the engine speed is higher than
(컄 page 186) with gear ranges Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the period when driving off on slippery road
(컄 page 189)
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose 앫 the selected program mode: drivetrain which is not covered by the
control of the vehicle and hit someone or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(C/S) (컄 page 190)
something. Only shift into gear when the When the gear selector lever is in drive
engine is idling normally and when your right or
position D, you can influence transmission
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. (M/C/S) (E 63 AMG only) shifting by:
(컄 page 194)
앫 limiting the gear range
An additional indication of the current gear 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
selector lever position can be found on the 앫 changing gears manually
(컄 page 188)
cover of the shifting-gate.
앫 the vehicle speed
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
185
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever positions Effect Effect

The current gear selector lever position ì Park position The SmartKey can only be
appears in the multifunction display. Gear selector lever position removed from the starter switch
when the vehicle is parked. Place with the gear selector lever in
gear selector lever in park park position P. With the
position P only when vehicle is SmartKey removed, the gear
stopped. The park position is not selector lever is locked in park
position P.
intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked. If the vehicle’s electrical system
Rather, the driver should always is malfunctioning, the gear
set the parking brake in addition selector lever could remain
to placing the gear selector lever locked in park position P
in park position P to secure the (컄 page 438).
1 Current gear selector lever position vehicle. í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
186
Controls in detail
Effect ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other

reason with gear selector lever in neutral Warning! G
ë Neutral position N can result in transmission damage
No power is transmitted from the that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Limited Warranty. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the from the starter switch, take it with you, and
vehicle can be moved freely Warning! G lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
(pushed or towed). tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
To avoid damage to the trans- gear selector lever from park position P,
selector lever not fully engaged in park
mission, never engage neutral which could result in an accident and/or
position P is dangerous. Also, park
position N while driving. serious personal injury.
position P alone is not intended to or capa-
If the ESP® is deactivated or ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,
malfunctioning: possibly hitting people or objects.
Move gear selector lever to neu-
Always set the parking brake in addition to
tral position N only if the vehicle
shifting to park position P (컄 page 62).
is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
icy roads. When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
ê Drive
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
The transmission shifts bustible materials such as grass, hay or
automatically. All forward gears leaves can come into contact with the hot
are available. exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
187
Controls in detail
Driving tips Stopping Maneuvering

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas,
Accelerator position e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
transmission’s shifting behavior: releasing the brakes.
When you stop for a longer period of time
Less throttle Earlier upshifting 왘 Accelerate gently.
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
왘 Set the parking brake.
Kickdown 왘 Move the gear selector lever to park Working on the vehicle
position P.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration. Warning! G
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
When working on the vehicle, set the
resistance.
parking brake and move gear selector lever
Depending on the engine speed the to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
transmission shifts into a lower gear. could roll away.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
188
Controls in detail
Gear ranges The selected gear range appears in the Effect

With the gear selector lever in drive é The transmission shifts through
position D and driving in program mode C fourth gear only.
or S (컄 page 190), you can select a gear è The transmission shifts through
range for the automatic transmission to third gear only.
operate within.
With this selection you can use
Gear selector lever (컄 page 191): the braking effect of the engine.
You can limit the gear range by pressing
ç The transmission shifts through
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
second gear only.
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+). Allows the use of engine’s
1 Current gear range braking power when driving
Steering wheel gearshift control*
(컄 page 192): 앫 on steep downgrades
Effect
You can limit the gear range by pulling the 앫 in mountainous regions
left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel ï The transmission shifts through
gearshift control, and reverse the gear sixth gear only (applies to 앫 under extreme operating
range limit by pulling the right gearshift vehicles with 7-speed automatic conditions
paddle on the steering wheel gearshift transmission only). æ The transmission operates in
control. î The transmission shifts through first gear only.
fifth gear only (applies to
For maximum use of engine’s
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
braking effect on very steep or
transmission only).
lengthy downgrades.
189
Controls in detail
Automatic shift program The selected program mode appears in the

The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Program mode selector switch

(E 63 AMG only)
M Manual For manual gear shifting 1 Current program mode
(컄 page 194)
! Never change the program mode when the
C Comfort For standard driving gear selector lever is out of park position P. This
Program mode selector switch
could result in a change of driving characteristics
C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For sporty driving
for which you may not be prepared.
S Sport For standard driving i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
190
Controls in detail
왘 Press program mode selector switch Gear selector lever one-touch Limiting gear range
repeatedly until the letter of the gearshifting
desired program mode appears in the
multifunction display. With the gear selector lever in drive posi- Warning! G
tion D and driving in program mode C or S,
Select C for comfort driving On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
you can limit or extend the gear range.
(E 63 AMG: for standard driving): in order to obtain braking action. This could
If your vehicle is equipped with manual result in drive wheel slip and reduced
앫 The vehicle starts out in second
shift program M, you can use the gear vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
gear (both forward and reverse) for
selector lever to manually shift the gears. prevent this type of loss of control.
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear i For information on using the gear selector
range 1 is selected. lever in program mode M, see “Manual shift pro- 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
gram E 63 AMG” (컄 page 194). the left in the D- direction.
앫 Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. The transmission will shift to the next
Do not place full load on the engine until the lower gear as permitted by the shift
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when operating temperature has been reached. program. This action simultaneously
you give more gas. The engine then limits the gear range of the transmis-
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
operates at lower rpms and the when the vehicle is stopped. sion (컄 page 189).
wheels are less likely to spin.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
Select S for standard driving period when driving off on slippery road
i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
(E 63 AMG: for sporty driving): surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
drivetrain which is not covered by the
앫 The vehicle starts out in first gear. exceeded.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 Upshifts occur later. The following instructions describe opera-
tion of the gear selector lever when driving
in the automatic program mode C or S.
191
Controls in detail
Extending gear range Canceling gear range limit Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting*
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
the right in the D+ direction. in the D+ direction until D reappears in
Steering wheel gearshift control is avail-
The transmission will shift to the next the multifunction display (컄 page 186).
able on vehicles with AMG-Sport Package*
higher gear as permitted by the shift The transmission will shift from the and E 63 AMG only.
program. This action simultaneously current gear range directly to gear
With the gear selector lever in drive
extends the gear range of the transmis- range D.
position D and driving in program mode C
sion.
or S, you can limit or extend the gear
Shifting into optimal gear range
i If you press on the accelerator when the en- range.
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. in the D- direction.
shift program M, you can use the steering
The transmission will automatically wheel gearshift control to manually shift
select the gear range suited for optimal the gears.
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more i For information on using the steering wheel
gearshift control in program mode M, see “Man-
gears. ual shift program E 63 AMG” (컄 page 194).
192
Controls in detail
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Limiting gear range
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Warning! G
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended in order to obtain braking action. This could
period when driving off on slippery road result in drive wheel slip and reduced
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. prevent this type of loss of control.
Gearshift paddles
(example illustration E 63 AMG) 왘 Briefly pull left shift paddle 1.
1 Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or The transmission will shift to the next
downshift (in program mode M) lower gear as permitted by the shift
2 Right shift paddle: extending gear program. This action simultaneously
range or upshift (in program mode M) limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion (컄 page 189).
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift paddles when the gear selector lever is i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
in position P, N or R. shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
The following instructions describe opera- gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
tion of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
193
Controls in detail
Extending gear range Canceling gear range limit Manual shift program E 63 AMG
왘 Briefly pull right shift paddle 2. 왘 Pull and hold right shift paddle 2
In addition to the automatic shift
The transmission will shift to the next until D reappears in the multifunction
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
higher gear as permitted by the shift display (컄 page 186).
with the manual shift program M.
program. This action simultaneously The transmission will shift from the
In the manual program mode M,
extends the gear range of the transmis- current gear range directly to gear
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
sion. range D.
is switched off and you need to change the
i If you press on the accelerator when the en- Shifting into optimal gear range gears by manually upshifting or downshift-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission ing using the steering wheel gearshift
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. 왘 Pull and hold left shift paddle 1. paddles (컄 page 193) or the gear selector
The transmission will automatically lever.
select the gear range suited for optimal ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
acceleration and deceleration. This will Do not place full load on the engine until the
involve shifting down one or more operating temperature has been reached.
gears. Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
194
Controls in detail
The program mode selector switch is Activating manual shift program Upshifting
located on the lower part of the center
왘 Press program mode selector switch ! In the manual program mode M, the trans-
console.
repeatedly until the M for manual pro- mission will not upshift, even if the engine has
gram mode M appears in the multifunc- reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
tion display. next gear before the engine has reached its over-
revving range. Make absolutely certain that the
The transmission switches to the engine speed does not reach the red marking on
manual program mode M. Automatic the tachometer (컄 page 26). Otherwise the
shifting is switched off. The gear range engine could be damaged which is not covered
is not limited. by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
You can change the gears manually when 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the gear selector lever is in drive the right in the D+ direction.
position D. You can upshift or downshift or
Program mode selector switch through the gears in succession.
왘 Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
M Manual For manual gear shifting
i The manual program mode M will not be (컄 page 193).
C Comfort For standard driving stored. When the engine is turned off with the
manual program mode M selected, the transmis- The transmission shifts to the next
S Sport For sporty driving sion will go to the automatic program mode higher gear.
The selected program mode appears in the (C or S) when the engine is restarted. If, instead of the manual program mode
multifunction display (컄 page 190). symbol M, the p symbol appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 190), shift to
i For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program” the next higher gear. The fuel supply will
(컄 page 190), “Gear selector lever one-touch otherwise be interrupted to prevent the
gearshifting” (컄 page 191), and “Steering wheel engine from overrevving.
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting*”
(컄 page 192).
195
Controls in detail
If you have selected the AMG menu in the Downshifting Kickdown

control system and you are driving in the
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M, upshift
indicator 2 in the multifunction display
Warning! G manual program mode M is not possible.
advises you to upshift before the engine On slippery road surfaces, never downshift Deactivating manual shift program
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you in order to obtain braking action. This could
can drive at the maximum engine speed for 왘 Press the program mode selector
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
each gear without overrevving the engine. switch (컄 page 195) repeatedly
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
until C or S appears in the multifunction
prevent this type of loss of control.
display.
or
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction. 왘 Restart the engine.
or The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
1 Gear indicator 왘 Briefly pull left shift paddle 1
2 Upshift indicator (컄 page 193). The manual program mode M is not
stored.
왘 Shift to the next higher gear. The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be inter-
rupted to prevent the engine from over- i When you brake or stop, the transmission
revving. shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or take off.
196
Controls in detail
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-

sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
197
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see i The headlamps will automatically be Rear view mirrors
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 58). cleaned when you have
앫 switched on the headlamps For more information on setting the rear
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 47).
and
The button is located on the left side of the 앫 operated the windshield wipers with wind- Auto-dimming mirrors
dashboard. shield washer fluid fifteen times
The reflection brightness of the exterior
When you switch off the ignition, the counter re-
sets. rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
For information on filling up the washer automatically to glare when
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*” 앫 the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 332). and
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mir-
ror
1 Headlamp cleaning button The rear view mirrors will not react if
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). 앫 reverse gear R is engaged
왘 Press button 1. 앫 the interior lighting is turned on
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
198
Controls in detail
Good visibility

The auto-dimming function does not react if In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may Exercise care when using the
incoming light is not aimed directly at the escape from the mirror housing if the mirror passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
sensors in the interior rear view mirror. glass breaks. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al- curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob-
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not low the liquid to come into contact with jects in mirror are closer than they appear.
react, for example, if the rear window sun- eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. Check your interior rear view mirror or
shade* is in raised position. In case it does, immediately flush affected glance over your shoulder before changing
area with water, and seek medical help if lanes.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, necessary.
you may not be able to observe traffic con-
ditions and could cause an accident. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely re-
moved only while in the liquid state by applying
plenty of water.
199
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
parking position previously stored driving position:
왘 Make sure you have stored a parking
Follow these steps to activate the mirror position for the passenger-side exterior 앫 10 seconds after you put the gear se-
parking position so that the passen- rear view mirror (컄 page 136). lector lever out of position R
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
왘 Vehicles equipped with Mirror 앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds
turned downward to the stored position.
adjust. parking aid function in the a speed of approximately 6 mph
The buttons are located on the driver’s Convenience submenu (컄 page 179): (10 km/h)
door. Make sure the Mirror adjust. park-
앫 immediately when you press button 1
ing aid function in the Convenience
for driver’s side mirror.
submenu of the control system is
switched to On.
왘 Press button 3 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror stored position.
button
2 Adjustment button
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
200
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare

while driving.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others. 1 Sun visor 5 Sun visor
2 Vanity mirror 6 Additional visor*
3 Mirror cover 7 Mounting
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down when you ex- 4 Mirror lamp
perience glare. If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘 To use the vanity mirror 2, lift up the
왘 Disengage sun visor 5 from
mirror cover 3.
mounting 7.
i If sun visor 1 is disengaged from 왘 Pivot sun visor 5 to the side.
mounting 7 with mirror cover 3 open, mirror
lamp 4 will switch off. 왘 Adjust the sun visor 5 by pushing or
pulling in direction of arrows.
i Close mirror cover 3 (if open) before you
disengage the sun visor 5 from mounting 7
and pivot it to the side.
201
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade* Roller sunblind* in the rear doors

Warning! G (Canada only)
The switch is located in the center console.
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone be-
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-
dure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be im-
mediately halted by briefly pressing
switch 1. To reverse direction of move-
ment, press switch 1 again.
왘 Pull the roller sunblind out using the

1 Rear window sunshade switch Warning! G hooks.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 왘 Attach the hooks at the top.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup- SmartKey or the SmartKey with
port against the window frame. ! Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do not
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take let it snap back, as the retractor could be dam-
왘 Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sun- it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not aged.
shade. leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
왘 Press switch 1 briefly to lower the
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
sunshade.
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
202
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Activating Deactivating

왘 Press button 1 (컄 page 206) or 왘 Press button F or 1 again.
The rear window defroster uses a large
(컄 page 222) or button F The indicator lamp on the button goes
amount of power. To keep the battery
(컄 page 207) or (컄 page 223) on the out.
drain to a minimum, switch off the
respective climate control panel.
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically The indicator lamp on the button ! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
deactivated after approximately 6 to comes on. means that too many electrical consumers are
17 minutes of operation depending on the operating simultaneously and there is insuffi-
outside temperature. cient voltage in the battery. The system re-
sponds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
Warning! G As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically turns itself
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be back on.
removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
203
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
(only available on E 320 BLUETEC,

E 350, E 350 4MATIC)
204
Controls in detail
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for left center air vent for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Cockpit air vent, fixed (Canada only)
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
6 Right side defroster air vent, fixed
7 Right side air vent, adjustable
for right side air vent
9 Climate control panel
a Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side air vent
b Left side air vent, adjustable
c Left side defroster air vent, fixed
205
Controls in detail
USA only
1 Temperature control, driver’s side 6 Rear window defroster b Decreasing air volume
2 Front defroster 7 Temperature control, passenger side c Air recirculation
3 Increasing air volume 8 MAX COOL on/off d Air distribution and air volume
4 Display 9 AC cooling on/off (automatic, manual)
5 Air distribution a Climate control on/off
206
Controls in detail
Canada only
1 Temperature control, driver’s side 6 Rear window defroster b Decreasing air volume
2 Front defroster 7 Temperature control, passenger side c Air recirculation
3 Increasing air volume 8 Residual heat/ventilation d Air distribution and air volume
4 Display 9 AC cooling on/off (automatic, manual)
5 Air distribution a Climate control on/off
207
Controls in detail
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- may require replacement of the filter before its
the climate control system in either the au- ters the passenger compartment through scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
or heats the interior depending on the se- If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
The air conditioning will not engage (no
lected interior temperature and the cur- before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ture” (컄 page 239). The climate control will then
rent outside temperature.
(컄 page 217). adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat- Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
that enters the passenger compartment air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
through the air vents can be very hot or very window.
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature).
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro-
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance be-
tween unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
tion control (컄 page 206) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
208
Controls in detail
Deactivating the climate control i To switch the system on, you can also press Activating
system another button, with the exception of 1 or
왘 Press button U (컄 page 206) or
F.
(컄 page 207) while the engine is run-
Warning! G Operating the climate control system
ning.
in automatic mode The indicators for automatic air volume
When the climate control is switched off, the and air distribution in display 4
outside air supply and circulation are also i When operating the climate control system (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) come
switched off. Only choose this setting for a in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to on. Air volume and air distribution are
short time. Otherwise the windows could adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri- automatically controlled.
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering bution.
왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 7
you and others. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off.
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) to sepa-
rately adjust the air temperature on
Deactivating each side of the passenger compart-
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 206) or
Warning! G ment.
(컄 page 207). The temperature of the vehicle interior
If you switch off the cooling function the
windows can fog up more quickly. Window is adjusted automatically.
Reactivating
fogging may impair visibility and endanger
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. you and others.
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 206) or
(컄 page 207) again.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
209
Controls in detail
Deactivating Setting the temperature Decreasing

왘 Press button or Q 왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or
Use temperature controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207). 7 (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207)
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) to separate-
The AUTO indicator for air volume in the slightly counterclockwise.
ly adjust the air temperature on each side
display 4 (컄 page 206) or of the passenger compartment. You The climate control system will corre-
(컄 page 207) goes out. The automatic should raise or lower the temperature set- spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
function for air volume is switched off, ting in small increments, preferably start- perature.
and air volume is controlled according ing at 72°F (22°C). The climate control will
to the desired setting. Automatic air adjust to the set temperature as fast as
distribution remains switched on. possible.
or
Increasing
왘 Press air distribution button 5
왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207).
7 (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207)
The AUTO indicator for air distribution in slightly clockwise.
the display 4 (컄 page 206) or
(컄 page 207) goes out. The automatic The climate control system will corre-
function for air distribution is switched spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
off, and air distribution is controlled ac- perature.
cording to the desired position. Auto-
matic air volume remains switched on.
210
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution The following symbols are located in the 왘 Use air distribution control rocker
display 4 (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207): switch 5 (컄 page 206) or
Use air distribution control rocker (컄 page 207) until the desired symbol
switch 5 (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) to Symbol Function appears in the display 4 (컄 page 206)
adjust the air distribution. b Directs air into the entire or (컄 page 207).
vehicle interior
The AUTO indicator for automatic air dis-
c Directs air to the windshield, tribution in the display 4 goes out.
through the side air vents and The automatic function for air distribu-
cockpit air vent (Canada only) tion is switched off, and air distribution
Z Directs air to the windshield is controlled according to the desired
and through the side air vents setting.
X Directs air to the windshield, i The air volume continues to be controlled
through the side air vents and according to the indicator in the display 4.
to the footwells
a Directs air through the cockpit Opening the cockpit air vent (Canada
(Canada only), center, side and only) and center air vents
rear passenger compartment 왘 Turn thumbwheels 1 and 5
air vents (컄 page 204) upward.
Y Directs air to the footwells The cockpit air vent 3 and the center
d Directs air to the footwells and air vents 2 and 4 are open.
through the side air vents
211
Controls in detail
Closing the cockpit air vent (Canada Adjusting air volume Front defroster
only) and the center air vents
Nine blower speeds are available. You can use this setting to defrost the
왘 Turn thumbwheels 1 and 5
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
(컄 page 204) downward. 왘 Press button to decrease
You can also defog the windshield and the
or Q to increase air volume
The cockpit air vent 3 and the center windows.
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) to the
air vents 2 and 4 are closed.
desired level. i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the windows are clear again.
Opening the side air vents The AUTO indicator for air volume in the
display 4 (컄 page 206) or
왘 Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
(컄 page 207) goes out. The automatic
(컄 page 204) upward.
function for air volume is switched off,
The side air vents 7 and b are open. and air volume is controlled according
to the desired setting.
Closing the side air vents
i The air distribution continues to be con-
왘 Turn thumbwheels 8 and a trolled according to the indicator in the
(컄 page 204) downward. display 4.
The side air vents 7 and b are
closed.
212
Controls in detail
Activating Deactivating Windshield fogged on the outside

왘 Press button 0 or 왘 Press button 0 or i Keep this setting selected only until the
P (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207). P (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) windshield is clear again.
again.
The indicator lamp on the button 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
comes on. The indicator lamp on the button goes (컄 page 58).
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The air conditioning switches If the automatic air distribution is switched
automatically to the following func- The previous settings are once again in off:
tions: effect.
왘 Turn air distribution control 5 to a
앫 cooling on to dehumidify i The cooling remains switched on. or Y (컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207).
앫 maximum blowing and heating
power (depends on cooling
temperature)
앫 air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫 the air recirculation mode is
switched off
i If you have switched on the defrost function
using the 0 or P button, you cannot
make any other settings.
213
Controls in detail
Maximum cooling MAX COOL Deactivating Air recirculation mode

(USA only)
왘 Press button 8 (컄 page 206) again.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
MAX COOL disappears in the display 4
You can use this setting to provide the fast- unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(컄 page 206).
est possible cooling of the vehicle interior from the outside (e.g. before a driving
(when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or The previous settings are once again in through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
tilt/sliding panel* are closed). effect. intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
i To switch the maximum cooling function off,
you can also press button ´, U, 0 or
왘 Press button 8 (컄 page 206). 1 (컄 page 206). Warning! G
MAX COOL appears in the display 4
(컄 page 206). Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-
ing you and others. If the windows begin to
The air conditioning switches
fog on the inside, switching off the air
automatically to the following functions:
recirculation mode immediately should clear
앫 maximum cooling interior window fogging. If interior window
앫 maximum blowing power fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 217) is activated, or
앫 the air recirculation mode is switched press button 0 or P.
on
214
Controls in detail
Activating Deactivating Air recirculation mode with conve-

nience closing or opening feature
왘 Briefly press button , (컄 page 206) 왘 Press button , (컄 page 206) or
or (컄 page 207). (컄 page 207).
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes Warning! G
comes on. out.
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au- sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
matically at high outside temperatures. tomatically: possibility of anyone being harmed by the
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is opening or closing procedure.
the air recirculation mode is automatically below approximately 41°F (5°C) In the event that the procedure causes po-
switched on. 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is tential danger, the closing of the windows
A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- turned off can be immediately halted by pressing or
mately 30 minutes. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature pulling the respective window switch. The
If you have turned off the air conditioning is above approximately 41°F (5°C) closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be im-
(컄 page 217) or the outside temperature is be- mediately halted by moving the switch for
low 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction. 컄컄
not switch on automatically.
215
Controls in detail
컄컄 Convenience closing Convenience opening

Vehicles with panorama roof*:
When using the air recirculation mode with 왘 Press button , (컄 page 206) or 왘 Press button , for approximately
convenience closing feature, should the up- (컄 page 207) for approximately 2 seconds.
ward movement of a window be blocked by 2 seconds. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
some obstruction including but not limited
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position.
to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
will close. You can release button , You can release button , once the
reversal feature will not operate.
once the closing procedure has begun. opening procedure has begun. The win-
In the event that the procedure causes po-
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof dows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
tential danger, the closing of the windows
continue closing until they are fully opening until they have reached their
and tilt/sliding panel can be immediately
closed. The indicator lamp on the but- previous position. The indicator lamp
halted by releasing the , button.
ton comes on. The air recirculation on the button goes out. The air recircu-
The closing of the windows and the tilt/slid- mode is activated. lation mode is deactivated.
ing sunroof can be reversed by again press-
ing and holding the , button. i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only re-
turn to its previous position if it has not been
moved to another position using the respective
window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
ter it was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that has been
moved will remain in its current position if
button , is used to reopen the remaining
windows or tilt/sliding sunroof.
216
Controls in detail
Vehicles with panorama roof* Air conditioning Deactivating

Convenience closing: It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
The cooling function, only operational
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
왘 Press and hold button , when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
control system. The air in the vehicle will
(컄 page 206) or (컄 page 207) until the cle interior down to the selected tempera-
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are ture. The cooling function also
closed or have reached the desired po- dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, 왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 206) or
sition. The indicator lamp on the button thus preventing the windows from fogging (컄 page 207).
comes on. The air recirculation mode is up. The indicator lamp on the button goes
activated.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath out.
Convenience opening: the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
왘 Press and hold button , until the
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
opened or have reached the desired Warning! G
position. The indicator lamp on the but-
ton goes out. The air recirculation If you turn off the cooling function, the
mode is deactivated. vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
217
Controls in detail
Activating Residual heat and ventilation Activating

(Canada only)
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can 왘 Switch off the ignition.
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
With the engine switched off, it is possible 왘 Press button T (컄 page 207).
ing.
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior REST in the display 4 (컄 page 207)
왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 206) or for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes comes on.
(컄 page 207) again. use of the residual heat produced by the
The indicator lamp on the button engine. Deactivating
comes on. i If you switch on the residual heat function 왘 Press button T (컄 page 207) again.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant when temperatures are high, only the ventilation
will be switched on. REST in the display 4 (컄 page 207)
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
goes out.
which are harmful to the ozone layer. i Regardless of the selected air volume, the
blower operates at low speed. i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
앫 when the ignition is switched on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is i How long the system will provide heating de-
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it- pends on 앫 after about 30 minutes
self off.
앫 the coolant temperature 앫 if the battery voltage drops
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
앫 the temperature set by the operator 앫 if the coolant temperature is too low
The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
of the air distribution control setting.
218
Controls in detail
Rear passenger compartment The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents compartment are located in the rear
왘 Move the slider for the left center air
center console.
vent 1 or right center air vent 2 to
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
the left, right, up or down.
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 206) or The air flow is directed in the corre-
(컄 page 207). sponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 1 i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
and 2 for the rear passenger compartment is for the center air vents 1 and 2 upward.
nearly the same as at the dashboard center air
vents. Adjusting air volume
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 or 4 up or down.
1 Left center air vent, adjustable The air volume is increased or
2 Right center air vent, adjustable decreased.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
right rear center air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
left rear center air vent
219
Controls in detail
(only available on E 550, E 550 4MATIC,

E 63 AMG)
220
Controls in detail
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for left center air vent for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Cockpit air vent, fixed (Canada only)
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
for right center air vent
6 Right side defroster air vent, fixed
7 Right side air vent, adjustable 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control for side air vent
for right side air vent 2 Side air vent, adjustable
9 Climate control panel
a Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side air vent
b Left side air vent, adjustable
c Left side defroster air vent, fixed
221
Controls in detail
USA only
1 Air distribution, driver’s side 7 Air distribution, passenger side c Climate control on/off
2 Front defroster 8 Air distribution and air volume, d Decreasing air volume
3 Temperature rocker switch, driver’s passenger side (automatic, manual) e MAX COOL on/off
side 9 AC cooling on/off f Air recirculation
4 Display a Rear air-conditioning remote control g Air distribution and air volume,
5 Temperature rocker switch, b Increasing air volume driver’s side (automatic, manual)
passenger side
6 Rear window defroster
222
Controls in detail
Canada only
1 Air distribution, driver’s side 7 Air distribution, passenger side c Climate control on/off
2 Front defroster 8 Air distribution and air volume, d Decreasing air volume
3 Temperature rocker switch, driver’s passenger side (automatic, manual) e Residual heat/ventilation
side 9 AC cooling on/off f Air recirculation
4 Display a Rear air-conditioning remote control g Air distribution and air volume,
5 Temperature rocker switch, b Increasing air volume driver’s side (automatic, manual)
passenger side
6 Rear window defroster
223
Controls in detail
The climate control is a 4-zone intelligent With the help of a sun sensor, the climate
Warning! G climate control system. Your vehicle interi- control determines the relation of the sun
or is divided into 4 zones. to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
When operating the climate control, the air the inside temperature for every individual
that enters the passenger compartment zone.
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). You can set the temperature for each of
This may cause burn or frostbite to unpro- the 4 zones separately.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air The climate control is operational whenev-
vents. Always keep sufficient distance be- er the engine is running. It cools the vehi-
tween unprotected parts of the body and the cle’s interior according to the angle and
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu- intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside tem-
tion controls (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) perature and the selected temperature.
to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle in- You can operate the climate control sys-
terior that are not in the immediate area of tem in either the automatic or manual
unprotected skin. mode.
224
Controls in detail
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) Deactivating the climate control
odors are filtered out before outside air en- may require replacement of the filter before its system
ters the passenger compartment through scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
The air conditioning will not engage (no

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior Warning! G
before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode (컄 page 234) is ture” (컄 page 239). The climate control will then When the climate control is switched off, the
deactivated. adjust the interior temperature to the set value outside air supply and circulation are also
much faster. switched off. Only choose this setting for a
Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind- short time. Otherwise the windows could
shield free of snow and debris. fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
Follow the recommended settings for heat- Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the you and others.
ing and cooling given on the following pag- air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, window.
Deactivating
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others. 왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 222) or
(컄 page 223) until the display 4
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) is
cleared.
225
Controls in detail
Reactivating Operating the climate control system Activating

in automatic mode
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. 왘 Press one button U (컄 page 222) or
(컄 page 223) while the engine is run-
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 222) or i When operating the climate control system
(컄 page 223) again. ning.
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri- The indicator lamp on the button
bution. comes on. AUTO appears in the
effect.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is display 4 (컄 page 222) or
i To switch the system on, you can also press switched on. This function can be switched off. (컄 page 223). The air volume and air
another button, with the exception of 1 distribution are adjusted automatically.
(USA only) (컄 page 222) or F and T
(Canada only) (컄 page 223). Warning! G 왘 Use temperature rocker switches 3
and 5 (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223)
If you switch off the cooling function the to separately adjust the air tempera-
windows can fog up more quickly. Window ture on each side of the passenger
fogging may impair visibility and endanger compartment.
you and others.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
i You can switch the automatic climate con-
trol system on and off for each side of the pas-
senger compartment as desired.
226
Controls in detail
Deactivating Setting the temperature Increasing

왘 Press button or Q 왘 Push top of temperature control rocker
Use temperature control rocker
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223). switch 3 and/or 5 (컄 page 222) or
switches 3 and 5 (컄 page 222) or
The AUTO indicator in the display 4 (컄 page 223).
(컄 page 223) to separately adjust the air
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) goes temperature on each side of the passenger The climate control system will corre-
out. The automatic function for air vol- compartment. You should raise or lower spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
ume is switched off, and air volume is the temperature setting in small incre- perature.
controlled according to the desired set- ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
ting. The adjusted temperature appears in the Decreasing
or display 4 (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223). 왘 Push bottom of temperature control
The climate control will adjust to the set rocker switch 3 and/or 5
왘 Turn air distribution control 1 or 7 temperature as fast as possible. (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223).
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) on each
side of the passenger compartment to i You can also adjust the temperature in the The climate control system will corre-
the desired symbol. rear passenger compartment (컄 page 235). spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
i When operating the climate control system perature.
The indicator lamp on the correspond-
ing button goes out. Automatic air dis- in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
tribution is switched off in the
bution.
corresponding zone, and air distribu-
tion is controlled according to the de-
sired position.
The automatic air volume remains
switched on.
227
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution 왘 Turn air distribution controls 1 Closing the cockpit air vent (Canada
and 7 (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) only) and center air vents
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7 on each side of the passenger compart-
왘 Turn thumbwheels 1 and 5
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) to separate- ment to the desired symbol.
(컄 page 220) downward.
ly adjust the air distribution on each side of
The indicator lamp on the correspond-
the passenger compartment. The cockpit air vent 3 and the center
ing button goes out and the automatic
air vents 2 and 4 are closed.
The following symbols are located on the air distribution is switched off for the
controls: corresponding side. The air distribution
Opening the side air vents
is controlled according to the thumb-
Symbol Function wheel setting. 왘 Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
a Directs air through the cockpit (컄 page 220) upward.
i You can also turn the air distribution control
(Canada only), center, side and to a position between two symbols. The side air vents 7 and b are open.
rear passenger compartment
air vents Opening the cockpit air vent (Canada Closing the side air vents
Z Directs air to the windshield only) and center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
and through the side air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 1 and 5 (컄 page 220) downward.
X Directs air into the entire vehi- (컄 page 220) upward. The side air vents 7 and b are
cle interior closed.
The cockpit air vent 3 and the center
Y Directs air to the footwells air vents 2 and 4 are open.
228
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume Front defroster The air conditioning switches

Use buttons U (컄 page 222) or You can use this setting to defrost the
앫 cooling on to dehumidify
(컄 page 223) for automatic mode or air windshield, for example if it is iced up.
volume buttons or Q You can also defog the windshield and the 앫 maximum blowing and heating power
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) to adjust air windows. (depends on cooling temperature)
volume manually. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
i Keep this setting selected only until the
Nine blower speeds are available. windshield or the windows are clear again. front windows
왘 Press button to decrease or 앫 the air recirculation mode is switched
button Q to increase air volume to Activating off
the desired level. 왘 Press button 0 or P
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223).
i If you have switched on the defrost function
The AUTO indicator for air volume in the using the 0 or P button, you cannot make
display 4 (컄 page 222) or The indicator lamp on the button any other settings.
(컄 page 223) goes out. The selected comes on. Display 4 (컄 page 222) or
blower speed is shown in the (컄 page 223) is cleared. Deactivating
display 4. Automatic air distribution 왘 Press button 0 or P
remains switched on. (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) again.
The indicator lamps on the U but- The indicator lamp on the button goes
tons remain lit. out. Defrosting is turned off.
effect.
i The cooling remains switched on.
229
Controls in detail
Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAX COOL Deactivating

(USA only)
i Keep this setting selected only until the 왘 Press button e (컄 page 222) again.
windshield is clear again. MAX COOL disappears in the display 4
You can use this setting to provide the fast-
(컄 page 222).
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on est possible cooling of the vehicle interior
(컄 page 58). (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or The previous settings are once again in
tilt/sliding panel* are closed). effect.
If the automatic mode of the climate con-
trol is switched off:
Activating
i To switch the maximum cooling function off,
you can also press button ´, U, 0 or
왘 Turn air distribution controls 1 and 7
왘 Press button e (컄 page 222). 1 (컄 page 222).
to a or Y (컄 page 222) or
MAX COOL appears in the display 4
(컄 page 223).
(컄 page 222).
The air conditioning switches
앫 maximum cooling
앫 maximum blowing power
앫 the air recirculation mode is switched
on
230
Controls in detail
Air recirculation mode Activating Deactivating

왘 Press button , (컄 page 222) or 왘 Press button , (컄 page 222) or
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
(컄 page 223). (컄 page 223) again.
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the comes on. out.
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au-
matically at high outside temperatures and if the tomatically:
concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) and ni- 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
Warning! G trogen oxide in the outside air increases, for ex-
ample in a tunnel.
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when turned off
ing you and others. If the windows begin to the air recirculation mode is automatically
switched on. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
fog on the inside, switching off the air is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
recirculation mode immediately should clear A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-
interior window fogging. If interior window mately 30 minutes.
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 233) is activated, or
press button P or 0.
231
Controls in detail
Air recirculation mode with conve- Convenience opening

the closing of the windows and tilt/sliding
nience closing or opening feature
panel can be immediately halted by releas- 왘 Press button , for approximately
ing the , button. 2 seconds.
Warning! G The closing of the windows and the tilt/slid- The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
ing sunroof can be reversed by again press- will return to their previous posi-
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
ing and holding the , button. tion.You can release button , once
sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
the opening procedure has begun. The
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
Convenience closing windows and tilt/sliding sunroof con-
opening or closing procedure.
tinue opening until they have reached
왘 Press button , (컄 page 222) for
In the event that the procedure causes po- their previous position. The indicator
tential danger, the closing of the windows approximately 2 seconds.
lamp on the button goes out. The air re-
can be immediately halted by pressing or The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof circulation mode is deactivated.
pulling the respective window switch. The will close. You can release button ,
closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be im- once the closing procedure has begun. i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only re-
turn to its previous position if it has not been
mediately halted by moving the switch for The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof moved to another position using the respective
the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction. continue closing until they are fully window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
Vehicles with panorama roof*: closed. The indicator lamp on the but- ter it was closed with button ,.
When using the air recirculation mode with ton comes on. The air recirculation A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that has been
convenience closing feature, should the up- mode is activated. moved will remain in its current position if
ward movement of a window be blocked by button , is used to reopen the remaining
some obstruction including but not limited windows or tilt/sliding sunroof.
to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
reversal feature will not operate.
In the event that the procedure causes po-
tential danger,
232
Controls in detail
Vehicles with panorama roof* Combination filter with pollutant-sensi- Air conditioning
tive air-recirculation mode
Convenience closing:
The cooling function, only operational
The combination filter reduces pollutants
왘 Press and hold button , when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
and unpleasant odors in the outside air.
(컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) until the cle interior down to the selected tempera-
The pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are ture. The cooling function also
mode automatically switches off the sup-
closed or have reached the desired po- dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
ply of outside air when pollutants are de-
sition. The indicator lamp on the button thus preventing the windows from fogging
tected in the air.
comes on. The air recirculation mode is up.
activated. i The pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode is not possible if you have switched off the i Condensation may drip out from underneath
Convenience opening: the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
air conditioning or if the temperature falls below
of a malfunction.
왘 Press and hold button , until the 41°F (5°C).
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
opened or have reached the desired Warning! G
position. The indicator lamp on the but-
ton goes out. The air recirculation If you turn off the cooling function, the
mode is deactivated. vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
233
Controls in detail
Deactivating ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on Residual heat and ventilation
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is (Canada only)
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate self off. With the engine switched off, it is possible
control system. The air in the vehicle will
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 222) or use of the residual heat produced by the
(컄 page 223). engine.
The indicator lamp on the button goes i If you switch on the residual heat function
out. when temperatures are high, only the ventilation
will be switched on.
Activating
i Regardless of the selected air volume, the
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can blower operates at low speed.
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing. i How long the system will provide heating de-
pends on
왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 222) or 앫 the coolant temperature
(컄 page 223) again.
앫 the temperature set by the operator
The indicator lamp on the button The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
comes on. of the air distribution control setting.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
234
Controls in detail
Activating Rear climate control 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
왘 Switch off the ignition. 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
The rear climate control is adjusted via the
왘 Press button T (컄 page 223). front climate control panel (컄 page 222) or 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
REST in the display 4 (컄 page 223) (컄 page 223) or the rear climate control for right rear center air vent
comes on. panel.
4 Temperature rocker switch, right
The rear climate control panel is located in 5 Display
Deactivating the rear center console.
6 Temperature rocker switch, left
왘 Press button T (컄 page 223) again.
REST in the display 4 (컄 page 223) for left rear center air vent
goes out.
i The residual heat is automatically turned off: Setting the temperature
앫 when the ignition is switched on Use temperature control rocker
앫 after about 30 minutes switches 4 and 6 to separately adjust
앫 if the battery voltage drops the air temperature on each side of the
rear passenger compartment.
앫 if the coolant temperature is too low
i You can also adjust the rear temperature us-
ing the front climate control panel (컄 page 222)
or (컄 page 223).
235
Controls in detail
You should raise or lower the temperature Adjusting air distribution 왘 Press button 5 or ™
setting in small increments, preferably (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223).
왘 Move the slider for the left center air
starting at 72°F (22°C). The adjusted tem-
vent 1 or right center air vent 2 to The display switches over.
perature appears in the display 5. The
the left, right, up, or down.
rear climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible. The air flow is directed in the
corresponding direction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move sliders for
the center air vents 1 and 2 (컄 page 235) up-
ward.
1 Rear climate control display
Adjusting air volume 왘 Set the desired temperature for the
1 Temperature, left 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 or 7 rear passenger compartment using
2 Temperature, right (컄 page 235) up or down. temperature rocker switches 4
and 6 (컄 page 235).
왘 Adjust the temperature to the desired The air volume is increased or
setting for each side of the passenger decreased. After approximately 5 seconds after
compartment using the left and right the last adjustment, the display switch-
temperature buttons. Adjusting the rear settings with the es back to its standard display.
front control panel
The temperature in the rear passenger i You can also press button 5 or ™
compartment is adjusted automatical- You can adjust the temperature for the (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) once more to
ly. rear climate control from the front climate switch back to the standard display.
control panel.
i The rear climate control will not cool the air
when the air conditioning is switched off
(컄 page 234).
236
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G and holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
The windows are opened and closed elec-
When closing the windows, make sure that or by pressing and holding button , on
trically. The switches for all of the windows
there is no danger of anyone being harmed the climate control panel, the automatic re-
are on the driver’s door. The switches for
by the closing procedure. versal function will not operate.
the respective windows are on the front
passenger door and the rear doors. The closing of the windows can be immedi- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ately halted by releasing the switch or, if SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
switch was pulled past the resistance point from the starter switch, take it with you, and
and released, by either pressing or pulling lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
the respective switch. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
The windows are equipped with the excess to a vehicle could result in an accident
press-close and automatic reversal func- and/or serious personal injury.
tion. If the window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circum-
stance where you pulled the switch past the i You can also open or close the windows us-
ing the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-
resistance point and released it to close the
1 Left front window ture” (컄 page 239) and “Convenience closing
window, the automatic reversal function will feature” (컄 page 240).
2 Right front window
stop the window and open it slightly.
3 Right rear window Depending on current position, the windows may
4 Left rear window If the window encounters an obstruction also open or close when the air recirculation
that blocks its path in a circumstance where button , in the control panel of the climate
you are closing the window by pulling and control (컄 page 206), (컄 page 222) and
(컄 page 223) is pressed and held.
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing
237
Controls in detail
Power windows
i Operating the windows from the rear is not

possible if you activate the override switch Warning! G Warning! G
(컄 page 95).
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos- Driver’s door only:
i With the SmartKey in starter switch ing the window, and upward movement of If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
the window is blocked by some obstruction past the resistance point and released, the
the windows can be operated:
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin- automatic reversal will not operate.
앫 until you open the driver’s or front passengers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
ger’s door
erate.
앫 for at least 5 minutes ! If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the win-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). Fully opening the windows dow will stop and open slightly.
(Express-open) Remove the obstruction, pull the respective pow-
Opening the windows er window switch again past the resistance point
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 past the resis-
and release.
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance tance point and release.
point. If the window still does not close when there is
The corresponding window opens com- no obstruction, pull and hold the respective pow-
The corresponding window will move pletely. er window switch. The window will then close
downwards until you release the without the obstruction sensor function.
switch. Fully closing the windows
(Express-close) Stopping windows during Express-op-
Closing the windows eration
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 past the resis-
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance tance point and release. 왘 Press or pull the respective power win-
point. dow switch again.
The corresponding window closes com-
The corresponding window will move pletely.
upwards until you release the switch.
238
Controls in detail
Power windows
Synchronizing power windows Summer opening feature 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
The power windows must be synchronized If the weather is warm, you can ventilate driver’s outside door handle. The
the vehicle before driving off by simulta- SmartKey or SmartKey with
앫 after the battery has been disconnect-
neously: KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
ed
앫 opening the windows ity to the driver’s outside door handle.
앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof or Vehicles without panorama roof*
(Express-close) tilt/sliding panel*
왘 Press and hold button Œ until the
앫 turning on the seat ventilation* for the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
Synchronizing
driver’s seat have reached the desired position.
왘 Close all doors.
i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is 왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). automatically set to the highest level if activated cedure.
via summer opening feature.
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 until the windows
are completely closed.
왘 Hold on to switches 1 to 4 for ap-
proximately 1 second.
The power windows are synchronized.
239
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with panorama roof* Convenience closing feature Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If roller sunblinds are closed: 왘 Press and hold the lock button on an
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
outside door handle (컄 page 65) until
왘 Press and hold button Œ until the the windows, tilt/sliding sunroof or
windows and the roller sunblinds begin the windows, the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* simultaneously.
to open after approximately 1 second. tilt/sliding panel* are completely
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or closed.
왘 With the windows and roller sunblinds SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
왘 Release the lock button on the outside
fully opened, press and hold driver’s outside door handle
button Œ again. The tilt/sliding pan- door handle to interrupt procedure.
(컄 page 239). The SmartKey or
el of the panorama roof tilts and opens. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro- in close proximity to the driver’s out-
cedure. side door handle.
왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
If roller sunblinds are open:
windows, the tilt/sliding sunroof or
왘 Press and hold button Œ. The win- tilt/sliding panel* are completely
dows move down and the tilt/sliding closed.
panel tilts and opens after approxi-
mately 1 second. Vehicles with panorama roof*:
왘 Press and hold button ‹ again. The
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
cedure. roller sunblinds close.
왘 Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
240
Controls in detail
Power windows
Warning! G
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof or tilt/sliding panel*, make sure
that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
lows:
앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
앫 Release the lock button (컄 page 65) on
the outside door handle to stop the clos-
ing procedure.
앫 Immediately pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The win-
dows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
241
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the sunroof opening Warning! G
to guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and sunroof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the sure there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead con- harmed by the closing procedure.
trol panel. The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and re-
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
tion.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
Sunroof switch In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing

their seat belts or not wearing them properly
1 Push back to slide sunroof open
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
opening also presents a potential for injury
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop-
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
erly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compart-
ment.
242
Controls in detail
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso- Opening and closing the power
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
nance noises may result in addition to the usual tilt/sliding sunroof
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take 왘 To open, close, raise or lower the
sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po- tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side switch to resistance point in the re-
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s window slightly. quired direction of arrows 1 to 4.
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding Release the sunroof switch when the
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer open- tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de-
injury. ing feature” (컄 page 239) or see “Convenience sired position.
closing feature” (컄 page 240).
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans- Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding Fully opening (Express-open) and clos-
port any objects with sharp edges which can sunroof may also open or close when the air re- ing (Express-close) the power tilt/slid-
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. circulation button , in the control panel of ing sunroof
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the climate control (컄 page 206), (컄 page 207),
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) is pressed and 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
malfunctions. held. roof, move the sunroof switch past the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). resistance point in direction of
manually should an electrical malfunction occur arrow 1 to 2 and release.
(컄 page 439). The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions completely.
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the
vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehi-
cle electronics could be damaged which is not
Warranty.
243
Controls in detail
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding 왘 Remove the respective fuse from the
during Express-operation sunroof main fuse box (컄 page 470).
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any direc- 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro-
tion.
nized 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is 앫 after the battery has been 왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in di-
blocked during the Express-close procedure, the
disconnected or discharged rection of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
sunroof is fully raised at the rear.
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄 page 439) Keep holding the sunroof switch in di-
rection of arrow 3 for approximately
앫 after a malfunction
1 second.
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
왘 Check the Express-open feature
smoothly
(컄 page 243).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other-
wise repeat the above steps.
244
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
왔 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Opening and closing the roller
sunblinds for the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
The tilt/sliding panel and the front and

rear roller sunblinds are opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds is
on the overhead control panel. An addi-
tional switch for the roller sunblinds is in
the rear passenger compartment. Roof panel switch Roller sunblinds switch, rear
The roller sunblinds only operate with the 1 Open roller sunblinds 1 Open roller sunblinds
tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and rear 2 Close roller sunblinds 2 Close roller sunblinds
roller sunblind cannot be operated individ- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
ually.
Opening and closing the roller sun-
blinds
왘 To open or close the roller sunblinds,
move the roof panel/roller sunblinds
switch to the resistance point in the re-
quired direction of arrow 1 or 2.
Release the roof panel/roller sunblinds
switch when the roller sunblinds have
reached the desired position. 컄컄
245
Controls in detail
컄컄 Opening and closing the panorama roof

Warning! G with power tilt/sliding panel Warning! G
When closing the roller sunblinds, make The tilt/sliding panel is opened and closed When opening or closing the tilt/sliding pan-
sure that no one is in danger of being injured electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding el, make sure that there is no danger of any-
by the closing procedure. The closing of the panel is on the overhead control panel. one being harmed by the opening or closing
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with
by releasing the switch. The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
the roller sunblinds opened.
panel can be immediately halted by releas-
Fully opening the roller sunblinds (Ex- ing the switch or, if the switch was moved
press-open) past the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
왘 Move the roof panel/roller sunblinds
switch past the resistance point in di- The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
rection of arrow 1 and release. panel can be immediately halted by releas-
ing the switch.
The roller sunblinds opens completely.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Stopping the roller sunblinds during panel is made out of glass. In the event of an
Express-operation accident, the glass may shatter. This may re-
Roof panel switch
sult in an opening in the roof.
왘 Move the roof panel/roller sunblinds 1 Push back to slide roof panel open
switch in any direction. 2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed
3 Push up to raise roof panel
4 Pull down to lower roof panel
246
Controls in detail
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is snow i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunc- panel using the SmartKey (summer open-
their seat belts or not wearing them properly tions. ing/convenience closing feature) (컄 page 239)
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an or (컄 page 240).
The tilt/sliding panel can be opened or closed
opening also presents a potential for injury manually should an electrical malfunction occur Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- (컄 page 439). panel may also open or close when the air recir-
erly as entire body parts or portions of them culation button , in the control panel of the
may protrude from the passenger compart- ! Please keep in mind that weather conditions
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to climate control (컄 page 206), (컄 page 207),
ment. close the tilt/sliding panel when leaving the ve- (컄 page 222) or (컄 page 223) is pressed and
hicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle held.
SmartKey or the SmartKey with electronics could be damaged which is not cov- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not i When the tilt/sliding panel is open, reso-
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or nance noises may result in addition to the usual
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re- sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
sult in an accident and/or serious personal reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-
sition of the tilt/sliding panel or open a side win-
injury.
dow slightly.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-

port any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
247
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the panorama roof Synchronizing the panorama roof with 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
with power tilt/sliding panel power tilt/sliding panel direction of arrow 1 until the roller
sunblinds are fully opened.
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the
The tilt/sliding panel must be
tilt/sliding panel, move the roof panel 왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
synchronized
switch to resistance point in the re- direction of arrow 1 for approximately
quired direction of arrows 1 to 4. 앫 after the battery has been 1 second.
disconnected or discharged
Release the roof panel switch when the 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
tilt/sliding panel has reached the de- 앫 after the tilt/sliding panel has been direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/slid-
sired position. closed manually (컄 page 439) ing panel is fully raised.
앫 after a malfunction 왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
Fully opening (Express-open) the pan-
앫 if the tilt/sliding panel does not open direction of arrow 3 for approximately
orama roof with power tilt/sliding pan-
smoothly 1 second.
el
왘 Remove the fuse from the main fuse 왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in
왘 Move the roof panel switch past the re-
box (컄 page 469). direction of arrow 2 until the tilt/slid-
sistance point in direction of arrow 1
ing panel is fully closed.
and release. 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
The tilt/sliding panel opens 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). direction of arrow 2 for approximately
completely.
왘 Move and hold the roof panel switch in 1 second.
direction of arrow 2 until the roller 왘 Check the Express-open feature of the
Stopping the panorama roof with power
sunblinds are fully closed. tilt/sliding panel (컄 page 248).
tilt/sliding panel during Express-open
왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in If the tilt/sliding panel opens com-
왘 Move the roof panel switch in any di-
direction of arrow 2 for approximately pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other-
rection.
1 second. wise repeat the above steps.
248
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control and Distronic*, with
the speed you set for your vehicle. The cruise control is a convenience system
which the vehicle can maintain a preset designed to assist the driver during vehicle
speed Use of cruise control is recommended for
operation. The driver is and must always re-
driving at a constant speed for extended
앫 Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle sus- main responsible for the vehicle’s speed and
periods of time. You can set or resume
pension characteristics automatically for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed above 20 mph
and controls the vehicle level Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic
(30 km/h).
앫 Parktronic system*, which assists the and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
driver during parking maneuvers
means of the cruise control lever.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
ESP®, see “Driving safety systems”
lever on the left-hand side of the steering because conditions do not allow safe
(컄 page 97).
column (컄 page 24). driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
ing in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
249
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed Canceling cruise control

왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired There are several ways to cancel the cruise
speed. control:
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
control lever. The cruise control is canceled. The last
The current speed is set. speed set is stored for later use.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator or
pedal.
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
1 Set current or higher speed Cruise control is activated. direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 250).
2 Set current or lower speed The selected speed appears in the multi- The cruise control is canceled. The last
3 Cancel cruise control function display for approximately speed set is stored for later use.
4 Resume at last set speed 5 seconds, and the corresponding speed-
ometer segments from the selected speed i The last stored speed is canceled when you
turn off the engine.
Warning! G to the vehicle maximum speed are illumi-
nated.
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded. i On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise con-
trol may not be able to maintain the set speed.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a Once the grade eases, the set speed will be re-
convenience system designed to assist the sumed.
driver during vehicle operation. The driver is On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
and must always remain responsible for the the set speed with active braking action.
vehicle’s speed and for safe brake In addition, on longer downhill grades the auto-
operation. matic transmission will automatically downshift.
250
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The cruise control switches off automatical- i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Setting a higher speed
ly if deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceler-
왘 Lift cruise control lever in direction of
앫 you step on the brake pedal ation (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will re-
sume the last speed set. arrow 1 (컄 page 250) and hold it up
앫 you depress the parking brake pedal until the desired speed is reached.
In this case the segments in the multifunc- 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
tion display (컄 page 255) go out and no
warning sounds The new speed is set.
앫 the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) Setting a lower speed
앫 the ESP® is in operation or switched off with 왘 Depress the cruise control lever in di-
the ESP® switch (컄 page 102) rection of arrow 2 (컄 page 250) and
앫 you move the gear selector lever to hold it down until the desired speed is
position N while driving reached.
The segments in the multifunction display 왘 Release cruise control lever.
(컄 page 255) go out, and an acoustic warning
sounds. The new speed is set.
! Moving gear selector lever to position N i When you use the cruise control lever to de-
while driving also cancels the cruise control. celerate, the brake system will automatically
However, the gear selector lever should not be brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
moved to position N while driving except to does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding
(e.g. on icy roads).
251
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed Distronic*

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments (“Resume” function)
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
Faster
Warning! G convenience afforded by the cruise control
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
during travel on expressways and other
rection of arrow 1 (컄 page 250). The speed stored in memory should only be
major roads.
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Slower mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration 앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects
differences arising from returning to the pre- a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
set speed could cause an accident and/or your vehicle speed will be reduced so
rection of arrow 2 (컄 page 250).
serious injury to you and others. that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
왘 Briefly pull the cruise control lever in di- 앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 250). you, Distronic will function in the same
The cruise control resumes the last set way as cruise control (컄 page 249).
speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator Warning! G
pedal.
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub-
The selected speed appears in the multi- stitute for active driving involvement. It does
function display for approximately not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
5 seconds, and the corresponding speed- nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
ometer segments from the selected speed or the movement of vehicles ahead.
to the vehicle maximum speed are illumi- Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
nated. of the vehicle’s braking power.
252
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Canada only:
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, traffic and weather con-
Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
ditions and to provide the steering, braking Distronic requires familiarity with its opera- two conditions:
and other driving inputs necessary to retain tional characteristics. We strongly recom- (1) This device may not cause interference, and
control of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the ceived, including interference that may
system.
Warning! G cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
Distronic is a convenience system, its speed i USA only: void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
This device has been approved by the FCC as a tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
adjustment reduction capability is intended
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is way.
to make cruise control more effective and
intended for use in an automotive radar system Any unauthorized modification to this device
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de- could void the user’s authority to operate the
however, intended to, nor does it, replace vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted equipment.
the need for extreme care. The responsibili- by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
ty for the vehicle speed and the distance to any non-approved way.
the vehicle ahead, including most impor- Any unauthorized modification to this device Warning! G
tantly brake operation to assure safe stop- could void the user’s authority to operate the
ping distance, always rests with the driver. equipment. Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
the road, weather and traffic conditions
ditions into account.
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
253
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip- Distronic cannot take weather conditions Close attention to road and traffic condi-
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction into account. Switch off Distronic or do not tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. turn it on if: whether or not Distronic is activated.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight 앫 roads are slippery or covered with snow Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic or ice. The wheels could lose traction ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi-
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, while braking or accelerating, and the tions do not allow safe driving at a steady
snow or sleet. vehicle could skid speed.
앫 the sensor is dirty or visibility is Distronic will not react to stationary objects
diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
distance control could be impaired
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
Always pay attention to traffic conditions will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
even while Distronic is switched on. Other-
Switch off Distronic:
wise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and 앫 when changing from the left to the right
could cause an accident resulting in person- lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
al or fatal injury to you or others. in the left lane
앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
254
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer

In these situations, Distronic will continue to
dial
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
tance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning! G
The “Resume” function should only be oper- 1 Segments
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
1 Set speed ahead, the segments (representing the
particular preset speed.
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- difference) from the speed of the vehicle
ments come on around the set speed. ahead to the set speed come on.
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed- If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting ger of collision:
on the Distronic system. 앫 The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on red.
앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
255
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid

a collision. Warning! G Warning! G
Under no circumstances should the An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-
driver await the intermittent warning distance warning lamp l in the instru- mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
sound before braking. See the follow- ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic This corresponds to about 20% of the maxi-
ing warning note. system calculates that the distance to the mum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
The intermittent warning sound ceases vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
and the red distance warning speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca- restore the preset distance or to maintain
lamp l goes out when the neces- pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to the speed.
sary distance to the vehicle ahead is maintain the preset following distance,
again established. which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final cau-
tion that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact be-
ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
256
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system Distronic deactivated Distronic activated

In the Distronic menu you can read the cur- When Distronic is deactivated you will see If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
rent settings for Distronic. What appears in the standard display of Distronic in the speed in the multifunction display for
the multifunction display depends on multifunction display. about 5 seconds. When Distronic is
whether Distronic and the distance warn- activated, you will see the following display
ing function are turned on or off. in the multifunction display.
until you see one of the following dis-
plays.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
257
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever Activating Distronic Setting the current speed

The Distronic system is operated by means You can activate Distronic if 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
of the cruise control lever. speed.
앫 you are driving between 20 mph
The cruise control lever is the uppermost (30 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) 왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever on the left-hand side of the steering lever.
앫 the ESP is activated (컄 page 100)
®
column.
The current speed is set.
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
see the message --- in the multifunction pedal.
display.
i If you do not take your foot off the
In the following cases you cannot activate accelerator completely, the following message
Distronic will appear in the multifunction display:
앫 up to 2 minutes after starting the en- DISTRONIC

override
gine
The distance to a slower moving vehicles in front
앫 when you brake of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
1 Set current or higher speed 앫 if you have set the parking brake then be determined only by the accelerator ped-
2 Set current or lower speed al position.
3 Deactivate Distronic 앫 if the gear selector lever is in
4 Resume at last set speed position P, R or N
앫 if the ESP® is switched off
258
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di- 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
rection of arrow 1 (컄 page 258) to in- rection of arrow 2 (컄 page 258) to de-
Faster
crease vehicle speed in increments of crease vehicle speed in increments of
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
The new speed is set. The new speed is set. rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 258).
The stored speed is displayed in the The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds (컄 page 257), and one or 5 seconds (컄 page 257), and one or
two segments around the stored speed two segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer come on in the speedometer
(컄 page 255). (컄 page 255).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not i When you use the cruise control lever to de-
deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration celerate, the brakes will be applied to support
(e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume deceleration.
the last speed set. In addition, the transmission will automatically
downshift on long downhill grades.
259
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when:
(“Resume” function)
There are several ways to deactivate the 앫 you set the parking brake
Distronic system:
앫 you drive slower than 20 mph
Warning! G 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di- (30 km/h)
rection of arrow 3 (컄 page 258).
The speed stored in memory should only be 앫 the ESP® is active (컄 page 100) or you
set again if prevailing road conditions per- or deactivate the ESP®
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration 왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you move the gear selector lever into
differences arising from returning to the pre- position N
set speed could cause an accident and/or Distronic will be deactivated. The last
serious injury to you and others. speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC off
message appears in the multifunction
i The following message will appear in the display for approximately 5 seconds.
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di- multifunction display for approximately
rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 258). 5 seconds:
Distronic is activated and set to the last

DISTRONIC off Warning! G
stored speed. The last stored speed is deleted when you turn
off the engine. Distronic switches off and releases the
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
pedal. the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to re-
duce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
260
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the following distance in Decreasing distance

Distronic
Decreasing the distance setting tells
You can set the specified following dis- Distronic to maintain a smaller following
tance for Distronic by varying the time set- distance to the vehicle ahead.
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®.
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
Distance warning function
the required following distance to the vehi-
cle ahead. The set distance will be shown When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
in the multifunction display. tion will continue to warn you when recog-
1 Distance warning function on/off nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
The thumbwheel for making the time set- switch vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
ting is located on the lower section of the 2 Indicator lamp the danger of a collision exists:
center console. 3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Warning! G Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells 앫 An intermittent warning will sound if
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to Distronic to maintain a greater following necessary.
select the appropriate setting given road distance to the vehicle ahead. If these warnings are issued, you must
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving brake manually to maintain a safe distance
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.
style and applicable laws and driving recom- and avoid a collision with the vehicle
mendations for safe following distance. ahead.
261
Controls in detail
Driving systems
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn- Activating Driving with Distronic
ing sound ceases. The warning sound will
왘 Press switch 1. This section describes a number of driving
also cease when the distance to the vehi-
situations where special precaution is re-
cle ahead is sufficient again without apply- Indicator lamp 2 on the switch comes
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
ing the brakes. In this case, the distance on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
pared to brake in such situations. This will
warning lamp will also go out. the multifunction display (컄 page 257).
deactivate the Distronic system.
Deactivating
왘 Press switch 1.
If the distance warning lamp l in the in- Indicator lamp 2 on the switch goes Distronic works to maintain the speed se-
strument cluster comes on while driving out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im- the multifunction display. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
mediate attention on the part of the driver is
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
required. As required by the traffic situation,
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
apply the brakes and navigate around a pos-
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
sible obstacle. However, do not drive by re-
lying on the distance warning function, as 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
this will result in an emergency braking ap- after you change lanes.
plication. Especially depending on road sur- 앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
face conditions and driver reaction, this will front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
not always enable you to avoid a collision. lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
i Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
262
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning Turns and bends

Distronic regulates only the distance be-
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
of it, but does not register stationary objects
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
in the road, e.g.:
Distronic will switch off, and the message
앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam DISTRONIC
앫 a disabled vehicle currently unavailable
앫 an oncoming vehicle See Operator’s Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
serve all traffic and intercede as required by For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
steering or braking the vehicle. sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 373). In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
i If the message
Warning! G DISTRONIC
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
currently unavailable
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy See Operator’s Manual
road conditions. disappears during driving and the last speed
stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the
dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works
again.
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of their narrow profile, the
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle. the lane have not yet been detected by
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. Distronic. There will be insufficient
distance to the vehicles ahead.
264
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) The following suspension styles are 왘 Start the engine.
(only available on E 550, available:
왘 Press the damping button 1 until the
E 550 4MATIC, E 63 AMG)
앫 Comfort desired suspension style is set.
Airmatic automatically selects the opti- Both indicator lamps 2 are off. ! If you have selected the Comfort suspen-
mum suspension tuning and ride height for 앫 Sport 1 sion tuning, the vehicle lowers slightly when you
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two lock it within approximately 60 seconds after
components: One indicator lamp 2 is on. switching off the engine. When parking, make
sure that your vehicle cannot come into contact
앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) 앫 Sport 2 with other objects, such as a curb, while lower-
Both indicator lamps 2 are on. ing. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
앫 Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the opti- i The selected suspension style is stored in
memory, even after the SmartKey is removed
mum damping for the respective driving
from the starter switch.
conditions. At the same time the suspen-
sion is set to either Sport 1, Sport 2 or
Comfort.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫 Your driving style
1 Damping button
앫 Road surface conditions 2 Indicator lamps
앫 Your choice of suspension style,
Sport 1, Sport 2 or Comfort, which you
select using the damping button 1
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control i These height adjustments are so small that

you may not notice any change.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to Select the raised level only when required
앫 increase vehicle safety by current driving conditions. Otherwise
앫 handling may be impaired
앫 reduce fuel consumption
앫 fuel consumption may increase
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
can be selected:
앫 Normal Warning! G
앫 Raised To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or and feet away from wheel housing area, and
lowered according to the selected level stay away from under the vehicle when low-
setting and to the vehicle speed: ering the vehicle chassis.
앫 At a speed exceeding approximately

68 mph (110 km/h) with normal level
set or exceeding 75 mph (120 km/h)
with raised level set, the ride height is
reduced automatically. The table on
the next page provides an overview of
the vehicle levels.
앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the normal level.
266
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be

selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level Indicator lamp Suspension Use for Ride height increase Automatic lowering
when stationary tuning over normal
Normal Lamp off Comfort For driving on normal None Max. approx. 0.4 in (10 mm)
roads
Normal Lamp off Sport 1 or 2 For driving on normal None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)
roads
Raised Lamp on Comfort For driving on rough Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.2 in (30 mm)
roads or with snow
chains
Raised Lamp on Sport 1 or 2 For driving on rough Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)
roads or with snow
chains
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The button is located in the lower section i At a speed of approximately above 75 mph
of the center console. (120 km/h) or if the speed amounts to between
50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes, the setting raised is
canceled. The indicator lamp 2 on the button
goes out.
If you do not drive in this speed range, the raised
level remains stored even if the SmartKey is re-
moved from the starter switch.
1 Vehicle level control button

2 Indicator lamp
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 52).
왘 Briefly press button 1 to change from
normal level to raised level. When vehi-
cle is at raised level, pressing the but-
ton will return the vehicle to normal
level.
When raised level is set, indicator
lamp 2 on the button comes on.
When normal level is set, indicator
lamp 2 on the button goes out.
268
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)* The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in the rear bumper.
area in which you are maneuvering. You
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is could otherwise injure them.
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition, re-
the system and can damage the vehicle. lease the parking brake, and placed the 1 Sensors in the front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic gear selector lever in position D, R, or N.
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- The Parktronic system deactivates at Range of the sensors
pecially at times of snow and ice, see speeds over approximately 11 mph To function properly, the sensors must be
“Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors” (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
(컄 page 373). system turns on again. sensors regularly, being careful not to
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig- The Parktronic system also deactivates scratch or damage the sensors, see
nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or when you place the gear selector lever in “Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors”
the air brakes of trucks) can cause the sys- position P or depress the parking brake (컄 page 373).
tem to send erratic indications, and should pedal.
be taken into consideration.
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors Minimum distance
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)

Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors If the system detects an obstacle in this

range, all the distance warning segments
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance might no
longer be indicated by the system.
! During parking maneuvers, pay special at-
tention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
270
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
yellow and two red segments for either warning will sound as the first red dis-
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system tance segment illuminates and a con-
ative distance between the sensors and an
is operational when the yellow readiness stant acoustic warning lasting a
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
indicators 3 are illuminated. maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
front area is located above the center air
the second red distance segment. The
vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The position of the gear selector lever de-
signal is canceled when the gear selec-
cator for the rear area is integrated in the termines which warning indicators will be
tor lever is placed in position P or the
rear trim. activated.
parking brake is activated.
Gear selector Warning indicator
앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
lever position
warning will sound as the first red dis-
D Front area activated tance segment illuminates and a con-
R or N Front and rear area stant acoustic warning lasting a
activated maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
P Neither activated
signal is canceled when the gear selec-
tor lever is placed in position D, P or
As your vehicle approaches an object, one the parking brake is activated.
Front area warning indicator or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the seventh seg-
1 Left side of the vehicle ment illuminates, you have reached the
2 Right side of the vehicle minimum distance.
3 Readiness indicators
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system If only the red distance segments illumi-
on/off nates and no acoustic warning sounds, the
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1.
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
The Parktronic system can be switched off
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. there is an interference from other radio or
manually.
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
The Parktronic switch is located in the low- Switching on the Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 sec-
er part of the center console (컄 page 30). onds and the indicator lamp in the
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1 again.
Parktronic switch comes on.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 37).
i The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on 왘 Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 37). (컄 page 373).
Parktronic system malfunction
or
If only the red distance segments illumi-
nates and an acoustic warning sounds, 왘 Check the Parktronic system operation
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic at another location to rule out interfer-
1 Parktronic switch ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
2 Indicator lamp signals.
matically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
272
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack* ! Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve-
hicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
Warning! G 앫 you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel*
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to 앫 you can fully open the trunk
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation in-
structions. Otherwise, an improperly at-
tached roof rack system or its load could 1 Trim
become detached from the vehicle. 왘 Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of roof.
220 lb (100 kg). 왘 Secure the roof rack according to man-
Take into consideration that when the roof ufacturer’s instructions for installation.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
273
Controls in detail
Loading
Ski bag* (Canada only)
Unfolding and loading
1 Ski bag 1 Button

왘 Pull ski bag 1 into passenger com- 왘 Open the trunk lid.
partment and unfold.
왘 Press button 1.
1 Cover
2 Catch The flap opens in direction of arrow.
왘 Fold rear armrest down.

왘 Pull catches 2 in direction of arrows.
왘 Open the cover 1 downwards in direc-
tion of the arrow.
274
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski bag. 1 Strap 1 Hook

2 Eye
왘 Tighten strap 1 by pulling at the loose
Warning! G end (arrow) until the skis in the ski bag 왘 Connect hook 1 of front strap to
are tightly secured. eye 2 located on center tunnel in
The ski bag is designed for up to four pairs front of rear seat bench.
of skis. Do not load the ski bag with other
왘 Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
objects.
end (arrow).
Always fasten the ski bag securely. In an ac-
cident, an unfastened ski bag can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants.
275
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding Removal of ski bag Split rear bench seat*
왘 Loosen both straps. For removal of the ski bag, we recommend
To expand the trunk, you can fold down the
that you contact an authorized
왘 Disconnect hook 1 from eye 2. left and right rear seat backrests.
왘 Unload skis. The two sections can be folded down sep-
arately to enlarge the trunk.
왘 Close flap in trunk. Warning! G
왘 Fold and flatten ski bag lengthwise and
place folded ski bag inside recess of Never drive vehicle with trunk open while Warning! G
backrest. the ski bag is removed. Deadly carbon mon-
oxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, When expanding the luggage compartment,
왘 Close ski bag compartment cover. resulting in unconsciousness and death. always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac- rests must remain properly locked in the up-
cess to the trunk, always close the cover. right position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 280).
276
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward

! You must always release the seat cushion
and fold it up before folding the seat backrests
forward. The upholstery on the seat backrest
may otherwise be damaged.
1 Seat cushion 왘 Pull the handle in the trunk.

2 Seat backrest The seat backrest is released and the
왘 Grip the back of seat cushion 1 and head restraints fold back.
fold forward. 왘 Fold the seat backrest forward.
왘 Push the rear seat head restraints all
1 Release handle the way in.
! Make sure the head restraints fit all the way
into the seat cushion pockets. This will prevent
i If tall persons have occupied the driver’s and i If the rear center seat is to be occupied the backrests from being damaged during load-
front passenger seats, it may be necessary to while driving, it may be necessary to fold the seat ing.
move these seats forward slightly in order to fold belt buckle up again.
the rear seat backrests forward.
왘 Pull release handle 1.
The seat cushion automatically springs
upward slightly.
277
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning seat backrest to original po-

sition Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
tended trunk compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
왘 Swing the head restraint forward by around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
hand until it engages. to vehicle occupants unless the items are
1 Seat cushion securely fastened in the vehicle.
2 Seat backrest To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
왘 Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
it engages. when transporting cargo.
왘 Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and

press the center front of the cushion
until it audibly engages.
278
Controls in detail
Loading
Expanding the cargo area* ! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this posi- Loading instructions
tion. The upholstery could be damaged if you fold
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro- the hinge back.
vide you with a larger, flat cargo area.
왘 Fold the seat cushions and the back-
rests forward (컄 page 277).
왘 Remove the head restraints
(컄 page 130).
왘 Fold the backrest into the vertical posi-
tion.
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
왘 Fold the seat backrest forward. ceed the load limit indicated on the
corresponding placard located on the driv-
er’s door B-pillar.
1 Release lever
왘 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
279
Controls in detail
Loading
The handling characteristics of a fully load- Cargo tie-down rings*

ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- Warning! G
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra- Always fasten items being carried as secure-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
placed towards the front of the vehicle. fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
them as securely as possible. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al- jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
ways be kept as low as possible since it in- are securely fastened in the vehicle.
fluences the handling characteristics of Four rings 1 are located in the trunk.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
the vehicle. 왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
gage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Always follow loading instructions
Do not place anything on the rear-window (컄 page 279).
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
280
Controls in detail
Loading
Rear seat Retaining hooks

There is a cargo tie-down ring 1 located
Depending on vehicle production date one
on each side of the footwell under the rear
or two hooks are located on the upper
seat.
edge of the trunk and can be used to
attach cargo items such as bags.
왘 Pull tab 1 of retaining hook 2 down.

! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down
cargo.
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box Storage compartment in the rear cen-

ter console
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window. 1 Compartment for mobile phone/glass-
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy es 왘 Briefly press the top of the compart-
objects. 2 Glove box lid release ment.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help It extends automatically.
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
Opening the glove box
around and injuring vehicle occupants dur- 왘 Push glove box lid release 2.
ing an accident.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Closing the glove box

왘 Push glove box lid up to close.
i Close the compartment for mobile
phone/glasses 1 first before closing the glove
box.
282
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the rear arm- Ruffled storage bags

rest Warning! G
USA only: Do not place objects with a com-
bined weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the ruffled storage bag. Otherwise, the
Occupant Classification System OCS
(컄 page 75) may not be able to properly
approximate the occupant weight category.
The ruffled storage bag is intended for stor-
ing light-weight items only.
Ruffled storage bags are located on the Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
왘 Press the handle upwards and fold the back of the front seats. fragile objects may not be transported in the
rear armrest lid up. ruffled storage bag. In an accident, during
hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they
could be thrown around inside the vehicle
and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an acci-
dent.
283
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell Cup holders

Warning! G
The parcel net is intended for storing Warning! G
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
fragile objects may not be transported in the vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak- ment, only use containers that fit into the
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause do not fill containers to a height where the
injury to vehicle occupants. contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
A small convenience parcel net is located during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
The parcel net cannot protect transported
in the front passenger footwell. It is for accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
goods in the event of an accident.
small and light items, such as road maps, pants may cause serious personal injury.
mail, etc. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
284
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment with cup holder

Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
in the center armrest/telephone* com-
holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
partment
cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Ob- The storage compartment in the center
jects thrown around in the vehicle interior armrest contains a removable dual cup
may cause an accident and/or serious per- holder.
sonal injury.
Opening storage compartment
2 Dual cup holder

3 Telephone* compartment
Closing storage compartment

왘 Slide cover 1 back.
i The dual cup holder can be removed to in-
crease storage space and for cleaning. Clean the
dual cup holder only with clear, lukewarm water.
1 Cover Make sure to insert the dual cup holder in the
왘 Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow. guides when reinstalling it (컄 page 286).
i The Roadside Assistance button • and

the Information button ¡ are located below
the cover 1.
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing cup holder Reinstalling cup holder Rear cup holder
1 Dual cup holder 3 Locking pins 왘 Briefly press the front of the rear arm-
2 Locking pins rest.
왘 Insert cup holder.
왘 Move both locking pins 2 in direction The cup holder extends automatically.
왘 Move both locking pins 3 in direction
of arrows. of arrows. ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
왘 Take dual cup holder 1 out upward. against the armrest when it is folded down, as
! Make sure that the dual cup holder 1 is you could otherwise damage it.
correctly positioned in the guides while you are
reinstalling it. Otherwise the cup holder can be
damaged.
286
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert Reinstalling ashtray insert

왘 Install insert by pushing it back into
Center console ashtray Warning! G frame until it engages again.
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle Rear door ashtray

standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by set-

ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
1 Cover
Now you have more room to take out
2 Sliding button
the insert.
1 Sliding button
Opening ashtray 왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right and 2 Insert slides out
hold. 3 Ashtray
왘 Briefly press the marking on the bot-
tom of cover 1. 왘 Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame. Opening rear door ashtray
The cover opens automatically.
왘 Briefly press the top of the ashtray 3.
The ashtray opens.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert Cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter is located in the cen-
ter console compartment in front of the
왘 Push sliding button 1 (컄 page 287)
center armrest (컄 page 30).
and remove insert 2 (컄 page 287) up-
wards from ashtray frame.
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
Reinstalling ashtray insert
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
왘 Install insert 2 (컄 page 287) by push- knob only.
ing it back into ashtray frame until it en- Make sure that any children traveling with
gages again. you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
1 Cigarette lighter
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re- The lighter will pop out automatically
sult in an accident and/or serious personal when hot.
injury.
288
Controls in detail
Useful features
! The lighter socket can be used to accommo- Power outlet Heated steering wheel (Canada only)
date 12 V DC electrical accessories (up to a
maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the The power outlet is located in the rear pas- The steering wheel heating warms up the
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in senger compartment. leather area of the steering wheel.
mind, however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive con- The stalk is on the lower left-hand side of
necting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do the steering wheel.
not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
longer be able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12 V DC
electrical accessories designed for use with a
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12 V 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
power outlets in your vehicle whenever possible.
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type). 1 Switching on
2 Switching off
i The power outlet can be used to 3 Indicator lamp
accommodate 12 V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 180 W.
An additional power outlet is located on the left
side in the trunk.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on Switching off Floormats

왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). 왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 289).
왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 1 (컄 page 289). The heated steering wheel is switched
off. Indicator lamp 3 (컄 page 289)
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 (컄 page 289) comes on. goes out.
i The steering wheel heating is temporarily i Indicator lamp 3 (컄 page 289) flashes or
goes out
suspended while indicator lamp 3
(컄 page 289) remains on when 앫 in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫 the temperature of the vehicle interior is 앫 in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc-
above 86°F (30°C) tion 1 Retainer pin
앫 the temperature of the steering wheel is 2 Eyelet
i The steering wheel heating switches off au-
above 95°F (35°C) tomatically when you remove the SmartKey from i To install or remove the floormat more easi-
When these conditions do not apply anymore, the starter switch or, on vehicles with ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
steering wheel heating continues. KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 43).
(컄 page 64) and open the driver’s door.
For information on steering wheel, see Warning! G
“Multifunction steering wheel”
(컄 page 152). Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
290
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
Warning! G
essary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
Do not place several floormats on top of Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
each other as this may impair pedal move- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For
ment. out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location
Removing running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call.
왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while
왘 Remove the floormat. personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
Installing Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
왘 Lay down the floormat. phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND1 (Cockpit Man-
tainer pins 1.
the outside of the vehicle. agement and Data System) if road, weather
The external antenna must be approved by and traffic conditions permit. 컄컄
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 1
Observe all legal requirements.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Please note that these functions are only 왘 If applicable, remove the cover for the
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
available with Mercedes-Benz approved external antenna connection from the
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
mobile phones. Please contact an autho- back of the mobile phone and store it in
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa- a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
ly 14 m) every second.
tion on features available for your mobile mobile phone’s operating instructions
phone of choice. as well.
i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-
stalled in the front center armrest, see separate The cradle is located in the front center
installation instructions for the mobile phone armrest.
cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
왘 Open telephone compartment
tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. (컄 page 285).
The functions and services available to you while
using the mobile phone depend on your service Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
provider and the type of mobile phone you are cradle
using. See also separate operating manual for in- Once the mobile phone has been inserted
structions on how to use your mobile phone.
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to
When the mobile phone is inserted in the use the hands-free device to respond dur- Example illustration
cradle, you can operate the telephone using phone calls. 1 Insert the mobile phone
ing the following devices: 2 Connector contact
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
앫 mobile phone keypad with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the 3 Mobile phone cradle
mobile phone cradle. 왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
앫 buttons s and t on the multi-
function steering wheel (컄 page 152) into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
앫 Voice Control System* (see separate
operating instructions)
292
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in di- Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle
rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
mobile phone release button engages.
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
The mobile phone is connected to the before installing a new one.
network via the external antenna.
Removing an existing mobile phone
The mobile phone is linked to the
cradle
hands-free device and the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in Example illustration
the mobile phone’s display. 1 Release catch for mobile phone
You can place or receive phone calls. You 2 Mobile phone cradle
can control other functions of the mobile i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
phone via the control system flip top before removing from the cradle while a
(컄 page 181), COMAND* or Voice Control call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis- Example illustration
System* (see separate operating instruc- connected. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle
tions). 왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the mobile phone cradle 2. 왘 Press release button in direction of
mobile phone remains switched on for approxi- arrow 1 and take mobile phone
mately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
during this time, the mobile phone switches off
10 minutes after the call has been completed.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing a different mobile phone Tele Aid The Tele Aid system
cradle
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system mand)
may only be performed by completing the sub-
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance The Tele Aid system consists of three
call using button ¡. Failure to complete ei- types of response:
ther of these steps will result in a system that is
not activated. 앫 automatic and manual emergency
If you have any questions regarding activation, 앫 Roadside Assistance and
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 앫 information
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
Shortly after the completion of your ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
Example illustration
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive properly connected, not damaged and cel-
1 Contact plate a user ID and password. By visiting lular and GPS coverage is available.
2 Recesses www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
3 Mobile phone cradle (USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted when using the volume control
왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into information, remote door unlock and on the multifunction steering wheel. To
recesses 2 of contact plate 1. more. raise, press button æ and to lower,
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward press button ç or use the volume knob
until it engages. on your COMAND headunit.
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
294
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The SOS button is located above the interior Emergency calls

rear view mirror (컄 page 297). Warning! G An emergency call is initiated automatical-
The Roadside Assistance button • and the ly following an accident in which the emer-
Information button ¡ are located below the If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
center armrest cover (컄 page 285).
the Information button remain illuminated air bags deploy.
i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular net- constantly in red and/or the message An emergency call can also be initiated
work for communication and the GPS (Global Po- Tele Aid malfunction Drive to manually by opening the cover next to the
sitioning System) satellites for vehicle location.
workshop is displayed in the multifunction interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
If either of these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this oc- display after the system self-check, a mal- briefly pressing the button located under
curs, assistance must be summoned by other function in the system has been detected. the cover. See (컄 page 297) for instruc-
means. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined tions on initiating an emergency call man-
above, the system may not operate as ex- ually.
System self-check pected. Have the system checked at the Once the emergency call is in progress, the
Initially, after switching on the ignition, nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
malfunctions are detected and indicated possible. to flash. The message Connecting call
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the appears in the multifunction display and
Roadside Assistance button • and the the audio system is muted. When the con-
Information button ¡ stay on longer nection is established, the message
than 10 seconds or do not come on). Call connected appears in the multifunc-
The message Tele Aid malfunction tion display. All information relevant to the
Drive to workshop appears in the multi- emergency, such as the location of the ve-
function display. hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
tion system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response The Tele Aid system is available if
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
will be established automatically soon af-
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
for monitoring services, connection flashing continuously and there was no
The Response Center will attempt to deter-
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
mine more precisely the nature of the
emergency provided they can speak to an 앫 the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could
occupant of the vehicle. and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
the information on to the Response vant cellular phone network is not available).
Center The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos- 10 seconds.
sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the informa- Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
tion on to the Response Center. moned by other means.
296
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually Roadside Assistance button •

Warning! G Located below the center armrest cover is
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the the Roadside Assistance button •.
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve- 왘 Press and hold the button (for longer
hicle in a dangerous road location), please than 2 seconds).
do not wait for voice contact after you have
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
The button will flash while the call is in
tion. The Response Center will automatically
progress. The message Connecting
contact local emergency officials with the
call will appear in the multifunction
1 Cover vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
display and the audio system is muted.
2 SOS button ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- When the connection is established, the
왘 Briefly press on cover 1. pants. message Call connected appears in the
The cover will open. multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly. identification number, model, color and lo-
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 cation (subject to availability of cellular
will flash until the emergency call is and GPS signals).
concluded. A voice connection between the Roadside
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re- Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
sponse Center. of the vehicle will be established.
왘 Close cover after the emergency call is 왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
concluded. sistance.
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assis- Information button ¡
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified tance button • remains illuminated in red for
The Information button ¡ is located be-
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- low the center armrest cover.
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such er with the SOS button and the Information 왘 Press and hold button (for longer than
button ¡). 2 seconds).
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man- See system self-check (컄 page 295) when the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ual for more information. ter will be initiated. The button will
on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
The following is only available in the USA: flash while the call is in progress. The
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and there message Connecting call will appear
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
was no voice connection to the Response Center in the multifunction display and the au-
as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or dio system is muted.
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
the replacement of a flat tire with the initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable. vant cellular phone network is not available). The
When the connection is established, the
message Call failed appears in the multi- message Call connected appears in the
function display. multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- will transmit data generating the vehicle
ing button t on the multifunction steering identification number, model, color and lo-
wheel or the respective button for ending a tele- cation (subject to availability of cellular
phone call on the COMAND headunit. and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest authorized
298
Controls in detail
Useful features
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz Information calls can be terminated using Call priority
USA products and services is available to button t on the multifunction steering wheel
or the respective button for ending a telephone If other service calls such as a
you.
call on the COMAND headunit. Roadside Assistance call or Information
For more details concerning the Tele Aid call are active, an Emergency call is still
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing possible. In this case, the Emergency call
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
use your ID and password (sent to you sep- minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system will take priority and override all other ac-
arately) to learn more (USA only). has detected a malfunction or the service is not tive calls.
currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
i The indicator lamp on the Information an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have i The indicator lamp in the respective button
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for ap- the system checked or contact the Response flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only
proximately 10 seconds during the system Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or be terminated by a Response Center or Custom-
self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi- er Assistance Center representative except
er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assis- ble. Roadside Assistance and Information calls,
tance button •). which can also be terminated by pressing
See system self-check (컄 page 295) when the button t on the multifunction steering wheel
indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays or the respective button for ending a telephone
on longer than approximately 10 seconds. call on the COMAND headunit.
If the indicator lamp on the Information ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there the system does not reset, contact the Response
was no voice connection to the Response Center Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
established, then the Tele Aid system could not 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel- Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
lular phone network is not available). The mes- (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser-
sage Call failed appears in the multifunction vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
display.
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the Remote door unlock i The remote door unlock feature is available
COMAND system audio is muted and the select- if the relevant cellular phone network is avail-
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
ed mode (radio or CD) pauses. The optional cel- able.
lular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: The SOS button will flash and the message
use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Dis- Call connected will appear in the multifunc-
connect the coiled cord and place the call. The 왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
COMAND navigation* system (if engaged) will command.
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
continue to run. The multifunction display in the
instrument cluster is available for use, and spo- or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
ken commands are only available by pressing the specialist will attempt to establish voice contact
You will be asked to provide your pass-
RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up win- with the vehicle occupants.
word which you provided when you
dow will appear in the COMAND display to indi- If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more
cate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
completed the subscriber agreement.
than 20 seconds before door unlock authoriza-
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the tion was received by the Response Center, you
trunk recessed handle for a minimum must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk re-
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is cessed handle again.
flashing.
The message Call connected appears
in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
300
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener

In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The integrated remote control is capable of
왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
The police will issue a numbered inci- devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
dent report. place up to three hand-held remote con-
trols used to operate devices such as
왘 Pass this number on to the garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
with your password issued to you when some other systems.
you subscribed to the service. Interior rear view mirror with integrated re-
Before the integrated remote control can mote control
The Response Center will then attempt be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele 1 Indicator lamp
rage door opener, gate operator or other
Aid system. Once the vehicle is locat- device you wish to operate. See the follow- 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
ed, the Response Center will contact ing instructions for programming informa-
the local law enforcement and you. The Needed for programming (not part of vehi-
tion. cle equipment):
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement. 5 Hand-held remote control of ga-
rage door opener, gate operator
i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more or other device
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm 6 Hand-held remote control but-
system (컄 page 106). ton
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 2:
Warning! G When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage. 왘 If you have previously programmed a
Before programming the integrated remote Do not run the engine while programming signal transmitter button and wish to
control to a garage door opener or gate the integrated remote control. Inhalation of retain its programming, proceed to
operator, make sure people and objects are exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All step 3.
out of the way of the device to prevent po- exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide If you are programming the integrated
tential harm or damage. When programming (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious- remote control for the first time, press
a garage door opener, the door moves up or ness and possible death. and hold the two outer signal transmit-
down. When programming a gate operator, ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
the gate opens or closes. Programming the integrated remote them only when the indicator lamp 1
Do not use the integrated remote control control begins to flash after approximately
with any garage door opener that lacks 20 seconds (do not hold the button for
Step 1:
safety stop and reverse features as required longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). dure erases any previous settings for
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model all three channels and initializes the
manufactured before April 1, 1982). memory.
A garage door that cannot detect an object If you later wish to program a second
- signaling the door to stop and reverse - and/or third hand-held transmitter to
does not meet current U.S. federal safety the remaining two signal transmitter
standards. buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
gin directly with step 3.
302
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3: Step 5: Rolling code programming

왘 Hold the end of hand-held remote 왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from a To train a garage door opener (or other
control 5 of the device you wish to slow to a rapidly flashing light, release rolling code devices) with the rolling code
train approximately 2 to 5 in the hand-held remote control button feature, follow these instructions after
(5 to 12 cm) away from the signal and the signal transmitter button. completing the “Programming” portion
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be Step 6:
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
programmed, while keeping the indica- person may make the following training
tor lamp 1 in view. 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal procedures quicker and easier.)
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
Step 4: Step 8:
observe the indicator lamp 1.
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously 왘 Locate “training” button on the garage
If indicator lamp 1 stays on
press hand-held remote control door opener motor head unit.
constantly, programming is complete
button 6 and the desired signal trans-
and your device should activate when Exact location and color of the button
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
the respective signal transmitter may vary by garage door opener brand.
release the buttons until step 5 is com-
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re- Depending on manufacturer, the
pleted.
leased. “training” button may also be referred
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
and then rapidly. i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about is difficulty locating the transmitting
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12 button, refer to the garage door opener
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the Operator’s Manual. 컄컄
first time the signal transmitter button is pro- as your garage door opener may be equipped
grammed. If this button has already been pro- with the “rolling code” feature.
grammed, the indicator lamp will only start Step 7:
flashing after 20 seconds.
왘 To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Step 9: Step 12: Step 4:

왘 Press the “training” button on the ga- 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by 왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter
rage door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed signal trans- button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
The “training light” is activated. mitter button (2, 3 or 4). this button until it has been successful-
Step 13: ly trained.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
왘 While still holding down the signal
ing two steps. 왘 To program the remaining two signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
Step 10: “cycle” your hand-held remote control
above starting with step 3.
왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press, button 6 as follows: Press and hold
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
Gate operator/Canadian programming
grammed signal transmitter button it for 2 seconds, and again press and
Canadian radio-frequency laws require hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se-
(2, 3 or 4).
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) quence on the hand-held remote con-
Step 11: after several seconds of transmission trol until the frequency signal has been
왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release which may not be long enough for the learned. Upon successful training, indi-
same signal transmitter button a sec- integrated signal transmitter to pick up the cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
ond time to complete the training pro- signal during programming. Similar to this rapidly after several seconds.
cess. Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
are designed to “time-out” in the same
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling step 6 to complete.
manner.
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same If you live in Canada or if you are having
signal transmitter button a third time to com- difficulties programming a gate operator
plete the training process. (regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
304
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Upon completion of programming the inte- Operation of integrated remote control Programming tips
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). If you are having difficulty programming
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
the integrated remote control, here are
rage door opener, gate operator or other device. 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu- some helpful tips:
grated signal transmitter button (2,
ture programming of an integrated remote con- 3 or 4) to activate the remote con- 앫 Check the frequency of hand-held re-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
trolled device. mote control 5 (typically located on
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations. The integrated remote control trans- the reverse side of the remote). The in-
mitter continues to send the signal as tegrated remote control is compatible
Reprogramming a single signal trans- long as the button is pressed – up to with radio-frequency devices operating
mitter button 20 seconds. between 280-390 MHz.
To program a device using a signal trans- 앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote
mitter button previously trained, follow Erasing the integrated remote control control 5. This will increase the likeli-
these steps: memory hood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate sig-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37).
nal to the integrated remote control.
왘 Press and hold the desired signal 왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer
앫 While performing step 3, hold
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
Do not release the button. ent lengths and angles from the signal
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af- not hold for longer than 30 seconds. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the are programming. Attempt varying an-
signal transmitter button, proceed with The codes of all three channels are gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
programming starting with step 3. erased. (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
앫 If another hand-held remote control is i USA only: i Canada only:

available for the same device, try the This device complies with Part 15 of the This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
programming steps again using that FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following Canada. Operation is subject to the following
other hand-held remote control. Make two conditions: two conditions:
sure new batteries are in the hand-held (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- (1) This device may not cause interference, and
remote control before beginning the ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference re-
procedure. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device
garage door opener assembly. This
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the
may help improve transmitting and/or
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
receiving signals. equipment.
i Certain types of garage door openers are in-
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
306
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
307
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads above 4500 rpm in each gear.
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- All of the above instructions, as may apply
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
maximum rpm in each gear). ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
앫 Avoid accelerating by kickdown. the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using i Always obey applicable speed limits.
the gear selector lever.
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 190) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
308
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-

pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- structing the pedals’ range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac- have sufficient clearance.
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
cident are greatly increased when you drink
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive.
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
eration. taking drugs.
앫 Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System. Contact
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
309
Operation
Power assistance Brakes ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:

Because the ESP® operates automatically, the
engine and the ignition must be shut off
Warning! G Warning! G (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
With the engine not running, there is no After driving in heavy rain for some time or 1) when:
power assistance for the brake and steering without applying the brakes or through wa- 앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake
systems. In this case, it is important to keep ter deep enough to wet brake components, test dynamometer
in mind that a considerably higher degree of the first braking action may be somewhat 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- reduced and increased pedal pressure may raised
hicle. be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles erwise seriously damage the brake system.
in front. For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
with the ESP®” (컄 page 105).
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads. To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
It can also result in the brakes overheating, driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
thereby significantly reducing their effec- salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle with considerable force prior to
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- parking. The heat generated serves to dry
dent. the brakes.
310
Operation
If your brake system is normally only sub- Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- be the reason for low brake fluid level in Warning! G
sionally test the effectiveness of the the reservoir.
brakes by applying above-normal braking If other than recommended brake pads are
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may installed, or other than recommended brake
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the fluid is used, the braking properties of the
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
instrument cluster comes on and an vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
acoustic warning sounds although the safe braking is substantially impaired. This
Warning! G parking brake is released (컄 page 383). could result in an accident.
Observe additional messages in the multi-
Make sure not to endanger any other road function display that may appear
users when carrying out these braking ma- (컄 page 413). ! When driving down long and steep grades,
neuvers. relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
Have the brake system inspected lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
immediately. Contact an authorized This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist Mercedes-Benz Center. reduces brake pad wear.
System (BAS) (컄 page 99).
All checks and service work on the brake After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
system should be carried out by qualified on for some time, rather than immediately
technicians only. Contact an authorized park, so that the air stream will cool down
Mercedes-Benz Center. the brakes faster.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
311
Operation
High-performance brake system Driving off

(E 63 AMG only) Warning! G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
The high-performance brake system is de- New vehicle brake pads and discs, and driving off. Perform this procedure only
signed to operate under the extremely high replacement brake pads and discs may take when the road is clear of other traffic.
operating demands required to accommo- several hundred miles of driving until they
date the performance capabilities of the Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak- place full load on the engine until the oper-
that time, you may need to use increased
ing-type noise depending on the ating temperature has been reached.
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
앫 vehicle speed be aware of this and adjust your driving and ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
braking accordingly during this break-in not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
앫 brake force applied
period. period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
앫 ambient conditions, e.g. temperature cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
Excessive high demand braking will cause not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
and humidity
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be Warranty.
As with any brake system, the wear of indi- attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
vidual brake system components such as instrument cluster and brake condition mes- ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
brake pads or disks strongly depends on sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
performance and causes premature brake and
your driving style and the conditions under ly for high performance driving, it is drivetrain wear.
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv- important to maintain and have the brake
ing style calling for high demand braking system checked regularly.
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
312
Operation
Parking Tires
앫 Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Warning! G 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. Warning! G

앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- wheel towards the road curb. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
bustible materials such as grass, hay or 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
leaves can come into contact with the hot to position 0 and remove the SmartKey ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
exhaust system, as these materials could be from the starter switch, or press you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi- ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*). tion to an area which is a safe distance from
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with the road.
of vehicle movement, before turning off the KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
when leaving.
engine and leaving the vehicle always: for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by

law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
313
Operation
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid Tire traction

band across the tread. Warning! G
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
You should pay particular attention to the
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Although the applicable federal motor vehi- condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be- point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
come visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
For more information, see “Tires and Warning! G
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the wheels” (컄 page 333).
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
adhesion properties on a wet road are will be substantially reduced. Under such
sharply reduced. Hydroplaning
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
Depending upon the weather and/or road Depending on the depth of the water layer with extreme caution.
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
widely. at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Specified tire inflation pressures must be road and apply brakes cautiously in the
maintained. This applies particularly if the rain.
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
314
Operation
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating An electronic speed limiter prevents your
(컄 page 364) with a minimum tread depth vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
앫 All models except E 63 AMG:
wheels for the winter season to make sure speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
130 mph (210 km/h)
normal balanced handling characteristics. dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
On packed snow, they can reduce your ing conditions. 앫 E 63 AMG:
stopping distance compared to summer 155 mph (250 km/h)
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still Warning! G 앫 E 63 AMG with increased top speed*
considerably greater than when the road is E 63 AMG (Performance Package*):
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap- Even when permitted by law, never operate 186 mph (300 km/h)
propriate caution. a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may mum speed rating of the tires.
may have a tire speed rating above the
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is Exceeding the maximum speed for which maximum speed permitted by the elec-
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- tronic speed limiter.
Warranty.
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
Make sure your tires have the required tire
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
personal injury and possible death, for you
the “Technical data” section (컄 page 481),
and for others.
for example when purchasing new tires.
For information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(컄 page 350).
315
Operation
If you are uncertain about the correct read- Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
ing of the information given on a tire’s side- fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce
Center will be glad to assist you. roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid the normal braking effect.
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
i For information on speed ratings for winter Depressing the brake pedal periodically
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
tires, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 364). when traveling at length on salt-strewn
system under such conditions.
For additional general information on tire speed roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal.
(컄 page 352). move gear selector lever to position N. Try
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
rective steering action.
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
i For more information on driving with snow ter driving is resumed.
chains, see “Snow chains” (컄 page 365).
Warning! G
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift users when carrying out these braking ma-
in order to obtain braking action. This could neuvers.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss.
316
Operation
Standing water Passenger compartment

Warning! G
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make of unknown depth. Before driving through water, Warning! G
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust determine its depth. Never accelerate before
pipe and from around the vehicle with the driving into water. The bow wave could force wa- Always fasten items being carried as secure-
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus ly as possible.
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- damaging them.
terior resulting in unconsciousness and If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the pas- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
death.
senger compartment or the engine compart- around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, ment. Water in these areas could cause damage to vehicle occupants unless the items are
open a window slightly on the side of the ve- to electrical components or wiring of the engine securely fastened in the vehicle.
hicle not facing the wind. or transmission, or could result in water being in-
gested by the engine through the air intake caus- The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
ing severe internal engine damage. Any such jects.
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Warning! G Limited Warranty. Driving abroad
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
Abroad, there is an extensive
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
which are not listed in the index of your
ing point do not guarantee that the road
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
surface is free of ice.
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 364).
317
Operation
Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter (gasoline engine)
mitter
Your vehicle is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
COMAND, radio and telephone* important element in conjunction with the
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
Warning! G with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
Please do not forget that your primary re- operating condition by following our rec-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. ommended maintenance instructions as
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
agement and Data System), radio or tele-
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
personal injury. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic convert-
ers, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this
conditions permit. vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
phone or a citizens band unit should only
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on verter, causing it to overheat, which could
ly 14 m) every second.
the outside of the vehicle. potentially start a fire.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
318
Operation
Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) Emission control

Warning! G
Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation Certain parts of the engine and the
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- catalyst, an important element in conjunc- emission control system serve to keep the
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- tion with the oxygen sensors to achieve toxic components of the exhaust gases of
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves substantial control of the pollutants in the the engine within permissible limits re-
can come into contact with the hot exhaust exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in quired by law.
system, as these materials could be ignited proper operating condition by following
These systems will function properly only
and cause a vehicle fire. our recommended maintenance instruc-
when maintained strictly according to
tions as outlined in your Maintenance
factory specifications. Any adjustments on
Booklet.
the engine should, therefore, be carried
out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz
Warning! G Center authorized technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- way. Moreover, the specified service
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- procedures must be carried out regularly
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
can come into contact with the hot exhaust requirements. For details refer to the
system, as these materials could be ignited Maintenance Booklet.
and cause a vehicle fire.
319
Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is overheated
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approximately can cause some fluids, which may have
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- 248°F (120°C). leaked into the engine compartment, to
consciousness and lead to death. catch fire. You could be seriously
The engine should not be operated with burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns which can occur
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the just by opening the engine hood. Stay
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. away from the engine if you see or hear
have the cause determined and corrected steam coming from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
dow fully open at all times.
320
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling ! Diesel engine:
Warning! G When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel con-
tainers, place a filling filter, a suede cloth or a
Warning! G Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not clean flannel cloth as a filter. Otherwise, parti-
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the cles from the fuel container could clog the fuel
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly fuel system and engine could be damaged. lines and/or the diesel injection system.
flammable and poisonous. They burn In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
i In case that the central locking system does
violently and can cause serious injury. If you have accidentally filled the tank with not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not start mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assis-
tance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel! the engine. The fuel system must be drained
completely.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or ! Damage resulting from the use of non ap-
proved fuels or fuel additives or resulting from
clothing contact, extinguish all smoking
mixing gasoline with diesel fuel is not covered by
materials. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel
The fuel filler flap is located on the
fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
fuel vapors can damage your health.
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
왘 Turn the engine off
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un-
locks the fuel filler flap. 앫 by turning the SmartKey to
position 0. 컄컄
321
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* i Gasoline engine:

start/stop button. Open the driv- Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a min-
er’s door (with the driver’s door imum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
open, starter switch is now in Overfilling of the fuel tank may create 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
position 0, same as SmartKey re- pressure in the system which could cause a quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
moved from starter switch). gas discharge. This could cause the gas to For more information on gasoline, see “Premium
spray back out when removing the fuel unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)”
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter (컄 page 496), see “Fuel requirements”
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
switch. injury. (컄 page 496) and the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an
왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the point indicated by the arrow. 왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
The fuel filler flap springs open. until it audibly engages. i Diesel engine:
Only use commercially available vehicular
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
to it until possible pressure is released. (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information on
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve pump.
on the fuel filler flap. warning lamp to flash and the malfunction indi-
cator lamp ú (USA only) or the malfunction For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping indicator lamp ± (Canada only) to illuminate. Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle (USA only) or contact an authorized
For more information, see also “Practical hints” Mercedes-Benz Center.
unit. (컄 page 384).
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle i Diesel engine:
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is
unit cuts out – do not top off or over-
empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
fill. (컄 page 459).
322
Operation
At the gas station
! Diesel engine: Low outside temperatures Check regularly and before a long trip
The engine is more susceptible to wear and (diesel engine)
damage if you use
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
앫 marine diesel fuel improved cold flow characteristics is of-
앫 heating oil fered in the winter months. Check with
앫 additives your fuel retailer.
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be ! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
seriously damaged if you use blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
앫 LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-
(500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) aged, which is not covered by the
앫 any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of
above 15 ppm 1 Windshield washer system and head-
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
lamp cleaning system*
special additives is not covered by the 2 Brake fluid
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 3 Coolant level
323
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer system and Coolant Vehicle lighting

headlamp cleaning system*
For normal replenishing, use water (pota- Check function and cleanliness. For more
For information on refilling the reservoir, ble water quality). For more information on information on replacing light bulbs, see
see “Windshield washer system and coolant, see “Coolant level” (컄 page 330) “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 443).
headlamp cleaning system*” and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.” For more information, see “Exterior lamp
(컄 page 332). (컄 page 491). switch” (컄 page 137).
Brake fluid Engine oil level Tire inflation pressure
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake For more information on engine oil level, For more information, see “Checking tire
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or see “Engine oil” (컄 page 327). inflation pressure” (컄 page 342).
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 383).
For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc.” (컄 page 491).
324
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood
Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open Vehicles with gasoline engine:
– even when the engine is turned off. The engine is equipped with a transistorized
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To ignition system. Because of the high voltage
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, let the engine cool off com- it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
be forced open by passing air flow. pletely before touching any components on nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others. precautions. 앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine
Opening 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
Warning! G turned manually
Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine is running.
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature indicator indicates that the engine The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
is overheated, do not open the hood. Move proximately 30 seconds or may even restart
away from vehicle and do not open the hood after the engine has been turned off. Stay
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, clear of fan blades.
call the fire department.
325
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning! G
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
앫 with the engine running
1 Release lever 2 Handle for opening the hood
앫 while starting the engine
앫 when the ignition is switched on 왘 Pull release lever 1. 왘 Lift the hood slightly.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 will extend out of the radia-
tor grille.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
! To avoid damage to handle 2 never pull up

the hood on handle 2.
326
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radia- Closing Engine oil

tor grille.
The amount of oil your engine needs will
왘 Lift bottom of hood at edge of radiator Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
grille.
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
The hood will be automatically held occur when
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
you do not close the hood on anyone. 앫 the vehicle is new
struts.
Make sure that the hood is securely en- 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
gaged before driving off. Do not continue higher engine speeds
driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
Engine oil consumption checks should only
ter an accident, for example. The hood could
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and endanger you and others. i Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Us-
ing special additives not approved by
왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap- Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
proximately 1 ft (30 cm). by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The hood will lock audibly. More information on this subject is available at
any Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
327
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level 왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain ac-
When checking the oil level
curate reading.
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
The oil level is correct when it is be-
ground
tween the lower (min) mark 3 and
앫 with the engine at operating tempera- upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1.
ture, the vehicle must have been sta-
tionary for at least 5 minutes with the i All models (except E 63 AMG):
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
engine turned off
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
앫 with the engine not at operating tem- 1 Oil dipstick 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
perature yet, the vehicle must have 2 Upper (max) mark E 63 AMG:
been stationary for at least 5 minutes 3 Lower (min) mark The filling quantity between the upper and lower
with the engine turned off marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
To check the engine oil level with the oil 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
dipstick, do the following:
왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 325).
For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1. oil”.
왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. For more information on engine oil, see
왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
dipstick guide tube. (컄 page 491).
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 418).
328
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters entering the ground or water.
required for vehicles with Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil- It could cause damage to the engine and emis-
ters, refer to the Factory Approved Service sion control system not covered by the
Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification For more information on engine oil, see the
other than those expressly required for the Main- E 350/E 550 (E 320 BLUETEC similar) “Technical data” section (컄 page 491) and
tenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS
(컄 page 495).
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those called for
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or Transmission fluid level
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine
or emission control system damage not covered The transmission fluid level does not need
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
E 63 AMG
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
329
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-

앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly- imately one half turn counterclockwise
The engine coolant is a mixture of water col which may burn if it comes into con- to release any excess pressure.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check tact with hot engine parts. 왘 Continue turning the cap 2 counter-
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- clockwise and remove it.
parked on level ground and the engine
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
must be cool. The coolant level is correct if the level:
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
The coolant expansion tank is located on hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- 앫 for cold coolant: reaches marking
the driver’s side of the engine compart- der pressure. bar 1 in the expansion tank 3
ment.
앫 for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
Warning! G
왘 Add coolant as required.
In order to avoid any potentially serious 왘 Replace and tighten cap 2.
burns:
For more information on coolant, see the
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the “Technical data” section (컄 page 498).
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant 1 Marking bar in the expansion tank
reservoir if coolant temperature is 2 Cap
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to 3 Coolant expansion tank
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
330
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Warning! G Wear eye protection.
Your vehicle’s battery is located on the
right hand side of the trunk (컄 page 460). Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills immediate-
tions when handling automotive batteries. ly with clear water. Contact a
The battery should always be sufficiently
physician if necessary.
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for Risk of explosion.
battery maintenance intervals. Keep children away.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-

tance trips, you will need to have the bat- Fire, open flames and smoking
tery charge checked more frequently. are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this
batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operator’s Manual.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
for an extended period of time, consult an with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about method of disposal. Many states require
Wear suitable protective cloth-
steps you need to observe. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
ing, especially gloves, apron and
for recycling.
faceguard.
331
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to where temperatures may fall below freezing
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
The windshield washer reservoir is located in a suitable container. the washer system/reservoir.
in the engine compartment.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
Warning! G plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- For more information, see “Windshield and
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite (컄 page 500).
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘 Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.

왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir Washer Concentrate and water (or
Fluid for the windshield washer system and commercially available premixed wind-
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
from the windshield washer reservoir. It pending on ambient temperatures).
has a capacity of:
앫 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system
앫 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) in vehicles with head-
lamp cleaning system
332
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines
for information on tested and recommend- Warning! G
ed rims and tires for summer and winter 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
operation. They can also offer advice con- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
cerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
Warning! G When replacing rims, only use Genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds.
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
original part. See an authorized accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss and
mounted: damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension compo- treads. The operating safety of the vehicle 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
nents can be damaged cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
앫 The correct operating clearance of the required.
wheels and the tires are no longer guar- 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
anteed too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire

Every time you check your tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Warning! G pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫 Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 335)
앫 Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
앫 cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of 앫 Distance driven
tire’s rubber
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and become worn over
see “Recommended tire inflation pres- time even if never used, and thus should be
sure” (컄 page 341). inspected and replaced when necessary.
334
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth Storing tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re- with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro-
sharply reduced at tread depths of less duced. tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso-
than 1/8 in (3 mm). line.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Cleaning tires
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
become visible at a tread depth of approx- tires. The intense jet of water can result in dam-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the age to the tire.
tire is considered worn and should be re- Always replace a damaged tire.
placed.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning! G 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
335
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle
Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. or GAWR for either the front axle or
mance. To benefit, however, you must rear axle.
1) The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
placard can be found on the driver’s
specified.
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. equipment tires on your vehicle.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary 2) The certification label, also found on
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated 1 Driver’s door B-pillar
on the spare wheel.
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehi- Following is a discussion on how to work
cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight with the information contained on the two
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the placards with regards to loading your vehi-
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, cle.
fuel and cargo. The certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
336
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information Tire and Loading Information placard Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
Warning! G information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the and rear seating capacity. The Tire and
specified load limit as indicated on the plac- Loading Information placard showing the
ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading seating capacity information is located on
the tires can overheat them, possibly caus- the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 336).
ing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or i Data shown on placard examples are for il-
lustration purposes only. Seating data are specif-
brake failure. ic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on ve-
Loading Information placard hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
i Data shown on placard examples are for il-
lustration purposes only. Load limit data are spe- The placard showing the load limit informa-
cific to each vehicle and may vary from data tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard
왘 Locate the statement “The combined
on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehi-
cle. weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.” on this placard.
The combined weight of all occupants, car-
go/luggage and trailer tongue load (if ap-
plicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced in that statement.
1 Seating capacity information on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
337
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit Step 4 Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed 왘 The resulting figure equals the avail- 왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
as required of all manufacturers under able amount of cargo and luggage load load from your trailer will be trans-
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, capacity. For example, if the “XXX” ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will manual to determine how this reduces
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. be five 150 lbs. passengers in your the available cargo and luggage load
Step 1 vehicle, the amount of available cargo capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 340).
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
The following table shows examples on
왘 Locate the statement “The combined (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
how to calculate total and cargo load
weight of occupants and cargo should
Step 5 capacities with varying seating configura-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
tions and number and size of occupants.
your vehicle’s placard. 왘 Determine the combined weight of
The following examples use a load limit
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
Step 2 of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
vehicle. That weight may not safely
왘 Determine the combined weight of the purposes only. Make sure you are using
exceed the available cargo and luggage
driver and passengers that will be the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
load capacity calculated in step 4.
riding in your vehicle. on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 337).
Step 3
왘 Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
338
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants placard minus combined weight of
pants and passengers) all occupants)
cargo from
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 340).
339
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 340) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
GVWR.
(컄 page 340) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi- tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
10 percent of the trailer weight and every-
front or rear axle. You can obtain the ceed the maximum permissible weight
thing loaded in it.
GVWR and GAWR from the certification la- limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
bel. The certification label can be found on axle), have the loaded vehicle (including primarily to carry passengers and their
the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap- cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
data” (컄 page 476). plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
suitable commercial scale.
340
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure should be

checked regularly and should only be ad-
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
Warning! G sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
Follow recommended tire inflation 1 mile (1.6 km).
pressures.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires pressures listed on Tire and Loading
wear excessively and/or unevenly, Information placard on the driver’s door
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, B-pillar.
and are more likely to fail from being over- 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
heated. Keeping the tires properly inflated with recommended cold tire inflation
provides the best handling, tread life and pressures
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires riding comfort.
can adversely affect handling and ride The Tire and Loading Information placard
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping In addition to the Tire and Loading lists the recommended cold tire inflation
distance, and result in sudden deflation Information placard on the driver’s door pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
(blowout) because they are more likely to B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
become punctured or damaged by road any additional information pertaining to apply to the tires installed as original
debris, potholes etc. special driving situations. For more infor- equipment.
mation, see “Important notes on tire infla-
tion pressure” (컄 page 342).
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard locat- i Data shown on placard examples are for il-
ed on the driver’s door B-pillar lustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to
(컄 page 336). each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehi-
cle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
341
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation i Driving comfort may be reduced when the Checking tire inflation pressure
pressure tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel at least once a month.
Warning! G filler flap.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
drops: pressure for normal driving speeds. You can be considered cold if the vehicle has
should wait until the tires are cold before been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
앫 Check the tires for punctures from
adjusting the tire inflation pressure. less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
foreign objects.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from Some vehicles may have supplemental tire If you check the tire inflation pressure
the valves or from around the rim. inflation pressure information for vehicle when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
loads less than the maximum loaded vehi- been driven for several miles or sitting less
cle condition. If such information is provid- than 3 hours), the reading will be
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure ed, it can be found on the placard located
are also increased while driving, depending approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
on the inside of the fuel filler flap the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
on the driving speed and the tire load. (컄 page 321). air out to match the specified cold tire in-
If you will be driving your vehicle at high flation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, underinflated.
mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
where it is legal and conditions allow,
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
when checking tire inflation pressure
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in-
where the temperature is different from
flation pressure. If you do not adjust the
the outside temperature.
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
342
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

Warning! G manually
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures. Follow the steps below to achieve correct Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
tire inflation pressure: pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota-
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires tional speed. This allows the system to de-
wear excessively and/or unevenly, 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one
tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
and are more likely to fail from being 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
overheated. valve. see a corresponding warning message in
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire the multifunction display.
can adversely affect handling and ride gauge and check against the recom- The Run Flat Indicator may function in a
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping mended tire inflation pressure on the restricted manner or with a delay
distance, and result in sudden deflation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(blowout) because they are more likely to 앫 if snow chains are mounted to the
(컄 page 336). If necessary, add air to
become punctured or damaged by road vehicle
achieve the recommended tire inflation
debris, potholes etc. pressure. 앫 in winter road conditions prevail in
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the presence of ice and snow
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the 앫 if you are driving on a loose surface
weight as indicated on the placard on the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the (e.g. sand or gravel)
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
can overheat them, possibly causing a 앫 if you are driving in a very sporty man-
왘 Install the valve cap. ner (involving rapid acceleration or high
blowout.
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. speeds in curves)
343
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator

Warning! G Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
When the multifunction display shows the The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a reactivated in the following situations:
message Tire pressure Check tires, warning for wrongly selected tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation
one or more of your tires is significantly un- pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- pressure
derinflated. You should stop and check your sure according to the placard on the driver’s
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat- 앫 If you have installed new wheels or
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg-
ed on the vehicle’s tire information placard. tires
ular checks of the tire inflation pressures
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire since a gradual pressure loss in more than 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel Indicator. of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of rect.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
recommended tire inflation pressure as caused by a foreign object). In this case Warning! G
specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
manual. ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
maneuvers. a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
i The recommended tire inflation pressures If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard
located on the driver’s door B-pillar set, the system will monitor the pressure ac-
(컄 page 336). The tire inflation pressures are cording to the incorrect value.
not listed in the owner’s manual.
344
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). If you wish to confirm activation: Checking tire inflation pressure elec-
tronically with the Advanced Tire Pres-
Make sure the standard display menu 왘 Press button æ.
sure Monitoring System (Advanced
appears in the multifunction display
The following message will appear in TPMS)*, (Canada only)
(컄 page 151).
the multifunction display:
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Run Flat Indicator
are equipped with the proper electronic
until the following message appears in restarted
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
the multifunction display:
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
Run Flat Indicator
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val- tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
active
ues for all four tires. decrease in pressure in one or more of the
Menu: R-Button
If you wish to cancel activation: tires.
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 27).
왘 Press button ç. Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
The following message will appear in multifunction display. The present inflation
the multifunction display: or pressures are displayed only after a few
Restart 왘 Wait until the message minutes’ travel time.
Run Flat Indicator? Restart
Cancel Run Flat Indicator?
Yes Cancel
Yes
disappears.
345
Operation
Tires and wheels
i USA only: i Possible differences between the readings

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas Warning! G
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two station equipment, and the vehicle’s control
conditions: system can occur. Usually the readings issued by It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- the control system are more precise. the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
ence, and 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
(2) this device must accept any interference re- ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
왘 Press the j or k button until might lose control over the vehicle.
cause undesired operation. the current inflation pressures for each
tire appear in the multifunction display.
Any unauthorized modification to this device i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
could void the user’s authority to operate the may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the
equipment. removed road wheel for some minutes. If this
happens, keep in mind that the indicated value
i Canada only: where the spare wheel is mounted does not re-
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
flect the actual spare tire inflation pressure.
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and i When the message Tire pressure is
only displayed after driving for a few
minutes appears in the multifunction display,
the individual inflation pressure values are
cause undesired operation of the device.
matched with the tires. The individual values are
Any unauthorized modification to this device displayed after a few minutes driving.
equipment.
346
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G Warning! G Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi-
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
adjust tire inflation pressure according to inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
available, the supplemental tire pressure in- vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if underinflation has not
formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap. label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In you should determine the proper tire infla- i Operating radio transmission equipment
tion pressure for those tires). (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-
fully applying the brakes and avoiding As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
function.
abrupt steering maneuvers. been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible. Driving on a signif-
icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
347
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS* i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 27).
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
The TPMS must be reactivated when you The following message will appear in
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold the multifunction display:
a new level (e.g. because of different load tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation Restart tire
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then pressure on the placard on the driver’s door pressure monitor?
recalibrated to the current tire inflation B-pillar (컄 page 336). Some vehicles may have
왘 Press the æ button.
pressures. supplemental tire pressure information for driv-
ing at high speeds (컄 page 342) or for vehicle The following message will appear in
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con- the multifunction display:
Warning! G dition (컄 page 342). If such information is pro- Tire pressure monitor restarted
vided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate filler flap (컄 page 321). After a few minutes driving, the current
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tire inflation pressure values are ac-
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the tifunction steering wheel repeatedly cepted as reference values and then
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You until the standard display menu monitored.
might lose control over the vehicle. appears in the multifunction display If you wish to cancel activation:
(컄 page 151).
왘 Press the ç button.
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-
door B-pillar (컄 page 336) or, if avail- edly until you see the current inflation
able, the supplemental tire pressure pressures for each tire appear in the
information on the inside of the fuel display or the following message ap-
filler flap (컄 page 321), make sure the pears in the display
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
Tire pressure
correct.
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes
348
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with Overinflated tires

underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
Warning! G
Underinflated tires 앫 adversely affect handling Follow recommended tire inflation
characteristics pressures.
Underinflated tires can:
앫 cause uneven tire wear Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear can adversely affect handling and ride
앫 be more prone to damage from road
앫 adversely affect fuel economy comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
hazards
distance, and result in sudden deflation
앫 lead to tire failure from being
앫 adversely affect ride comfort (blowout) because they are more likely to
overheated
become punctured or damaged by road
앫 increase stopping distance
앫 adversely affect handling debris, potholes etc.
characteristics
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
349
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed
(컄 page 357) rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings (컄 page 355)
can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 356)
Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires: (컄 page 357)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 359)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 350)
8 Load identification (컄 page 354)
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 3 Radial tire code
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
5 Tire load rating
(컄 page 481). 6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
from data shown in above illustration.
350
Operation
Tires and wheels
General: Tire width Rim diameter

Depending on the design standards used, The tire width 1 (컄 page 350) indicates The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 350) is the
the tire size molded into the sidewall may the nominal tire width in mm. diameter of the bead seat, not the
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
size designation. Aspect ratio indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 350) is the
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire Tire load rating
dimensional relationship between tire
based on European design standards. section height and section width and is The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 350) is a
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio numerical code associated with the
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design is arrived at by dividing section height by maximum load a tire can support.
standards. section width.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lb
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Tire code
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
The tire code 3 (컄 page 350) indicates See also “Maximum tire load”
standards.
the tire construction type. The “R” stands (컄 page 356) where the maximum load as-
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: for radial tire type. Letter “D” means sociated with the load index is indicated in
Temporary spare tires which are high diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” kilograms and lb.
pressure compact spares designed for means belted-bias ply construction.
temporary emergency use only.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 352).
351
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating

Warning! G Warning! G The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 350)
The tire load rating must always be at least Do not overload the tires by exceeding the indicates the approved maximum speed
half of the GAWR (컄 page 360) of your vehi- specified load limit as indicated on the plac- for the tire.
cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
which may cause an accident and/or seri- Overloading the tires can overheat them, Warning! G
ous injury to you or others. possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
Always replace rims and tires with the same tires can also result in handling or steering Even when permitted by law, never operate
designation, manufacturer and type as problems, or brake failure. a vehicle at speeds greater than the
shown on the original part. maximum speed rating of the tires.
For additional information on tire load Exceeding the maximum speed for which
rating, see “Load identification” tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
(컄 page 354). failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or se-
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 350) and Tire rious injury and possible death, for you and
speed rating 6 (컄 page 350) are also referred
to as “service description”. for others.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 350) and Tire

speed rating 6 (컄 page 350) are also referred
to as “service description”.
352
Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires The service description is comprised of 앫 Any tire with a speed capability above
the tire load rating 5 (컄 page 350) 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
Index Speed rating and the tire speed rating 6 “ZR” in the size designation AND the
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) (컄 page 350). service description must be placed in
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) designation and no service
thesis designates the maximum speed
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 350) is
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) capability of the tire as being above
given, the tire manufacturer must be
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
consulted for the maximum speed ca-
manufacturer for the actual maximum
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) pability.
permissible speed of the tire.
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 350) is given, the speed capa-
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
bility is limited by the speed symbol in
(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) the service description.
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any description. The letter “Y” designates
tire with a speed capability above the speed rating and the speed capabil-
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam- (300 km/h).
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to.
353
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the
Index Speed rating tire sidewall following the letter designat-
1
Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h) ing the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 350).
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) No specification given: absence of any text
1 (like in above example) indicates a
H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
1 standard load (SL) tire.
V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
1 or M+S.for winter tires
(or reinforced) tire.
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special win- Light Load: designates a light load tire.
ter performance. Make sure the tires you use 1 Load identification C, D, E: designates load range associated
show M+S and the mountain/snow-
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
flake.marking on the tire sidewall. These i For illustration purposes only. Actual data a specified pressure.
tires meet specific snow traction performance on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers As- from data shown in above illustration.
sociation (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifi-
cally for use in snow conditions.
354
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 355)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
which denotes the tire meets require-
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
tation.
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facili- Manufacturer’s identification mark
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
purchasers in recall situations or other
(컄 page 355) denotes the tire
safety matters concerning tires and gives
1 DOT manufacturer.
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires. 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark New tires have a mark with two symbols.
3 Tire size
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type manufacturer) bols. For more information on retreaded
code” and “Date of manufacture”. 5 Date of manufacture tires, see (컄 page 333).
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Tire size

from data shown in above illustration. The code 3 (컄 page 355) indicates the
tire size.
355
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code Maximum tire load

The code 4 (컄 page 355) may, at the
Warning! G
option of the manufacturer, be used as a Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
descriptive code for identifying significant specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
characteristics of the tire. ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
Date of manufacture possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 355) tires can also result in handling or steering
identifies the week and year of manufac- problems, or brake failure.
ture.
The first two figures identify the week, For more information on tire load rating
1 Maximum tire load rating
starting with “01” to represent the first full (컄 page 351).
week of the calendar year. The second two i For illustration purposes only. Actual data For information on calculating total and
figures represent the year. on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
cargo load capacities (컄 page 338).
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002. The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
356
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
inflation pressure (컄 page 341) for proper (U.S. vehicles)
tire inflation.
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
Warning! G treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance.
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
pressure more likely to fail from being overheated.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary can adversely affect handling and ride com-
from data shown in above illustration. fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
This is the maximum permissible tire tance, and result in sudden deflation 1 Treadwear
inflation pressure for the tire. (blowout) because they are more likely to 2 Traction
become punctured or damaged by road de- 3 Temperature resistance
bris, potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
357
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where appli- The relative performance of tires depends Temperature
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread upon the actual conditions of their use,
The temperature grades are A (the high-
shoulder and maximum section width. For however, and may depart significantly
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
example: from the norm due to variations in driving
tance to the generation of heat and its
habits, service practices and differences in
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
Treadwear Traction Temperature road characteristics and climate.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
200 AA A laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
Traction
perature can cause the material of the tire
All passenger car tires must conform to The traction grades, from highest to low- to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
federal safety requirements in addition to est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- cessive temperature can lead to sudden
these grades. resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
pavement as measured under controlled level of performance which all passenger
Treadwear conditions on specified government test car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
marked C may have poor traction perfor- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
mance. performance on the laboratory test wheel
tested under controlled conditions on a
than the minimum required by law.
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one Warning! G
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
358
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology

Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- Accessory weight
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and The combined weight (in excess of those
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin- standard items which may be replaced) of
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- automatic transmission, power steering,
rately or in combination, can cause power brakes, power windows, power
excessive heat build-up and possible tire seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
failure. these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread Air pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data The amount of air inside the tire pressing
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
This marking tells you about the type of square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
cord and number of plies in the sidewall bar.
and under the tread.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
359
Operation
Tires and wheels
Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

Another metric unit for air pressure. There A tire branding symbol which denotes the This is the maximum permissible vehicle
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) tire meets requirements of the weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) U.S. Department of Transportation. the vehicle including all options, passen-
to 1 bar. gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
Bead certification label located on the driver’s
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
door B-pillar.
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
Kilopascal (kPa)
rim. the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s The metric unit for air pressure. There are
Cold tire inflation pressure door B-pillar. 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driv- GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (kPa) to 1 bar.
en no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). The GVW comprises the weight of the
Maximum load rating
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
Curb weight installed accessories, passengers and The maximum load in kilograms and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue pounds that can be carried by the tire.
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
load. The GVW must never exceed the
dard equipment including the maximum
GVWR indicated on the certification label Maximum loaded vehicle weight
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
equipped, air conditioning and additional The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
optional equipment, but without passen- total load limit, and production options
gers and cargo. weight.
360
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure PSI (Pounds per square inch) TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This number is the greatest amount of air A standard unit of measure for air pressure Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
pressure that should ever be put in the tire -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
under normal driving conditions. in recall situations or other safety matters
Recommended tire inflation pressure concerning tires and gives purchases the
Normal occupant weight means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The number of occupants the vehicle is listed on Tire and Loading Information is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
designed to seat, multiplied by placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for
and “Date of manufacture”.
68 kilograms (150 lb). normal driving conditions. Provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Tire load rating
Occupant distribution
Rim Numerical code associated with the
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
maximum load a tire can support.
at their designated seating positions. A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
Tire ply composition and material used
Production options weight seated.
This indicates the number of plies or the
The combined weight of those installed
Sidewall number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
regular production options weighing over
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
5 lb (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those The portion of a tire between the tread and
turers also must indicate the ply materials
standard items which they replace, not the bead.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
previously considered in curb weight or
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
361
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Rotating tires
Part of tire designation; indicates the A tire information system that provides
speed range for which a tire is approved. consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
Warning! G
Total load limit determined by tire manufacturers using
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
government testing procedures. The
Rated cargo and luggage load plus are of the same dimension.
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tire.
designated seating capacity. tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Traction
Load on an individual tire that is
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
determined by distributing to each axle its
via the tires. The amount of grip provided. with tires of the same dimension all
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two. around. If your vehicle is equipped with
Tread tires of the same dimension all around,
The portion of a tire that comes into tires can be rotated, observing a
contact with the road. front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
Treadwear indicators direction of the tire (컄 page 336).
Narrow bands, sometimes called In some cases, such as when your vehicle
“wear bars” that show across the tread of is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
remains. is not possible.
362
Operation
Tires and wheels
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-

ration, tires can be rotated according to Warning! G
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-
tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty Have the tightening torque checked after
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature changing a wheel. Wheels could become
portfolio. If none is available, tires should loose if not tightened with a torque of
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
sary, according to the degree of tire wear. bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 336).
For information on wheel change, see the
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire “Practical hints” section (컄 page 432) and
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder (컄 page 452).
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
363
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires

vehicle winterized at an authorized Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service Always use winter tires at temperatures
includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated 6
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
tires provide special winter performance. longer suitable for winter operation.
concentration.
Make sure the tires you use show the
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the mountain/snowflake.marking on the Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp tire sidewall. These tires meet specific winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
cleaning system. snow traction performance requirements maximum speed for which your tires are
Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed of the Rubber Manufacturers Association rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Can- hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
which is formulated for temperatures ada (RAC) and have been designed specif- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
below freezing point (컄 page 500). ically for use in snow conditions. Use of tices are available at your tire dealer or any
winter tires is the only way to achieve the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®
with decreasing ambient temperature. and 4MATIC in winter operation.
A well charged battery helps to make Warning! G
sure that the engine can be started For safe handling, make sure that all
even at low ambient temperatures. mounted winter tires are of the same make If you use your spare tire when winter tires
and have the same tread design. are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
앫 Tire change. the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
364
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains should only be driven on 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex- depending on location. Always check
tire at the nearest authorized
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains local and state laws before installing
as soon as possible when driving on roads snow chains.
without snow.
Block heater* (Canada only) 앫 Do not use snow chains on the spare
Please observe the following guidelines wheel (컄 page 487).
The engine is equipped with a block heat- when using snow chains:
er.
i When driving with snow chains, you may
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible wish to switch off the ESP® (컄 page 102) before
The electrical cable may be installed at an with all wheel/tire combinations setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (컄 page 481). the vehicle’s traction.
앫 Use snow chains in pairs and on rear i E 63 AMG:

Snow chains wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s Do not switch off the ESP® when driving in snow
mounting instructions. or with snow chains mounted.
! When driving with snow chains, always se-
lect the raised level of the level control system ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
Airmatic (컄 page 266). Other settings may result wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
in damage to your vehicle. components. The tires or the vehicle could be
damaged as a result.
! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive, use
snow chains on rear tires only. 앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance proved by Mercedes-Benz. Any autho-
for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
your vehicle or tires, make sure that the use of glad to advise you on this subject.
snow chains is permissible as specified in the
“Technical data” section of this Operator’s Man-
ual, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 481).
365
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Maintenance service indicator from Service A
your vehicle serviced by an authorized message
(approximately 1 hour)
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times The maintenance service indicator will no- to Service H
called for by the maintenance service indi- tify you when the next maintenance ser- (approximately 8 hours)
cator display. vice is due.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Starting approximately 1 month before
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet maintenance service is due, one of the fol-
and maintenance service indicator at the lowing messages will appear in the multi-
designated times/mileage will result in ve- function display while you are driving or
hicle damage not covered by the when you switch on the ignition (example
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. service A):
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
Service A in XXXX miles (km) of maintenance services and intervals they
Service A in XXX days need to be performed at.
Service A in X day
Service A due now i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance Sys-
tem only (U.S. vehicles. Canada vehicles, de-
The maintenance services will be indicated pending on vehicle production date):
by showing a service type A through type H The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks
in the multifunction display. Types A distance driven and the time elapsed since the
through H are classified based on estimat- last maintenance service and calculates other
ed time needed to perform the mainte- maintenance service work required.
nance service, ranging:
366
Operation
Maintenance
i Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible Clearing the maintenance service The maintenance service indicator
Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles, de- indicator message message is cleared and the standard
pending on vehicle production date): display appears in the multifunction
The maintenance service indicator mes-
앫 FSS PLUS evaluates engine temperature, oil display (컄 page 151).
sage is automatically cleared
level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance
driven and the time elapsed since the last 앫 after approximately 10 seconds, when Maintenance service term exceeded
service and calculates other maintenance you switch on the ignition or when
service work required. If you have exceeded the suggested main-
reaching the service threshold while
앫
tenance service term, you will see the fol-
The interval between maintenance services driving
depends on your driving habits. A gentle driv- lowing message in the multifunction
ing style, moderate engine speeds and the 앫 after approximately 30 seconds, once display:
avoidance of short-distance trips will length- the suggested maintenance service
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
en the interval between services. term has passed
Service A exceeded by XXX days
You can also clear it yourself: Service A exceeded by X day
In addition, a signal sounds when the mes-
sage appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
왘 Press the reset button 1 on the left

side of the instrument cluster.
367
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service i If the battery is disconnected, the days of Resetting the maintenance service
indicator display disconnection will not be included in the count indicator
shown by the maintenance service indicator. To
You can call up the maintenance service arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, In the event that the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check you will need to subtract these days from the on your vehicle is not carried out by an au-
when the next maintenance service is due. days shown in the maintenance service indicator thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
message or maintenance service indicator dis-
have the maintenance service indicator re-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 37). play.
set. The automotive maintenance facility
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- Do not confuse the maintenance service indica-
carrying out the maintenance service will
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly tor with the engine oil level indicator :.
find the information for resetting the main-
until the standard display appears in tenance service indicator in the mainte-
the multifunction display (컄 page 151). nance-relevant information for your
왘 Press button k or j until the vehicle. Such information is available from
maintenance service indicator display either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
with the service symbol 9 and the Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
service deadline appears in the multi- i If the maintenance service indicator was in-
function display. advertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
Warranty.
368
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
앫
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
near the ocean
앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
Always lock away cleaning products and
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
keep them out of reach of children.
앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
While in operation, even while parked, your 앫 Brake fluid aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- 앫 Bird droppings
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
tack the paintwork as well as the vehicle 앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
underbody and cause lasting damage. cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
369
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer Paintwork, painted body components
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and ! Follow the instructions provided by the pow- ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
er washer manufacturer on maintaining a dis- similar materials to painted body components
which always reflect the latest technology. tance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the may damage the paintwork.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved power washer.
car-care products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the
Mercedes-Benz Center. The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de-
damage due to negligent or incorrect care Always replace a damaged tire.
pending on the climate and washing deter-
cannot always be removed or repaired with Always keep the jet of water moving across the gent used.
the car-care products recommended here. surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au- electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. parts. should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
The following topics deal with the cleaning i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss).
and care of your vehicle and give important If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
“how-to” information as well as references a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- Do not apply any of these products or wax
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently hood is still hot.
ucts. locked or unlocked.
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Tar stains Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
370
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Hand-wash Automatic car wash

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle You can have your car washed in an auto-
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. matic car wash from the start. Automatic
nents and connectors from contact with car washes without brushes are prefera-
왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
water and cleaning agents. ble.
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- Shampoo. 왘 To protect the filter system, switch the
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine automatic climate control to air recir-
왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
compartment after every engine cleaning. culation mode (컄 page 214) or
fused jet of water.
Before applying, all control linkage bush- (컄 page 231).
ings and joints should be lubricated. The Direct only a very weak spray towards
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro- the ventilation intake. ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
tected from any wax. 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
sponge and chamois frequently. paint or ornamental moldings.
Vehicle washing
왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces dry with a chamois. fore running it through the automatic car
of road salt as soon as possible. wash.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
When washing the vehicle underbody, do the finish.
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels. ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- cloth or sponge.
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
locked or unlocked.
371
Operation
Vehicle care
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch Ornamental moldings Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
is set to M (컄 page 58). Otherwise, e.g. the turn signal lenses
For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers
tal moldings, use a damp cloth. 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental poo, with plenty of water.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle have chrome appearance, they could be made of ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
through an automatic car wash to prevent dam- anodized aluminum that will be damaged when suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-
age to the mirrors. cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings. the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
i After running the vehicle through an auto- For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind-
are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean- that contain solvents.
shield (컄 page 374) and the wiper blade inserts
(컄 page 374). This will prevent smears and re- er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
duce wiping noise which can be caused by resid- chrome-plated, contact an authorized non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
ual wax on the windshield. Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
vibrate. surface.
372
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor 왘 Restart the engine after cleaning sen- ! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
cover sor cover 1. covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Cleaning the Parktronic system* Follow the instructions provided by the power
sensors washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong

force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Distronic system sensor cover

왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as 1 Parktronic system* sensors in front
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- bumper
poo, with plenty of water and a
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water and a soft,
! To prevent scratches or damage, never ap- non-scratching cloth to clean
ply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratch- sensors 1 on the bumpers.
ing cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
373
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
blades Warning! G the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical For safety reasons, switch off wipers and restart/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
position before folding them away from the wind- move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
shield. They could otherwise damage the hood. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the back. If released, the force of the impact from
Never open the hood when the wiper arms are vehicle’s on-board electronics have the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
folded forward.
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed. and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con-
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
cause injury. front, rear or side windows with hard objects
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
setting u (컄 page 58). damage the windows.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
왘 With wiper arms in vertical position, could tear.
switch off the ignition (컄 page 63).
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
dow cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.
374
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the panorama roof with power Light alloy wheels Plastic and rubber parts
tilt/sliding panel
If possible, clean wheels once a week. 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
protective layer on the inside. washing solution.
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- spray of water for cleaning the light al- 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke-
dow cleaning solution. loy wheels. warm solution.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid The surface may temporarily change
mended. may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents ! The vehicle should not be parked for an ex-
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch tended period of time immediately after it has
the protective layer with hard objects such as an been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims Warning! G
ice scraper or ring. Never apply strong force and have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when clean- Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro- Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
ing the rear part of the tilt/sliding panel. sion of the brake disks and brake pads. Non-ap-
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the pro- proved wheel cleaners may also damage the
wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning. the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-
tective layer. vents will make the surface porous and vehi-
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should al-
ways be warmed-up before it is parked after cle occupants could suffer serious injuries
cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for from plastic parts coming loose in the event
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When of air bag deployment. 컄컄
applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products,
take care not to spray them on the brake disks.
375
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on Carpets Upholstery

these parts.
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
Never apply strong force and only use a soft, and Fabric Care for cleaning the car- clothing that have the tendency to give off
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. pets. coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
cloth or sponge.
Headliner and shelf below rear window colored. By lining the seats with a proper
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur- intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
face. 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
will be prevented.
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Hard plastic trim items
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Seat belts Warning! G
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply 왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
with light pressure. soap.
have been tested and approved by
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, ! The seat belts must not be treated with Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat Using other seat or head restraint covers
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in may interfere with or prevent the activation
cloth or sponge. direct sunlight. of the active head restraints. Contact an
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
face. Warning! G availability.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- severely weaken them. In a crash they may
oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz not be able to provide adequate protection.
approved Leather Care.
376
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery Wood trims

Please note that leather upholstery is a 왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
natural product and is therefore subject to damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
a natural aging process. Leather uphol- vehicle.
stery may also react to certain ambient in-
fluences such as high humidity or high ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
temperature by showing wrinkles for ex- may be abrasive.
ample.
왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
the upholstery.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
377
378
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only)
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the igni-
If any of the following lamps in the instru- tion, have the respective bulb checked and
ment cluster fails to come on during the replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS indicator lamp The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
comes on while the engine is switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP and Wheels may lock during hard braking,
running. PRE-SAFE® are also switched off (see reducing steering capability.
messages in the multifunction display).
왘 Read and observe messages in the
The brake system is still functioning normally multifunction display (컄 page 396).
but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth- rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
er systems such as the Parktronic system*, as possible.
Distronic*, or the automatic transmission
Failure to follow these instructions in-
may also be malfunctioning.
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again and
The battery might not be charged sufficiently. the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and
the battery checked.
380
Practical hints
What to do if …

v ® ®
The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP has been switched off. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 104).
comes on while the engine is Risk of accident! Exceptions: (컄 page 102).
running.
When the ESP® is switched off it will not sta- 왘 If leaving the ESP switched off, adapt
®
your speed and driving to the prevailing

bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes
road and weather conditions.
that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning. If the ESP® cannot be switched back on:
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunc- 왘 Observe additional messages in the
tion. multifunction display.
Risk of accident! 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …

v The yellow ESP warning The ESP or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle as
® ®
lamp flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss possible.
in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
The cruise control and the Distronic* system
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
are deactivated.
vailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 104).
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
382
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake.
comes on while driving and brake set.
3 (Canada only) 왘 Observe the additional message in
you hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in 왘 Risk of accident! Do not drive any fur-
comes on when the engine is the reservoir. ther. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
running and you hear a warn- Service Center. Under no circum-
ing sound. stances should you top up the brake
fluid. This will not solve the problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi- parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You pad thickness and leaks.
nated can result in an accident. Have your can be seriously burned.
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) There may be a malfunction in the 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi-
ble by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
± (Canada only) 앫 fuel management system
An on-board diagnostic connector is used
The yellow engine mal- 앫 ignition system (gasoline engine) by the service station to link the vehicle to
function indicator lamp the shop diagnostics system. It allows the
앫 emission control system
comes on while driving. accurate identification of system malfunc-
앫 systems which affect emissions tions through the readout of diagnostic trou-
Such malfunctions may result in excessive ble codes. It is located in the front left area
emissions values and may switch the engine of the footwell next to the parking brake.
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
i Some states may by law require you to visit

a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check lo-
cal requirements.
384
Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap.
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly:
± (Canada only)
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine mal- 왘 Close the fuel cap.
function indicator lamp
If it is closed properly:
comes on while driving.
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an autho-
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling start, turn off and restart the
engine three or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …

D The red coolant temperature There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
warning lamp comes on when engine from overheating
the engine is running. (컄 page 330).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently, 왘 Have the cooling system checked.
there is a leak in the cooling system. 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 248°F (120°C), you can continue
diator fan may be broken. driving to the nearest authorized
왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
The red coolant temperature The coolant temperature has exceeded 왘 Stop as soon as possible in a safe lo-
warning lamp comes on while 248°F (120°C). cation and allow the engine and cool-
driving and you hear a warning ant to cool down.
sound.
Warning! G Steam from an overheated engine can cause

serious burns which can occur just by open-
Driving when your engine is overheated can ing the engine hood. Stay away from the en-
cause some fluids which may have leaked gine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
into the engine compartment to catch fire. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
You could be seriously burned. and do not stand near the vehicle until the
386
Practical hints
What to do if …

l Only vehicles with Distronic*: You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
The red distance warning lamp to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
comes on while driving.
Only vehicles with Distronic*: 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
The red distance warning lamp ahead of you.
comes on while driving and you 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
앫 The distance warning system has recog-
hear a warning chime sound. You may need to brake or maneuver
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob-
able line of travel. to avoid hitting an obstacle.
A The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp comes on while mark. (컄 page 321).
driving.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …

< The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before Regardless of whether the seat belts
after starting the engine. driving off. are fastened or not, the seat belt tell-
tale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the
engine.
You hear a warning chime for a You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt. 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
maximum of 6 seconds after
The warning chime stops sounding.
starting the engine.
The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on while the vehicle is standing gotten to fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
still and the engine is running or
during driving.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the senger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
388
Practical hints
What to do if …

< During driving the red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
telltale flashes and you addi- (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas- The seat belt telltale goes out and the
tionally hear an intermittent senger have forgotten to fasten your seat warning chime stops sounding.
warning chime with increasing belts.
intensity.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the senger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat

belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver
and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or
the vehicle is standing still and a front door is
opened.
389
Practical hints
What to do if …

1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
comes on while driving. tems. The air bags or Emergency Tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or ter.
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
390
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Low tire pressure telltale for the The Advanced TPMS* detects a loss of 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Advanced TPMS* illuminates pressure in at least one tire. avoiding abrupt steering and braking
continuously. maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
왘 Read and observe messages in the mul-
tifunction display.
If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-
tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
low tire pressure telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
391
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if under-inflation has not
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
ly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure.
392
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

(USA only) The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
75 possible by an authorized
The indicator lamp illuminates and remains
illuminated with the weight of a typical adult 왘 Read and observe messages in the
or someone larger than a small individual on multifunction display and follow cor-
the front passenger seat. rective steps (컄 page 403).
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
393
Practical hints
What to do if …

(USA only) The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
75 ion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
The indicator lamp does not illuminate
and/or does not remain illuminated 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
with the weight of a typical weight onto the seat are present.
12-month-old child in a standard child
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
restraint or less on the front passenger
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
seat.
cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘 If the light remains out, have the system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘 Read and observe messages in the multifunction
display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 403).
Warning! G weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a

standard child restraint or less on the front
do not transport a child on the front passen-
If the 75 indicator lamp does passenger seat,
not illuminate or remains out with the
394
Practical hints
What to do if …

TM
(Canada only) The indicator lamp illu- A BabySmart child seat is installed on
75 minates and remains the passenger seat. Therefore the front
illuminated passenger front air bag is switched off.
(컄 page 81). The system is malfunctioning when there 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
the passenger seat. possible.
The indicator lamp The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between
does not illuminate or seat cushion and child seat.
does not remain illumi-
왘 Check installation of the child seat
nated with a
(컄 page 92).
BabySmartTM child seat
properly installed on If the front passenger front air bag off indi-
the passenger seat. cator lamp remains out:
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
395
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multi- Certain messages of high priority cannot
function display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G
using the reset button (컄 page 148) or
Warning and malfunction messages ap- button j, k, ÿ or è on the All categories of messages contain impor-
pear in the multifunction display located in multifunction steering wheel. tant information which should be taken note
the instrument cluster. of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
Other messages of high priority and mes- dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
Certain warning and malfunction messag- sages of less immediate priority can be rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
es are accompanied by an audible signal. cleared from the multifunction display us-
ing the reset button (컄 page 148) or Failure to repair condition noted may cause
Address these messages accordingly and damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
follow the additional instructions given in button j, k, ÿ or è on the
multifunction steering wheel. They are Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
this Operator’s Manual. age or personal injury.
then stored in the vehicle status message
Selecting the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 164). Remember that
memory menu in the control system clearing a message will only make the mes-
(컄 page 151) displays both cleared and sage disappear. Clearing a message will
uncleared messages. not correct the condition that caused the
High-priority messages appear in the mul- message to appear.
tifunction display in red color.
396
Practical hints
What to do if …
On the pages that follow, you will find a

Warning! G compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may ap-
No messages will be displayed if either the pear in the multifunction display.
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative. For your convenience the messages are di-
vided into two sections:
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such 앫 Text messages (컄 page 398)
as speed or outside temperature, warning/ 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 411)
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes-
sages or the failure of any systems. Driving
characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
i Switching on the ignition causes all instru-

ment cluster lamps (except low beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator
lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless ac-
tivated) as well as the multifunction display to
come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction
display are in working order before starting your
journey.
397
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS ABS, ESP ®
ABS, ESP as well as PRE-SAFE ®
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
inoperative have switched off due to a malfunc- Wheels will lock during hard braking, reduc-
See Operator’s Man. tion. ing steering capability.
BAS is also switched off. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The brake system is still functioning Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
normally but without the ABS, BAS, Failure to follow these instructions increases
ESP® and PRE-SAFE® available. the risk of an accident.
ABS, ESP ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® When the voltage is above this value again, the
unavailable were deactivated because of insuffi- ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are operational
See Operator’s Man. cient power supply. The charging again and the message should disappear.
voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
If the message does not disappear:
The brake system still functions nor-
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
mally but without the ABS, BAS,
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ESP® and PRE-SAFE® available.
398
Practical hints
What to do if …

Cruise control --- mph You have tried to switch on cruise 왘 Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
(USA only) control below a speed of 20 mph save the speed.
--- km/h (30 km/h).
(Canada only)
DISTRONIC --- mph You have tried to switch on Distronic 왘 Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
(USA only) below a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). save the speed.
--- km/h
(Canada only)
inoperative The Distronic* is malfunctioning or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
the display is malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
399
Practical hints
What to do if …

DISTRONIC currently unavailable Distronic* is switched off and is 왘 If necessary, clean the Distronic* cover in the area
See Operator’s Manual temporarily unavailable. of the radiator grille (컄 page 373).
Distronic* is deactivated if: 왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫 the Distronic* cover in the radi- or
ator grille is dirty
Distronic* becomes operational again without the en-
앫 its function is impaired by gine being restarted when:
heavy precipitation or fog
앫 dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving
(e.g. slush or snow)
앫 the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
앫 the message in the multifunction display disappears
앫 the speed last stored flashes in the display for
5 seconds.
You can operate Distronic* as usual again.
400
Practical hints
What to do if …

DISTRONIC currently unavailable Distronic* is deactivated because the 왘 Leave the area of the external interference.
See Operator’s Manual functionality is impaired by external in-
왘 Activate Distronic* again (컄 page 257) when
terferences, e.g. high-frequency sources
the message DISTRONIC available again ap-
such as too stations, speed measuring
pears.
systems etc.
Distronic* is deactivated because the 왘 Activate Distronic* again (컄 page 257) when
Distronic* sensor has not sensed any the message DISTRONIC available again ap-
other vehicles or objects, e.g. roadsign or pears.
such, for a long time.
Warning! G diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog.

The distance control may be impaired even
DISTRONIC
currently unavailable
Distronic cannot take weather conditions before the system is able to detect a dirty See Operator’s Manual
into account. Switch off Distronic* or do not sensor. The message will be displayed in the multifunction display
turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is and Distronic* will be turned off.
401
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP inoperative ®
The ESP as well as BAS and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Man. PRE-SAFE® have detected a mal-
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
function and switched off. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ABS may not be operational. Failure to follow these instructions increases
The brake system is still functioning the risk of an accident.
normally but without the ABS, BAS,
ESP® and PRE-SAFE® available.
402
Practical hints
What to do if …

(USA only) Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
Front passenger activated while driving even front passenger seat for the following:
airbag enabled though a child, small individual, or
왘 Apply the parking brake.
See Operator’s Manual object below the system’s weight
threshold is on the front passen- 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
ger seat, or the front passenger 왘 Open the front passenger door.
seat is empty. Objects on the seat
or forces acting on the seat may 왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and
make the system sense supple- properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint
mental weight. if necessary.
왘 Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger
seat and make sure the storage pocket on the back of the front pas-
senger seat is empty.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind
or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and
sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater
weight than actually present.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn
on the ignition (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
403
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/conse- Possible solution

quence
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 29) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 75 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 80) has deactivated the
front passenger front air bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. De-
pending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 80), the
75 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G remains out even after performing the above

corrective steps, do not have any children
other small individuals use the front passen-
If the 75 indicator lamp 12 years old and under and
404
Practical hints
What to do if …

(USA only) Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
Front passenger deactivated while driving even passenger seat for the following:
airbag disabled though an adult or someone
왘 Apply the parking brake.
See Operator’s Manual larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
seat. Forces acting on the seat 왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
may make the system sense a
왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 43).
decrease in weight.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, be-
hind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense
that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the
front passenger seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn on
the ignition (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
405
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/conse- Possible solution

quence
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 29) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 75 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 80) has deactivated the
front passenger front air bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. De-
pending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 80), the
75 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G remains illuminated with an adult occupant

on the front passenger seat even after per-
do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
If the 75 indicator lamp forming the above corrective steps, repaired.
406
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

P Gear selector lever You have tried to start the engine with the 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
in Park position KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with the position P.
gear selector lever not in position P.
You have tried to turn off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with the
gear selector lever not in position P.
P/N Shift gear select. lever You have tried to start the engine with the 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P
to Neutral or Park KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button while the or N. Make sure the brake pedal is de-
gear selector lever was in position R or D. pressed.
PRE-SAFE inoperative PRE-SAFE® itself has failed. All other occu- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
See Operator’s Man. pant safety systems, such as the air bags, are ter as soon as possible.
still available.
If ESP® and PRE-SAFE® malfunction messag-
es are displayed simultaneously, PRE-SAFE®
has been deactivated as a result of these
malfunctions. All other occupant safety sys-
tems, such as the air bags, are still available.
407
Practical hints
What to do if …

Check tires There was a warning message about a loss 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set
Then restart in the tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator Indicator has not been reactivated yet.
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator.
Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized
inoperative Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Run Flat Indicator has been switched off
due to an error.
Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Check tires pressure is too low in one or more tires. steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic sit-
uation around you.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 342).
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 452).
왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure values (컄 page 344).
408
Practical hints
What to do if …

Tire pressure is Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
only displayed The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
after driving for
a few minutes
Tire pressure The Advanced TPMS* (Canada only) is 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized
monitor malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center.
inoperative
Tire pressure There are wheels without appropriate wheel 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized
monitor sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires). Mercedes-Benz Center.
inoperative
왘 Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed by an
No wheel sensors
Tire pres. monitor One or more sensors malfunction (e.g. bat- 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized
No wheel sensors tery in one or more wheel sensor is empty). Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without appropriate 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire). Mercedes-Benz Center.
The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in the
409
Practical hints
What to do if …

Tire pressure The Advanced TPMS* is unable to monitor As soon as the causes for the malfunction are no longer
monitor the tire pressure due to present, the Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes ac-
currently unavailable tive again after a few minutes driving.
앫 a nearby radio interference source.
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
410
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately in a safe location or
Possible causes: as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the poly-V-belt.
앫 alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫 broken poly-V-belt
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
Do not forget that the brake system re-
the engine will overheat due to an in-
quires electrical energy and may be oper-
operative water pump which may re-
ating with restricted capability.
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is in-
creased. If it is intact:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Ad-
just driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
There is a malfunction in the electronic 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
system. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
411
Practical hints
What to do if …

# Battery/Alternator The battery is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
Stop vehicle
The brake system requires electrical en- soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust driv-
ergy and therefore has only limited oper- ing to be consistent with reduced
ation. Considerably greater brake pedal braking responsiveness.
force is required and the stopping dis- 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tance is increased. Center.
Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 52).
Start engine
( Right rear backrest The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
not locked fully engaged in position.
Left rear backrest The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
not locked fully engaged in position.
2 Brakepad wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
limit. as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually in-

spected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
412
Practical hints
What to do if …

(USA only) EBV, ABS, ESP ®
ABS, ESP , EBP as well as PRE-SAFE ®
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
; inoperative have switched off due to a malfunction.
왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with
(Canada only) See Operator’s Man.
BAS is also switched off. reduced braking responsiveness.
3
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
mally but without the ABS, BAS, ESP® and Center as soon as possible.
PRE-SAFE® available.
Release parking You are driving with the parking brake 왘 Release the parking brake
brake set. (컄 page 55).
Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
brake fluid level reservoir. safe location as soon as it is safe to do
so and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
Driving with the message Check brake ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot pad thickness and leaks.
fluid level displayed can result in an ac- engine parts and the brake fluid catching
cident. Have your brake system checked im- fire. You can be seriously burned.
mediately.
413
Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) Visit workshop There may be a malfunction in the: 왘 Have the measuring system
checked by an authorized
± (Canada only) 앫 fuel injection system
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
H Top up coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 330).
See Operator’s Manual
왘 If you have to add coolant frequent-
ly, have the cooling system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level

Warning! G warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which Limited Warranty.
may burn if it comes into contact with hot Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
engine parts. You could be seriously burned. in the cooling system. The engine will overheat
causing major engine damage.
414
Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
Stop, turn engine off soon as it is safe to do so and immediate-
ly turn off the engine.
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could other-
wise damage the engine.
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 62).
왘 Observe the coolant temperature indica-
tor in the instrument cluster (컄 page 27).
If the temperature rises again:
왘 Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and

Warning! G opening the engine hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Driving when your engine is overheated can from it.
cause some fluids which may have leaked Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from ! The engine should not be operated with the
into the engine compartment to catch fire. other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Do-
ing so may cause serious damage which is not
You could be seriously burned. the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
Steam from an overheated engine can cause until the engine has cooled down. Warranty.
serious burns which can occur just by
415
Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and im-
Stop, turn engine off mediately turn off the engine.
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en-
gine will overheat due to an inoperative wa-
ter pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with
this message displayed. Doing so could re-
sult in serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
왘 Observe the coolant temperature indicator
in the instrument cluster (컄 page 27).
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
416
Practical hints
What to do if …

• The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature indicator
tioning. in the instrument cluster (컄 page 27).
If the coolant temperature is under 248°F
(120°C), you may continue driving to an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine
(e.g. by driving uphill) as well as
stop-and-go traffic.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
± Display malfunction Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an
Visit workshop relay information to the control system. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following systems may have failed:
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
Engine There may be a malfunction in: 왘 Have the engine checked as soon as possi-
Service ble by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 the fuel injection system
ter.
앫 the ignition system
앫 the exhaust system
417
Practical hints
What to do if …

: Check oil level The engine oil has dropped to a critical 왘 Check the engine oil level
at next refueling level. (컄 page 328) and add oil as required
(컄 page 329).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
When the message Check oil level at For information on approved engine oils,
next refueling appears while the engine refer to the Factory Approved Service
is running and at operating temperature, Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
the engine oil level has dropped to approx- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
imately the minimum level.
! The engine oil level warnings should not be
When this occurs, the warning will first ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-
come on intermittently and then stay on if played could result in serious engine damage
the oil level drops further. that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser-
vice station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an ap-
proved engine oil.
418
Practical hints
What to do if …

A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
serve mark. (컄 page 321).
Gas cap is open A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 321).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky. 왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an au-
» Replace air cleaner The air cleaner is clogged. 왘 Have the air cleaner checked by an au-
[ Clean fuel filter Diesel engine: 왘 Have the water drained by an autho-
There is water in the fuel filter. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
419
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey with
still in vehicle vehicle was recognized while locking the KEYLESS-GO* out of the vehicle.
vehicle from the outside.
Please don't This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with
forget your key 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey the vehicle.
in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
Remove key You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the
SmartKey. starter switch.
Get a new key The SmartKey is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized
420
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Change The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 441).
key batteries ies are discharged.
Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
not recognized recognized while the engine is running to do so.
because
왘 Search for the SmartKey with
앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is KEYLESS-GO*.
not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be cen-
앫 there is strong radio-frequency inter- trally locked nor can the engine be
ference started again after the engine is
stopped.
Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
not recognized mentarily not recognized. in the vehicle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if nec-
essary.
421
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Active headlamps The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp system is 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
inoperative malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Active headlamps The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps are mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on functioning. Another light is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left side
Reverse lamp The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right side
Brake-/tail lamp, left The left brake/tail lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on ing. Center as soon as possible.
This message will only appear if a critical
number of LEDs have stopped working.
Brake-/tail lamp, right The right brake/tail lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on ing. Center as soon as possible.
3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tioning. Center as soon as possible.
422
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Front foglamp The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
left side Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp The right front fog lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
right side ing. Center as soon as possible.
Front left The front left side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
marker lamp functioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front right The front right side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
marker lamp functioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front left park. lamp The left front parking lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Front right park. lamp The right front parking lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
High beam The left high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left side ing.
High beam The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right side ing.
License plate lamp The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left side ing.
License plate lamp The right license plate lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right side tioning.
423
Practical hints
What to do if …

. AUTO-Light The light sensor is malfunctioning. The 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation
inoperative headlamps switch on automatically. to manual mode (컄 page 138).
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
Low beam The left low beam lamp is malfunction- Halogen headlamp:
left side ing.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Low beam The right low beam lamp is malfunc- Halogen headlamp:
right side tioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
424
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Rear left foglamp The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rear right foglamp The right rear fog lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing. Center as soon as possible.
Switch off lights You have removed the SmartKey from 왘 Switch off the headlamps.
the starter switch, opened the driver’s
door and left the headlamps on or re-
moved the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle and left
the headlamps on.
Tail lamp, left side The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on substitute bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Tail lamp, right side The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Auxiliary bulb on substitute bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Cornering lamp The left corner-illuminating front fog 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
left lamp* is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Cornering lamp The right corner-illuminating front fog 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
right lamp* is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
425
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Rear left turn signal The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rear right turn signal The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Front left turn signal The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Front right turn signal The right front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
functioning.
Left mirror The turn signal in the left exterior rear 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
turn signal view mirror is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Right mirror The turn signal in the right exterior rear 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
turn signal view mirror is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Switch off lights The exterior lamp switch is set to U 왘 Switch off the headlamps.
or and you have forgotten to take out the
or
remove key SmartKey. The parking lamps remain
switched on. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
426
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Please correct The pressure is too low in one or 왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
tire pressure more tires. required (컄 page 342).
Tire pressure One or more tires are deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution, tire defect abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire pressure One or more tires are deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Check tires abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
The respective tire is indicated in
the multifunction display. 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 452).
Warning! G
427
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure The tire pressure in one or more 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Check tires tires is already below the mini- abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
mum value.
왘 Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
Check tires The tire pressure in one or more 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
tires is already below the mini- abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
mum value.
왘 Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
The respective tire is indicated in
Warning! G
428
Practical hints
What to do if …

L Tele Aid One or more main functions of the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
inoperative Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tele Aid The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
battery Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will
not be operational.
1 Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
malfunction est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Visit workshop ter.
Warning! G otherwise the SRS may not be activated

when needed in an accident, which could re-
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
operational. could also result in injury.
For your safety, we strongly recommend

that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked;
429
Practical hints
What to do if …

t Function This display appears if button t or
unavailable s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
W Top up The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 332).
washer fluid total reservoir capacity.
Ê The trunk is open. 왘 Close the trunk.
Y You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as it is safe to do so.
왘 Close the hood (컄 page 327).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
V You are driving with one or more doors 왘 Close the doors.
open.
The display symbol shows you which
doors are open.
@ Vehicle rising Your vehicle is adjusting to your level se-
lection.
430
Practical hints
What to do if …

@ Vehicle rising The vehicle level is too low. 왘 Do not drive off.
Please wait
The Airmatic has not yet adjusted the vehicle level to
the necessary height required for driving.
왘 Wait until the message disappears from the multifunc-
tion display.
You may then drive off.
Stop, car too low The Airmatic is malfunctioning. Avoid excessive steering input. The fender or tires could
otherwise be damaged. Listen for scraping noises.
왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Drive to the side of the road and select a higher vehicle
level (컄 page 266).
Depending on the type of malfunction, this may raise
the vehicle’s level.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Malfunction The system is functional only to a 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
limited extent.
왘 Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
The system display or the system Mercedes-Benz Center.
is malfunctioning.
431
Practical hints
First aid kit Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel

왘 Turn luggage bowl 3 counterclock-
The first aid kit is in the storage compart- The spare wheel is located under the trunk
wise.
ment at the front edge of the front passen- floor.
ger seat. 왘 Remove spare wheel 2.
왘 Lift the trunk floor and engage the han-
dle in the upper edge of trunk.
Storing the spare wheel
왘 Remove the luggage box (컄 page 433).
왘 Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.
왘 Turn luggage bowl 3 clockwise to its
stop to secure the spare wheel.
! Always lower trunk floor before closing
trunk.
1 Tab
Warning! G
왘 Pull tab 1 upward. The dimension of the Minispare wheel is dif-
왘 Fold the covering forward. 1 Vehicle tool kit ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
Wheel bolt wrench and jack result, the vehicle handling characteristics
왘 Remove the first aid kit. change when driving with a spare wheel
2 Spare wheel
mounted.
i Check expiration dates and contents for 3 Luggage bowl
completeness at least once a year and replace The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
missing/expired items. i Vehicles with collapsible tire rarily, and replaced with a regular road
(E 63 AMG only): wheel as quickly as possible.
The electric air pump is located in the storage
wheel casing.
432
Practical hints
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily Luggage box Install luggage box
use the spare wheel when observing the
following restrictions:
Remove luggage box
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate.
앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
왘 Insert luggage box into trunk so that
For more information, see “Spare wheel” fastening clips are in line with fastening
(컄 page 487). bolts.
1 Fastening clip
2 Luggage box 왘 Push front edge of luggage box in direc-
tion of arrow under cover of trunk sill.
왘 Turn fastening clips 1 to the left up-
wards from fastening bolts. 왘 Press fastening clips onto fastening
bolts until they lock into place.
왘 Lift luggage box in the area of the fas-
tening bolts and remove it from trunk.
433
Practical hints
Vehicle tool kit Vehicle jack
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com-

partment underneath the trunk floor Warning! G
(컄 page 432).
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
The vehicle tool kit includes:
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
앫 One pair of universal pliers built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
앫 One towing eye bolt avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
앫 One wheel wrench get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
앫 One alignment bolt by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
앫 One fuse extractor
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
앫 Spare fuses before raising vehicle with jack.
앫 Collapsible wheel chock 1 Tilt the plates upward Do not disengage parking brake while the
2 Fold the lower plate outward vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
앫 A pair of gloves 3 Insert the plate always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
왘 Tilt both plates upward 1. especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
The collapsible wheel chock serves to fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while 왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
changing the wheel. way into the openings of the base capacity jackstands before working under
plate 3. the vehicle.
434
Practical hints
The vehicle jack is located in the storage

compartment underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 432).
Operational position
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its
Storage position
compartment:
왘 Remove vehicle jack from its
앫 It should be fully collapsed.
compartment.
왘 Turn crank handle in direction of arrow 앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
as far as it will go. position).
435
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle 왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar- 왘 Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock-
row. wise to position 1 until the locking
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the knobs move up.
왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
housing. The driver’s door is unlocked.
KEYLESS-GO*, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key. 왘 Pull door handle to open the driver’s
Unlocking the driver’s door
door.
i Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical
key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, Insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch.
Removing the mechanical key
1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the

driver’s door lock until it stops.
1 Mechanical key locking tab

2 Mechanical key
436
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk 왘 Pull the handle 3 and lift the trunk lid. Locking the vehicle
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft The trunk opens.
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
! Always make sure there is sufficient over- the SmartKey or SmartKey with
head clearance. KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 back and 왘 Close the passenger door, the rear
remove it from the trunk lid lock. doors and the trunk.
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 127).
왘 Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the doors have moved down.
왘 If necessary, push them down
1 Mechanical key manually.
2 Unlocking in an emergency 왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 436).
3 Handle
왘 Check whether the trunk is locked. 컄컄
왘 Insert the mechanical key 1 into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 counter-
clockwise to position 2 and hold it in
this position.
437
Practical hints
컄컄 왘 If necessary, lock the trunk with the Manually unlocking the gear selector 왘 Open the storage compartment in the
mechanical key (컄 page 126). lever center armrest (컄 page 285).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle 왘 Take out the cup holder (컄 page 285).
In case of power failure, the gear selector
should now be locked.
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow 왘 Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
the vehicle. through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘 Remove pin 1.
i The gear selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
1 Locking
2 Mechanical key 1 Pin
왘 Insert the mechanical key 2 into the

driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 clockwise
to position 1.
The driver’s door is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
438
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama 왘 Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
앫 slide roof panel/sunroof open
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sun- 앫 lower roof panel/sunroof at the
roof or tilt/sliding panel manually should rear
an electrical malfunction occur.
i Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel The tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel must
drive is located behind cover 1 of the in- be synchronized after being operated manually
terior overhead light. (컄 page 244) or (컄 page 248).
2 Hole
3 Crank
왘 Take crank 3 out of the glove box.
왘 Insert crank 3 through hole 2.
왘 Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
앫 slide roof panel/sunroof closed
앫 raise roof panel/sunroof at the rear
1 Cover
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘 Press on cover 1 in direction of the ar-
row to release it.
439
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have been trig- 왘 Guide reset tool into center of head re-
gered in an accident, the active head re- Warning! G straint between head restraint cushion
straints must be reset. Otherwise, the and rear head restraint cover.
active head restraints cannot offer any ad- When pushing back the head restraint cush-
ditional protection in the event of another ion, take care that your fingers do not be- ! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
rear-end collision. come caught between the head restraint 왘 Press reset tool forward in direction of
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may arrow.
You can tell that the head restraints have lead to injury.
been triggered when they have been 왘 Press reset tool downward until you
moved forward and cannot be adjusted. hear the head restraint release
mechanism audibly engage.
i For your convenience, we recommend that
you have this work carried out by an authorized 왘 Pull out reset tool.
왘 Firmly press head restraint cushion
You will find the reset tool for manually operating backward towards the rear of the vehi-
the head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle
cle until it engages.
literature pouch.
왘 Repeat this procedure on the active
Warning! G head restraints for second head re-
straint.
For safety reasons, have the active head re- 왘 Take the reset tool out of the For information on active head restraints,
straints checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 87).
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end colli- pouch. For information on head restraint adjust-
sion.
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
440
Practical hints
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey/SmartKey Batteries contain materials that can harm SmartKey/SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the ve- the environment if disposed of improperly. KEYLESS-GO*
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
It is recommended to have the batteries re- method of disposal. Many states require Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz sellers of batteries to accept old batteries CR 2025 or equivalent.
Center. for recycling. 왘 Remove the mechanical key 1 out of
i When inserting the batteries, make sure the SmartKey/SmartKey with
Warning! G they are clean and free of lint. KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 436).
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children. The required replacement batteries are available
at any Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘 Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘 Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
The battery compartment is unlatched.컄컄
441
Practical hints
컄컄 왘 Pull battery compartment 2 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-

(컄 page 441) out of the housing. teries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘 Return battery compartment 2
(컄 page 441) into housing until it locks
into place.
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 (컄 page 441)
back into the SmartKey/SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*.
왘 Check the operation of the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
3 Batteries KEYLESS-GO*.
4 Contact springs
왘 Pull out batteries 3.
442
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid- when lamps malfunction. Read and observe mes-
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights sages in the multifunction display (컄 page 422).
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- on should clear up the fogging.
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for head-
lamp adjustment.
443
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Lamp Type

Lamp Type 5 Halogen headlamp:
High beam/high beam
1 Additional turn signal LED
flasher H7 (55 W)
lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
2 Turn signal lamp 3547 A
High beam flasher H7 (55 W)
(28.5 W)
Halogen headlamp:
3 Halogen headlamp:
Parking and standing W5W
Low beam H7 (55 W)
lamp Blue Vision
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Low and high beam1 D1S-35 W
Parking an standing
4 Side marker lamp W5W lamp LED
1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam 6 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W)
and high beam use the same D1S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact Corner-illuminating
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. front fog lamp* H11 (55 W)
444
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement

Warning! G 앫 Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
Lamp Type
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- and with the specified watt rating.
7 High mounted brake LED
low the lamp to cool down before changing 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
lamp
a bulb. to prevent short circuits.
8 Brake, tail, parking, HiP
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
standing, backup lamp LED*
and turn signal lamp. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs.
Rear fog lamp (driver’s A bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil
side only) 앫 touch or move it when hot and grease.
9 License plate lamps C5W 앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not light
앫 scratch the bulb up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps,
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recom-
mend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
445
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following Replacing bulbs for front lamps
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫 Additional turn signals in the exterior
rear view mirrors
앫 High mounted brake lamp
앫 Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫 Front fog lamps
앫 Rear lamps (except license plate 2 Bulb socket for high beam head-
lamps) lamp/high beam flasher bulb
1 Housing cover for low beam halogen or 3 Bulb socket for parking and standing
앫 Front side marker lamps Bi-Xenon* headlamp lamp bulb
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could 4 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi- Warning! G bulb (halogen headlamps only)
cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an autho- 5 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high volt-
front lamp, do the following first:
age in Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to
replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
components. We recommend that you have position M (컄 page 137).
such work done by a qualified technician. 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 325).
446
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam bulb (halogen headlamps High beam bulb/high beam flasher Front turn signal lamp bulb
only) bulb (halogen headlamps)/high beam
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 with the bulb
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
왘 Turn housing cover 1 counterclock- counterclockwise and remove it.
wise and remove it. 왘 Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb counterclockwise out of bulb
counterclockwise and remove it. 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 2. socket 5.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 4. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb 왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 2. socket 5 and turn clockwise until it
왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb
engages.
socket 4. 왘 Place bulb socket 2 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise until it en- 왘 Place bulb socket 5 back into the
왘 Place bulb socket 4 back into the
gages. lamp and turn it clockwise until it en-
lamp and turn it clockwise until it en-
gages.
gages.
왘 Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
447
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb Additional turn signal lamp bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
The additional turn signal lamps in the
Halogen headlamps
exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs. Tail lamp unit
왘 Turn bulb socket 3 (컄 page 446) with If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func- The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
the bulb counterclockwise and remove tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
it.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3
placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
(컄 page 446).
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be re-
Front side marker lamp bulbs
왘 Press the new bulb gently into bulb placed individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
socket 3 (컄 page 446). Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs under pressure and could explode during an
is a technically highly demanding process, attempt to replace them.
왘 Place bulb socket 3 (컄 page 446)
we recommend you have the side marker If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
back into the lamp and turn clockwise
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized them exchanged at an authorized
until it engages.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bi-Xenon* headlamps
In vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps, the
bulbs of the parking and standing lamps
are LEDs.
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an autho-
448
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
1 Screw
position M (컄 page 137).
왘 Loosen both screws 1.
왘 Remove the license plate lamp.
왘 Replace the bulb.
왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp.
왘 Retighten screws 1.
449
Practical hints
! To avoid damage to the hood: Placing wiper arms in vertical position

Warning! G 앫 The wiper arms should only be folded for-
ward when in the vertical position.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
앫 Never open the hood when the wiper arm is
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
folded forward.
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. arm back. If released, the force of the impact
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly from the tensioning spring could crack the wind-
turn on and cause injury. shield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Warning! G Make sure the wiper blades are properly in- Wiper blades in vertical position
stalled. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause windshield damage. Vehicles with SmartKey
Wiper blades are components that are sub-
ject to wear and tear. Change the wiper For your convenience, we recommend that you 왘 Turn SmartKey to starter switch
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring have this work carried out by an authorized position 1 (컄 page 37).
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be setting u (컄 page 58).
able to observe surrounding traffic condi-
tions and could cause an accident. 왘 With wiper arms in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
450
Practical hints
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* Removing wiper blades Installing wiper blades

왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 64).
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They 왘 Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm
With the driver’s door closed, the start- could tear. until it locks in place.
er switch is now in position 1.
왘 Fold the wiper arm forward until it 왘 Rotate the wiper blade into position
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper snaps into place. parallel to the wiper arm.
setting U (컄 page 58).
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
왘 With wiper arms in the vertical position, the windshield. Make sure you hold on
open the driver’s door. to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
The starter switch is set to position 0, back.
same as SmartKey removed from start-
er switch.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
setting 0 (컄 page 58).
왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to

wiper arm.
왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.
451
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Vehicles with SmartKey with Mounting the spare wheel
KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
왘
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the
Warning! G
when possible.
gear selector lever once (컄 page 64).
The dimensions of the spare wheel
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the ig- (Minispare or collapsible tire) are different
(컄 page 144).
nition in position 0, same as with the from those of the road wheels. As a result,
왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the SmartKey removed from the starter the vehicle handling characteristics change
front wheels are in a straight ahead po- switch). The driver’s door then can be when driving with a spare wheel mounted.
sition. closed again. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 62). i Open door only when conditions are safe to The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
do so. When driving with spare wheel mounted,
왘 Move the gear selector lever to P.
ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex-
Vehicles with SmartKey: 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
a safe distance from the roadway.
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 63). Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
switch. replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
Minispare or collapsible tire is mounted.
452
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Lifting the vehicle

Prepare the vehicle as described 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Warning! G
(컄 page 452). by blocking wheels with wheel chocks The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
or other sizeable objects. up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
Vehicles with Minispare wheel
(except E 63 AMG): One wheel chock is included with the built into either side of the vehicle. To help
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 434). avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
왘 Take the Minispare wheel, wheel
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
wrench and the jack out of the trunk When changing wheel on a level surface:
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
(컄 page 432).
왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
Vehicles with collapsible tire another sizeable object behind the the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
(E 63 AMG only): wheel that is diagonally opposite to the firmly set parking brake and block wheels
wheel being changed. before raising vehicle with jack.
왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench,
jack and electric air pump out of the Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack Do not disengage parking brake while the
trunk (컄 page 432). on a level surface. However, should vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
circumstances require you to do so on a always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
hill, place the wheel chock and the other pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
sizeable object as follows: on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
왘 Place the wheel chock and another
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
sizeable object on the downhill side
pacity jackstands before working under the
blocking both wheels of the axle not
vehicle. 컄컄
being worked on.
453
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 The jack take-up brackets are located di-

rectly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do 왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap- maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
proximately one full turn with wrench). ground. Never start engine while
1 Jack take-up bracket vehicle is raised.
2 Jack
왘 Place jack 2 on firm ground. Warning! G
왘 Position jack 2 under take-up
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
brackets designed for this purpose.
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
If the jack is not properly positioned, the ve-
even if the vehicle is parked on an
hicle may slip off of the jack.
incline.
454
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel

Warning! G 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
The jack is intended only for lifting the wheel hub.
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
suited for performing maintenance work against hub and hold it there while installing first
under the vehicle. wheel bolt.
앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised. Warning! G
앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
1 Alignment bolt aged or rusted.
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re- Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
move. Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit. under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
왘 Remove the remaining bolts. Roadside Assistance.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
threads.
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
왘 Remove the wheel. sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the align-

ment bolt and push it on. 컄컄
455
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them Vehicles with collapsible tire Inflating the collapsible tire
slightly. (E 63 AMG only): (E 63 AMG only)
왘 Continue the procedure by following
Warning! G the instructions under “Inflating the Warning! G
collapsible tire” (컄 page 456) and then
Only use Genuine equipment “Lowering the vehicle” (컄 page 458). Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel properly mounted.
Vehicles with Minispare wheel
bolts may come loose. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
(except E 63 AMG):
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve- air pump before lowering the vehicle.
왘 Continue the procedure by following
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
the instructions under “Lowering the
fall off the jack.
vehicle” (컄 page 458).
Warning! G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the

collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be dam-
aged.
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄 page 432).
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last

wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
456
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
cigarette lighter socket. to position 0.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch 왘 If the tire pressure is above 51 psi
to position 1. (3.5 bar), release excess tire pressure
using the vent screw.
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the collapsible Warning! G
tire.
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
왘 Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi
1 Flap Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
(3.5 bar).
2 On/off switch can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
3 Electrical plug This takes about 5 minutes for the col- cause they are more likely to become punc-
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent lapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
screw nut 5 can become hot during infla- etc.
5 Union nut tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
burning yourself when using the equip-
왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
ment. and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with pressure gauge 4. ! Do not operate the electric air pump longer from being overheated.
than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it
왘 Remove the valve cap from the may overheat. 왘 Detach the electric air pump. 컄컄
collapsible tire valve. You may operate the electric air pump again af-
왘 Screw union nut 5 onto the collaps- ter it has cooled off.
ible tire valve. 왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
457
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Store the electrical plug 3 and the air 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- i Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective
hose 4 behind the flap 1 and place lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- film that comes with the spare wheel and put the
the electric air pump back in the desig- ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. wheel in the trunk.
nated storage space underneath the Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft You can also place the damaged wheel down into
trunk floor (컄 page 432). (130 Nm). the spare wheel well. In this case, you must stow
the holder from the spare wheel well in the trunk.
Lowering the vehicle
Warning! G Vehicles with Advanced TPMS* (Canada only):
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun- tor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Have the tightening torque checked after sensor has been placed back into service on the
ly on its own weight. changing a wheel. The wheels could come vehicle.
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
왘 Remove the jack.
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Before storing the jack, it should be fully

collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
position).
왘 Store the jack and the other vehicle
tools in the designated storage space
underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 432).
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
458
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
왔 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is If the engine does not start: i Where the ú malfunction indicator lamp
empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
왘 Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
may be sucked into the fuel system. If this lamp (Canada only) in the instrument cluster has
happens, the ú malfunction indicator 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch been illuminated for the above condition, it will
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction to position 3 (컄 page 38) and hold it remain illuminated until the engine was cycled
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or on and off four times in a row.
indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on
and the engine may not start immediately until the engine runs surge-free.
after refueling the vehicle. If the engine still does not start, do not
After refueling: make any further attempts to start the en-
gine. Contact an authorized
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
to P. Assistance (컄 page 297).
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
to position 2 (컄 page 38) for at least
10 seconds.
왘 Return the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 (컄 page 38).
to position 3 (컄 page 38) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
until the engine runs surge-free.
459
Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located on the right hand ! Depending on vehicle production date, the
side of the trunk under the luggage box Warning! G battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)
(컄 page 433). battery, also referred to as “fleece” battery:
Failure to follow these instructions can re- Such batteries do not require topping-up of the
sult in severe injury or death. electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not
have cell caps and the battery cover is non-re-
Observe all safety instructions and precau- movable. Do not attempt to open the battery as
tions when handling automotive batteries otherwise the battery will be damaged.
(컄 page 331). Even though VRLA batteries do not require top-
Never lean over batteries while connecting, ping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
you might get injured. opened to check the electrolyte level, the bat-
tery condition must be checked periodically by
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not performing a battery conductance test. Refer to
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test-
Vehicles with spare wheel skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately ing intervals.
flush affected area with water and seek The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
1 Positive terminal medical help if necessary. leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
2 Negative terminal that has the same security features and is of
3 Battery bracket A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
identical size, voltage, and capacity as the
4 Battery ventilation hose which is flammable and explosive. Keep factory-equipped battery.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
460
Practical hints
Battery
! As with any other battery, disconnect the ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting the battery
battery if you do not intend to operate your vehi- clamps while the engine is running or the
cle for an extended period of time to prevent bat- SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the
tery discharge or connect an accessory battery alternator and other electronic components Warning! G
charge unit expressly approved by could be severely damaged.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to main- Have the battery checked regularly by an autho- With a disconnected battery
tain the battery charge. Contact an authorized rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance SmartKey in the starter switch and
The battery, the battery ventilation hose and the intervals or contact an authorized
lateral plug must always be securely installed pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. button on the gear selector lever will
when the vehicle is in operation.
have no effect
Warning! G 앫 the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
! Always disconnect the battery in the order
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the described below. Otherwise the vehicle’s
risk of acid burns in the event of an acci- electronics can be damaged.
dent. 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 62).
to position P.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 컄컄
461
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. Removing the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery
왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the
왘 Press the start/stop button until battery. Warning! G
the engine shuts off.
왘 Remove the battery bracket 3
Never charge a battery while still installed in
왘 Open the driver’s door. (컄 page 460).
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
왘 Open the trunk. 왘 Pull out the battery ventilation hose 4 charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is
왘 Read and observe safety instructions (컄 page 460) from the battery (de- being used. Gases may escape during charg-
and precautions (컄 page 331) and pending on battery arrangement in ing and cause explosions that may result in
(컄 page 460). your vehicle model, the ventilation paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
hose is located either on the left or
왘 Remove the luggage box (컄 page 433). An accessory battery charge unit* specially
right side of the battery).
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
왘 Disconnect the negative lead from neg- 왘 Take out the battery. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
ative terminal 2 (컄 page 460). available, permitting the charging of the bat-
왘 Remove cover 1 (컄 page 460) from tery in its installed position. Contact an au-
the positive terminal. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
왘 Disconnect the positive lead.
in accordance with the separate instruc-
tions for the accessory battery charger.
462
Practical hints
Battery
왘 Charge battery in accordance with the Reconnecting the battery

instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer. ! Always connect the battery in the order de-
scribed below. Otherwise the vehicle’s electron-
왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow ics can be damaged.
the previously described steps in re-
verse order. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘 Connect the battery positive lead and
! The battery and the battery ventilation hose
must always be securely installed when the vehi- fasten its cover.
cle is in operation. 왘 Connect the battery negative lead.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
왘 Install the luggage box (컄 page 433).
i The following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of battery power
(e.g. due to reconnection):
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 171) (see COMAND
operator’s manual).
앫 Synchronize the side windows
(컄 page 239).
앫 Synchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄 page 244) or the tilt/sliding panel*
(컄 page 248).
463
Practical hints
Jump starting
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. If the battery is discharged, the engine can
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat-
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at- tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
Failure to follow these directions will cause tempts.
ing:
damage to the electronic components, and Do not attempt to start the engine using a bat-
tery quick charge unit. 앫 Jump starting should only be performed
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic
If the engine does not run after several unsuc-
cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the converter1 are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not failed starting attempts may damage the
앫 Only jump start from batteries with the
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, catalytic converter1.
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start-
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
flush affected area with water, and seek ing with a higher voltage battery could
or missing insulation.
medical help if necessary. damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any which will not be covered by the
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, other metal part while the other end is still at-
tached to a battery.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal
smoking, etc. clamps.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
can result in it exploding, causing personal are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
injury. parts that move when the engine is
Read all instructions before proceeding. started or running.
1
Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
464
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Connect negative terminals 4 and 2

Warning! G of the batteries with the second jumper
cable. Clamp the cable to negative
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. terminal 4 of the charged battery
Do not smoke. first.
Observe all safety instructions and precau- 왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
tions when handling automotive batteries cle.
(컄 page 331).
You can now turn on the electrical con-
sumers. Do not switch on the headlamps
The battery is located in the trunk under- under any circumstances.
neath the luggage box (컄 page 433). Only 1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
jump start the vehicle from the battery in 2 Negative terminal of discharged bat- 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
the trunk. tery negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
3 Positive terminal of charged battery from positive terminals 1 and 3.
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not 4 Negative terminal of charged battery
touch. You can now switch on the headlamps.
왘 Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 62). Clamp cable to charged battery 3
first.
to position P. ! Never invert the terminal connections!
왘 Open the trunk. 왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
465
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- When circumstances do not permit the
cle be transported with all wheels off the recommended towing methods, the vehi- Warning! G
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel cle may be towed with all wheels on the
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref- ground or front wheels raised (except vehi- If circumstances require towing the vehicle
erable to other types of towing. cles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary with all wheels on the ground, always tow
to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca- with a tow bar if:
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. tion where the recommended towing 앫 the engine will not run
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment methods can be employed. 앫 there is a malfunction in the brake
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to system
position 0.
앫 there is a malfunction in the power sup-
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports. as that will be necessary to adequately con-
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie trol the towed vehicle.
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the automatic the ground, make certain the SmartKey is in
central locking. starter switch position 2.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch

Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could position 0 for an extended period of time, it
damage the transfer case, which is not covered can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re-
All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe move SmartKey from starter switch and re-
instructions for towing the vehicle with all insert.
wheels on the ground.
466
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! Towing of the vehicle should only be done i The gear selector lever will remain locked in
Warning! G using the properly installed towing eye bolt. position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the
Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to starter switch if the battery is disconnected or
With the engine not running, there is no the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. discharged. For more information see “Batter-
power assistance for the brake and steering ies” (컄 page 460) or “Jump starting”
systems. In this case, it is important to keep i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on (컄 page 464).
the ground, please note the following:
in mind that a considerably higher degree of For information on manual unlocking of the gear
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- With the automatic central locking activated and selector lever, see (컄 page 438).
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or
hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 2,
the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
raised (not permissible for vehicles with speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
4MATIC), the gear selector lever must be in more.
position N and the engine must be shut off To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). deactivate the automatic central locking
Active braking action through the ESP® may (컄 page 127).
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
i To signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in
ground, the gear selector lever must be in
starter switch to position 2 and activate the
position N and the SmartKey must be in starter
combination switch for the left or right turn sig-
switch position 2.
nal in the usual manner – only the selected turn
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the signal will operate.
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warn-
be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
ing flasher will operate again.
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
467
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt 왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tighten with lug wrench. tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
Front of vehicle To reinstall cover:
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
왘 Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
tighten with lug wrench.
Rear of vehicle To reinstall cover:
왘 Fit cover 2 and snap into place.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper

To remove cover:
왘 Press mark on cover 1 in direction of
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
arrow.
To remove cover:
왘 Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt. 왘 Pull cover 2 in direction of arrow.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the 왘 Fold cover 2 down to reveal the
tool kit (located in the storage compart- threaded hole for the towing eye bolt.
ment under the trunk floor).
468
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have The electrical fuses are located in different
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. the cause determined and rectified by an fuse boxes:
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys- 앫 in the passenger compartment on the
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat- The following aids are available to help you driver’s side (컄 page 470)
ing. replace fuses.
앫 in the trunk (컄 page 470)
앫 Fuse chart Before replacing fuses:
Warning! G The fuse chart is located in the fuse box
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 62).
in the passenger compartment
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
(컄 page 470). The fuse chart explains
with the specified amperage for the system to position P (컄 page 184).
the fuse allocation and fuse amperag-
in question and do not attempt to repair or
es. 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap-
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged 앫 Spare fuses 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 63).
fuses may cause an overload leading to a Spare fuses are located in the vehicle 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 434). switch.
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an 앫 Fuse extractor Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The fuse extractor is located in the ve- 왘 Open the driver’s door.
hicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 434).
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro-
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise
you on this subject.
469
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment Opening Fuse box in trunk

왘 Open the driver’s door.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in The fuse box is located behind the
the dashboard on the driver’s side. 왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in left-hand trim panel in the trunk.
recess 2 on the edge of cover 1.
Fuse box cover design may vary depending
왘 Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard on vehicle equipment.
using lever.
왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 in di-
rection of arrow and remove.
Closing
왘 Hook cover 1 into the opening at the
front.
1 Cover
왘 Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
2 Recess in the cover
es.
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw ! The cover 1 must be properly positioned
Cover with turn catches shown
driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dash- 1 Catches
as described to prevent moisture or dirt from en-
board, as this could damage it. 2 Cover
tering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
operation.
Opening cover (with turn catches)
왘 Turn catches 1 counter-clockwise.
and remove cover 2.
470
Practical hints
Fuses
Closing cover (with turn catches) Closing cover (without turn catches)
왘 Install cover 2 (컄 page 470). 왘 Install cover with tabs on one side of
trim panel, then press cover slightly to-
왘 Turn catches 1 (컄 page 470) clock-
gether to install cover on other side of
wise.
trim panel.
Opening cover (without turn catches)
왘 Hold cover at recess, press cover
slightly together to release tabs from
behind trim panel and then pull off cov-
er.
471
472
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
473
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s du-
rability or safety.
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
474
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information Booklet. Your Accessories Warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- Mercedes-Benz Center. Information Booklet, have your authorized
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts,
New York, and Vermont Emission Con-
trol System Warranty
475
Technical data
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 VIN
3 Paintwork code 2 VIN
can be found in the following locations:
3 Paintwork code
앫 on the certification label
i Data shown on certification label are for il-
앫 embossed under a cover in the front lustration purposes only. These data are specific
passenger footwell (컄 page 477) to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on ve-
앫 lower edge of windshield (컄 page 477) hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
476
Technical data
4 Cover
5 VIN
6 Emission control information label, in-

cludes both federal and California cer-
tification exhaust emission standards
7 Vacuum line routing diagram label
8 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
9 Engine number (engraved on engine)
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine number.
477
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
E 320 BLUETEC E 350/E 550 E 63 AMG
1 Coolant pump 1 Idler pulley 1 Idler pulley

2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Idler pulley
4 Power steering pump 4 Power steering pump 4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Power steering pump
6 Crankshaft 6 Crankshaft 6 Air conditioning compressor
7 Idler pulley 7 Coolant pump 7 Crankshaft
8 Generator (alternator) 8 Generator (alternator) 8 Coolant pump
9 Generator (alternator)
478
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model E 320 BLUETEC (211.0221) E 350 (211.0561)
E 350 4MATIC (211.0871)
Engine OM 642 272
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 182.9 cu in (2987 cm ) 213.5 cu in (3498 cm3)
Compression ratio 16.5:1 10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 208 hp/3600 rpm 268 hp/6000 rpm2
(155 kW/3600 rpm) (200 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 398 lb-ft/1600 rpm - 2400 rpm 258 lb-ft/2400 rpm - 5000 rpm
(540 Nm/1600 rpm - 2400 rpm) (350 Nm/2400 rpm - 5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2035 mm 2404 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
479
Technical data
Engine
Model E 550 (211.0721) E 63 AMG (211.0771)

E 550 4MATIC (211.0901)
Engine 273 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 333.3 cu in (5461 cm ) 378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 382 hp/6000 rpm2 507 hp/6800 rpm2
(285 kW/6000 rpm) (378 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 391 lb-ft/2800 rpm - 4800 rpm 468 lb-ft/5200 rpm
(530 Nm/2800 rpm - 4800 rpm) (635 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 7200 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2369 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
480
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by If such information is provided, it can be found
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, on the placard located on the inside of the fuel
Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed such as filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
to provide best possible performance in checked regularly and should only be adjusted
앫 poor handling characteristics
conjunction with the driving safety systems on on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s mainte-
your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially 앫 increased noise nance recommendation included with the vehi-
developed for your vehicle and tested and 앫 increased fuel consumption cle.
approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by
finding the following on the tire’s sidewall:
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by i The following pages also list the approved
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen- wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehi-
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation cles with winter tires. Winter tires are not avail-
tires characteristics that could cause them to come able as standard or optional factory-equipment,
AMG vehicles: into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. but can be purchased from an authorized
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the re- Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicles. For information on tested and sult. Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire config-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Further information on tires and rims is uration on your vehicle (Appearance Package,
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Using tires other than those approved by Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with
ter. A placard with the recommended tire infla-
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not winter tires approved for your vehicle model may
tion pressures is located on the driver’s door
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited also require the purchase of two or four wheel
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental
Warranty. rims of the recommended size for use with these
tire inflation pressure information for driving at
winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz
high speeds (컄 page 342) or for vehicle loads
Center for more information.
less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition.
481
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
16’’ tires
Model E 320 BLUETEC

Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16 H2
Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm)
All-season tires1 225/55 R16 95H M+S
1,2
Winter tires 225/55 R16 95H M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires
2
Not available as factory equipment.
482
Technical data
Rims and tires
17’’ tires
Model E 350
E 550
E 350 4MATIC
E 550 4MATIC
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 H2
1
All-season tires 245/45 R17 95H M+S
Winter tires1,2 245/45 R17 99V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires
2
483
Technical data
Rims and tires
18’’ tires
Model E 350 4MATIC (Sport Package*)

E 550 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18
1
All-season tires 245/40 R18 93V M+S
Winter tires1,2 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires
2
Model E 63 AMG E 350 4MATIC (AMG Sport Package*)

E 63 AMG (Performance Package*) E 550 4MATIC (AMG Sport Package*)
AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires1 - 245/40 R18 97Y XL (Extra Load)
1,2
Winter tires 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S. 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires
2
484
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Model E 350 (Sport Package*) E 350 (AMG Sport Package*)

E 550 (Sport Package*) E 550 (AMG Sport Package*)
E 63 AMG
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 -
AMG rims (light alloy) - 8.5 J x 18 H2
1
Summer tires - 245/40 ZR18
All-season tires1 245/40 R18 93V M+S -
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9 J x 18 -
AMG rims (light alloy) - 9 J x 18
1,2
Summer tires 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load)
All-season tires1 265/35 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S -
1
Radial-ply tires
2
Must not be used with snow chains.
485
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model E 63 AMG (Performance Package*)

Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) -
AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Summer tires1 245/40 ZR18
1
All-season tires -
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) -
AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2
Summer tires1,2 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load)
1
All-season tires -
1
Radial-ply tires
2 Must not be used with snow chains.
486
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel Minispare wheel (except E 63 AMG) Collapsible tire (E 63 AMG only)
! Please compare the recommended tire in- Rim 4 B x 17 Rim 6 B x 18

flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in- Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm)
flation pressure on the yellow label located on
1 1
the spare wheel rim. Tire T 155/70 R17 110 M Tire 175/55-18 95P
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label 1 Must not be used with snow chains. 1 Must not be used with snow chains.
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the spare
wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of

the Minispare and the collapsible tire differs
from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated to ap-
proximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).
Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately
51 psi (3.5 bar).
487
Technical data
Electrical system
Model E 350, E 350 4MATIC E 550, E 550 4MATIC E 63 AMG

Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.4 kW 14 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.1 kW
1 1
Battery 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33 Bosch F8 DPP 332U NGK ILZKAR7A10
NGK PLKR 6A NGK PFR 5R-11
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm)
Tightening torque 15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 15 - 18.5 lb-ft (20 -25 Nm)
1
Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with a 12 V/100 Ah battery.
Model E 320 BLUETEC

Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 14 V/2.0 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah1
1
Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with a 12 V/100 Ah battery.
488
Technical data
왔 Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model E 320 BLUETEC E 350 E 550

Overall vehicle length 191.7 in (4870 mm) 191.7 in (4870 mm) 191.7 in (4870 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior view 81.2 in (2063 mm) 81.2 in (2063 mm) 81.2 in (2063 mm)
mirrors folded out)
Overall vehicle height 58.4 in (1484 mm) 58.5 in (1486 mm) -
Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC) - - 57.7 in (1465 mm)
(E 550 only)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 61.3 in (1557 mm) 61.7 in (1567 mm) 61.7 in (1567 mm)
Track, rear 61.1 in (1552 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm)
489
Technical data
Model E 350 4MATIC E 550 4MATIC E 63 AMG

Overall vehicle length 191.7 in (4870 mm) 191.7 in (4870 mm) 192.2 in (4881 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior view 81.2 in (2063 mm) 81.2 in (2063 mm) 81.2 in (2063 mm)
mirrors folded out)
Overall vehicle height 59.1 in (1501 mm) - -
Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC) - 58.1 in (1475 mm) 57.7 in (1465 mm)
(E 550 4MATIC and E 63 AMG only)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 61.6 in (1565 mm) 61.6 in (1565 mm) 61.1 in (1551 mm)
Track, rear 61.4 in (1560 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm)
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
490
Technical data
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Warning! G For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
Vehicle components and their respective
Comply with all valid regulations with contact with your skin or clothing.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by respect to handling, storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
Mercedes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could physician immediately.
endanger persons or the environment.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or Keep service fluids out of the reach of
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz children.
Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Engine with oil filter E 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
E 350 4MATIC
E 320 BLUETEC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
E 550
E 550 4MATIC
Engine with oil filter E 63 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.8 l) Approved engine oils
including oil cooler
491
Technical data

Automatic transmission E 320 BLUETEC 9.7 US qt (9.2 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
E 350
E 550
E 350 4MATIC 8.6 US qt (8.1 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) ATF 3353
Front axle E 350 4MATIC 1.69 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 550 4MATIC
Rear axle E 350 1.06 US qt (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 320 BLUETEC 1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
E 550
E 350 4MATIC 1.69 US qt (1.6 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
Transfer case E 350 4MATIC 0.62 US qt (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Fluid
E 550 4MATIC
492
Technical data

Power steering approx. 0.95 US qt (0.9 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
E 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) (Pentosin CHF 11S or, depending on vehicle
production date, Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)1
Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
E 63 AMG 3.2 oz (90 g) each
Brake system 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 320 BLUETEC 13.7 US qt (13.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 350 10.7 US qt (10.0 l)
E 350 4MATIC
E 550 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
E 550 4MATIC
E 63 AMG 12.5 US qt (11.8 l)
1
For detailed information, please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
493
Technical data

Fuel tank 21.12 US gal (80.0 l) Gasoline engine:
including a reserve of all except 2.38 US gal (9.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
E 63 AMG Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
including a reserve of E 63 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer system 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer system and 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 500).
494
Technical data
Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehi- Brake fluid
cles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) recommen-
Engine oils are specifically tested for their dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do
suitability in our engines and durability for so will result in engine or emission control sys-
tem damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Warning! G
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
Limited Warranty.
approved engine oils and oil filters During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
required for vehicles with Maintenance Engine oil additives the brake fluid is continuously reduced
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS through the absorption of moisture from the
(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous
engine oils and oil filters, refer to the They may damage the engine. operating conditions, this moisture content
Factory Approved Service Products can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
pamphlet (USA only), or contact an Damage or malfunctions resulting from system, thus reducing the system’s
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. blending oil additives are not covered by efficiency.
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica- Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
tion other than those expressly required for the Air conditioning refrigerant regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or Maintenance Booklet for replacement
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG interval.
and oil filter at change intervals longer than
lubricating oil are used in the air
those called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) conditioning system. Only brake fluid approved by
will result in engine or emission control system Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
Limited Warranty. vide you with additional information.
system will occur.
495
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Fuel requirements
(gasoline engine) formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-
able and low octane fuel is used, follow these Gasoline engine
Warning! G precautions: Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
앫 The octane number (posted at the
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
It burns violently and can cause serious
possible. of both the Research Octane Number
personal injury.
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
(RON) and the Motor Octane Number
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
acceleration.
rials near gasoline! known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
Turn off the engine before refueling. if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- as two persons and no luggage. such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator used provided the ratio of any one of these
extinguish all smoking materials. pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or oxygenates to gasoline does not
operating in mountainous terrain. exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors can damage your The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
health. exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
496
Technical data
These blends must also meet all other fuel Gasoline additives (gasoline engine) In areas where carbon deposits may be
requirements, such as resistance to spark encountered due to lack of availability of
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. A major concern among engine gasolines which contain these additives,
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
Diesel engine by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved by us for use on
only the use of quality gasoline containing Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Only use commercially available vehicular
additives that prevent the build-up of Approved Service Products pamphlet
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
carbon deposits. (USA only) or contact an authorized
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
After an extended period of using fuels Mercedes-Benz Center for a listing of
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with approved product(s). Follow directions on
without such additives, carbon deposits
improved cold flow characteristics is of- product label.
can build up, especially on the intake
fered in the winter months. Check with
valves and in the combustion area, leading Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
your fuel retailer.
to engine performance problems such as: This only results in unnecessary cost and
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not 앫 Warm-up hesitation may be harmful to the engine operation.
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. The
fuel system and engine will otherwise be 앫 Unstable idle ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor
damaged, which is not covered by the fuel quality or from blending additional fuel
앫 Knocking/pinging additives other than those tested and approved
앫 Misfire by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not
앫 Power loss Warranty.
For a listing of approved products, refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized
497
Technical data
Coolants The coolant solution must be used year If you use a solution that is more than 55%
round to provide the necessary corrosion anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec-
The engine coolant is a mixture of water protection and increase boil-over protection to approximately -49°F [-45°C]), the
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro- tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for re- engine temperature will increase due to
vides: placement interval. the lower heat transfer capability of the so-
앫 Corrosion protection lution. Therefore, do not use more than
Coolant system design and coolant used
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
앫 Freeze protection determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the If the coolant level is low, water and
앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
boiling point) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu- should be used to bring it up to the proper
The cooling system was filled at the factory tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved level (have cooling system checked for
with a coolant providing freeze protection products of equal specification are used to signs of leakage). Please make sure the
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corro- renew the coolant concentration or bring it mixture is in accordance with label instruc-
sion protection. back up to the proper level. tions.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz The water in the cooling system must meet
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding approved products of equal specification,
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze minimum requirements, which are usually
refer to the Factory Approved Service satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
separately from each other, could cause engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact are not sure about the water quality, con-
Limited Warranty. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to To provide important corrosion protection,
-35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the cool- the solution must be at least 50% anticor-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). protection to approximately -35°F
[-37°C]).
498
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze aluminum parts. Failure to use such Before the start of the winter season (or
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will once a year in hot southern regions), you
Your vehicle contains a number of
result in a significantly shortened service should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum
life. concentration checked. The coolant is also
components in motor vehicle engines
regularly checked each time you bring your
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze Therefore, the following product is strongly
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
coolant used in such engines be recommended for use in your vehicle:
Center for service.
specifically formulated to protect the MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

-35°F (-37°C) -49°F (-45°C)
E 320 BLUETEC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) 7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
E 350/E 350 4MATIC 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E 550/E 550 4MATIC 6.0 US qt (5.7 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
E 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.9 l) 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
499
Technical data
Windshield washer system and head- 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
lamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate and water (or con- mixing ratio
centrate and commercially available
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer system and premixed windshield washer sol-
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
headlamp cleaning system* are supplied vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
“MB SummerFit” and water:
from the windshield washer reservoir. temperatures).
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
The windshield washer reservoir has a ca-
water
pacity of approximately: Warning! G
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
앫 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) in vehicles with a
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- 1 gal [4.0 l] water).
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze For temperatures below freezing point use
앫 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) in vehicles without a on hot engine parts, because it may ignite MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
headlamp cleaning system* and burn. You could be seriously burned. “MB SummerFit” and commercially avail-
able premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent).
500
Index
A Air pressure see Tire inflation AUDIO menu 161

ABS 97 pressure 342 Operating CD player 162
Indicator lamp 380 Air pump, electric Selecting radio station 161
Messages in display 398, 413 Turning on 457 Selecting satellite radio* station 161
Accelerator position, automatic Air recirculation mode 214, 231 Audio search function 177
transmission 188 Air vents 211, 228 Audio system
Accessory weight 359 Air volume 212, 229 CD mode 162
Accident 60 Airmatic DC (Dual Control) Auto-dimming
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps* see Head- Messages in display 430 Rear view mirrors 198
lamps Suspension tuning 265 Automatic central locking, Control
Active head restraints 87 Airmatic DC (Dual Control) 265 system 176
Adaptive Damping System see ADS Vehicle level control 266 Automatic headlamp mode 138
ADS 265 Alarm system see Anti-theft systems Automatic lighting control, Interior
Air bags 70 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 434, 455 lighting 145
Children 71 AMG menu 157 Automatic locking when driving 176
Front, Driver 74 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 499 Automatic shift program 190
Front, Passenger 74 Antilock Brake System see ABS
Safety guidelines 72 Anti-theft systems 106
Side impact 75 Anti-theft alarm system 106
Window curtain 75 Immobilizer 106
Air conditioning refrigerant 495 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Air conditioning system see Climate con- Ashtrays 287
trol system Aspect ratio 359
Air conditioning, Cooling 217, 233
Air distribution 211, 228
Air pressure 359
501
Index
Automatic transmission Backrest 277 Block heater* (Canada only) 365

Accelerator position 188 Seat 43 Brake fluid
Automatic shift program 190 Seat, multicontour* 131 Checking 324
Emergency operation (Limp-Home Backup lamps Messages in display 413
Mode) 197 Messages in display 422 Brake lamp
Gear ranges 189 Replacing bulbs 443 Cleaning lenses 372
Gear selector lever 184 Bar 360 Replacing bulbs 443
Gear selector lever control one-touch BAS 99 Brake pads
gearshifting 191 Batteries, SmartKey Message in display 412
Gear selector lever positions 186 Checking battery condition 119 Brakes 310
Gear shifting malfunctions 197 Replacing 441 High-performance brake system
Kickdown 188 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (E 63 AMG only) 312
Kickdown, manual shift program Checking battery condition 119 Warning lamp 383
E 63 AMG 196 Replacing 441 Break-in period 308
Manual shift program E 63 AMG 194 Batteries, Vehicle Bulbs see Replacing bulbs
Program mode selector switch 190 Charging 462
C
Shifting procedure 185 Disconnecting 461
California retail buyers and lessees, impor-
Starting engine 52 Jump starting 464
tant notice for 11
Steering wheel gearshift control Messages in display 412
Can holder see Cup holders
one-touch gearshifting* 192 Reconnecting 463
Capacities and recommended
Reinstalling 462
B fuel/lubricants 491
Removing 462
BabySmartTM Cargo area see Trunk
Bead 360
Air bag deactivation system 81 Cargo tie-down rings 280
Beverage holder see Cup holders
Self-test 81 Carpets, cleaning 376
Bi-Xenon headlamps* see Headlamps
Catalytic converter (gasoline
Bleeding the fuel system 459
engine) 318
502
Index
CD player 162 Climate control system COMAND see separate COMAND operat-
Center console 4-zone automatic climate ing instructions
Lower part 30 control 220 Combination filter with pollutant-sensitive
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator Air conditioning refrigerant 495 air-recirculation mode 233
lamp 393 Air conditioning, Cooling 217, 233 Combination switch 57, 141
Upper part 29 Air distribution 211, 228 Control system 151
Central locking Air recirculation mode 214, 231 Multifunction display 151
Automatic 127, 176 Air volume 212, 229 Multifunction steering wheel 152
Locking/unlocking from inside 127 Automatic mode 209, 226 Resetting to factory settings 166
Central locking switch 127 Control panel, Rear 219, 235 Control system menus 154
Certification label 476 Deactivating system 209, 225 AMG 157
Checking Dual-zone automatic climate AUDIO 161
Oil level 327 control 204 Distronic* 163
Checking tire pressure electronically with Front defroster 212, 229 NAV* 163
the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Maximum cooling MAX COOL 214, Settings 166
System (Advanced TPMS)*, 230 Standard display 157
(Canada only) 345 Rear climate control 235 TEL* 181
Children in the vehicle 88 Residual engine heat (REST) 218, Trip computer 179
Air bags 71 234 Vehicle status message memory 164
Blocking of rear window operation 95 Clock 27, 171 Control system submenus 153
Indicator lamp, front passenger front Setting time 172 Convenience 178
air bag 81 Cockpit 24 Instrument cluster 169
Infant and child restraint systems 89 Cold tire inflation pressure 360 Lighting 173
LATCH-type child seat anchors 94 Collapsible tire 487 Time/Date 171
Cigarette lighter 288 Collapsible wheel chock 434 Vehicle 176
503
Index
Convenience submenu Defrosting, Rear 203 Distance to empty (Range), Trip

Activating easy-entry/exit Delayed shut-off computer 181
feature 178 Exterior lamps 175 Distronic* 252
Setting parking position for exterior Interior lighting 176 Activating/deactivating 258
rear view mirror 179 Department of Transportation see DOT Cleaning system sensor 373
Coolant Diesel fuel 322 Control system 163
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio Difficulties Distance warning function 261
and quantity 499 While driving 60 Driving hints 262
Capacities 493 With starting 54 Menu 257
Checking coolant level 330 Digital clock see Clock Messages in display 399
Messages in display 414, 415, 416 Digital speedometer 157 Sensor cover 373
Temperature 320 Dimensions, vehicle 489 Warning and indicator lamps 255
Temperature indicator 149 Direction of rotation (tires) 336 Door
Warning lamp 386 Displays Entry lamps 147
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 142 Digital speedometer 157 Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 36
Cruise control 249 Distronic* 255 Locking/unlocking, SmartKey with
Cup holders 284 Maintenance service indicator 366 KEYLESS-GO* 37, 116
Curb weight 360 Messages in display 411 Message in display 430
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 17 Multifunction display 151 Opening from inside/outside 119
Outside temperature 151, 170 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 300
D
Symbol messages 411 Unlocking, Mechanical key 436
Date display, setting 172, 173
Text messages 398 Door control panel 34
Daytime running lamp mode 139
Vehicle status message memory 165 Door handle 34
Setting 173, 174
Vehicle system settings, Control Doors
Deep water see Standing water
system 151 Locking/unlocking from outside 112
Defogging windshield 213, 230
DOT 360
Defrosting, Front 212, 229
504
Index
Drinking and driving 309 E Emergency, In case of

Driving Easy-entry/exit feature 46, 178 Battery, Jump starting 464
Abroad 317 EBP 100 First aid kit 432
Hydroplaning 314 Electrical fuses see Fuses Flat tire, changing 452
In winter 316 Electrical system, Technical data 488 Fuses
Instructions 49, 309 Electronic Stability Program see Hazard warning flasher 144
Problems 60 ESP® 100 Instrument cluster, Indicator
Safety systems 97 Emergency calls lamps 380, 381, 382, 383, 384,
Through standing water 317 Tele Aid calls 295 385, 386, 387, 390, 391
With Distronic* 262 Emergency operation (Limp-Home Roadside Assistance 12
Driving safety systems Mode) 197 Towing the vehicle 466
4MATIC 105 Emergency operations 437 Emission control 319
ABS 97 Gear selector lever, Unlocking 438 Information label 477
BAS 99 Locking/unlocking the vehicle 436 Vacuum line routing diagram
EBP 100 Remote door unlock 300 label 477
ESP® 100 Tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding pan- Emission control system warranties 10
Four wheel electronic traction system el*, Manual operation 439
with ESP® 105 Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 125
Driving systems Trunk lid, Unlocking 437
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) 265 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD
Cruise control 249
Distronic* 252
Parktronic system* 269
Driving tips 188
Accelerator position 188
Kickdown 188
505
Index
Engine Engine oil F

Belt layout 478 Adding 329 Filler neck, Engine oil 329
Block heater* (Canada only) 365 Additives 495 First aid kit 432
Brake-in recommendations 308 Changing 329 Flat tire 452
Cleaning 371 Checking level 328 Lowering the vehicle 458
Compartment 325 Consumption 327 Mounting the spare wheel 452, 455
Malfunction indicator lamp 384, 385, Filler neck 329 Preparing the vehicle 452
414 Messages in display 418 Spare wheel 452
Maximum engine speed 479 Oil dipstick 328 Flexible Service System see FSS
Message in the display 384, 385, Recommended engine oils and oil Floormats 290
414 filter 495 Fluids
Number 477 Engine oil level 324 Automatic transmission fluid 492
Starting 52 ESP® 100 Brake fluid 493
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 53 Four wheel electronic traction system Capacities 491
Starting with the SmartKey 53 with ESP® 105 Engine coolant 493
Tachometer 27 Messages in display 398, 413 Engine oil 491
Technical data 479 Warning lamp 381, 382 Power steering fluid 493
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 64 ETD Windshield washer and headlamp
Turning off with the SmartKey 63 Safety guidelines 72 cleaning system 494
Engine compartment Exterior lamp switch 137 Fog lamps 140
Hood 325 Exterior rear view mirrors 47 Messages in display 422, 423, 424,
Engine coolant see Coolant Parking position 200 425
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 27, Exterior view 22 Replacing bulbs 445
385, 414 Four wheel electronic traction system with
ESP® see 4MATIC
4MATIC 105
506
Index
Front air bags 74 Fuel filler flap 321 Gear range

Front lamps see Headlamps Locking/unlocking 321 Automatic transmission 189
Front passenger front air bag Opening 322 Limiting 189
Messages in display 393 Fuel reserve warning lamp 27 Shifting into optimal 192, 194
Front passenger front air bag off indicator Fuel tank Gear selector lever 52, 184
lamp 74, 79 Capacity 494 Cleaning 376
Front seat head restraints see Head re- Filler flap 321 Gearshift pattern 184
straints Fuel, Premium unleaded gasoline 322, Lock 52
FSS (Canada vehicles) 366 494, 496 Position 185, 186
Fuel 309, 322 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Position indicator 52
Additives 497 Capacities 491 Shifting procedure 185
Capacities, Fuel tank 494 Fuses 469 Unlocking in an emergency 438
Diesel fuel 322, 494 Aids for replacing fuses 469 Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting
Filling the tank 321 Fuse box in passenger Automatic transmission 191
Fuel filler flap and cap 321 compartment 470 Global locking/unlocking see SmartKey
Fuel reserve warning lamp 387 Fuse box in trunk 470 Glove box 282
Premium unleaded gasoline 322 Fuse chart 469 Good visibility 198
Requirements Fuse extractor 469 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gasoline additives 497 Replacing 469 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Premium unleaded gasoline 496 Spare fuses 469 Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
Requirements, Octane rating 496 GVW 360
G
Technical data 491 GVWR 360
Garage door opener 31, 301
Fuel consumption statistics
Gasoline see Fuel H
Since last reset 180
GAWR 360 Halogen headlamps see Headlamps
Since start 180
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 376
Hazard warning flasher 144
507
Index
Head restraints 129 Heated steering wheel Inflation pressure see Tires, Inflation pres-
Comfort head restraint, Adjusting 44 (Canada only) 289 sure
Folding back 130 Height adjustment Inside door handle 119
Front seat, Adjusting 43 Vehicle level control 266 Instrument cluster 26, 148
Rear seat, Removing and High beam flasher 57, 142 Illumination brightness 148
installing 130 High beam headlamps 57, 137, 444 Lamps 380
Headlamp cleaning system* 198 Indicator lamp 27, 142 Multifunction display 151
Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed Replacing bulbs 444 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
shut-off, Exterior lamps Switching on 142 Illumination brightness
Headlamps High mounted brake lamp 445 Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps* 137 High-performance brake system Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Automatic headlamp mode 138 (E 63 AMG only) 312 Interior lighting
Bi-Xenon* 137 Hood 325 Delayed shut-off 176
Cleaning lenses 372 Message in display 430 Interior rear view mirror 47
Cleaning system* 198 Horn 25 Auto-dimming mirrors 198
Halogen 446 HVAC see Climate control system Interior storage spaces see Storage com-
High beam see High beam flasher Hydroplaning 314 partments
High beam see High beam headlamps
I J
Low beam see Low beam headlamps
Identification labels 476 Jack 432
Manual headlamp mode 138
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 477 Jump starting 464
Replacing bulbs 446
Ignition 38
Switch 56 K
Immobilizer 106
Headliner and shelf below rear window, Key, Mechanical 436
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Cleaning and care of 376 Loss of 119
warning
Heated seats* 132 Valet locking 126
Infant and child restraint systems see Chil-
dren in the vehicle
508
Index
Key, SmartKey Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* L

Battery check lamp 110 Battery check lamp 114 Labels
Checking batteries 119 Checking batteries 119 Certification 476
Factory setting 112 Factory setting 116 Emission control information 476
Global locking 112, 113 Global locking 117, 118 Vacuum line routing diagram 477
Global unlocking 112, 113 Global unlocking 116, 117 Lamps, exterior
Locking/unlocking 36, 64, 110 Locking/unlocking 37, 64, 113 Exterior lamp switch 56, 137
Loss of 119 Loss of 119 Front 444
Messages in the multifunction Messages in the multifunction Messages in display 422
display 420, 421 display 420, 421, 424 Rear 445
Opening and closing the power Opening and closing the power Switching on/off 137
tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel* 239 with power tilt/sliding panel* 239
Opening and closing the Opening and closing the
windows 239 windows 239
Opening, Trunk 120 Opening, Trunk 120
Positions in starter switch 37 Replacing batteries 441
Remote control 110 Restoring to factory setting 118
Replacing batteries 441 Selective setting 117
Restoring to factory setting 113 Starting the engine 53
Selective setting 112 Turning off the engine 64
Starting the engine 52 KEYLESS-GO* see Key, SmartKey with
Turning off the engine 63 KEYLESS-GO*
Kickdown 188
Kilopascal 360
509
Index
Lamps, indicator and warning License plate lamps 445 Low beam headlamps 56
ABS 27, 380 Messages in display 423 Indicator lamp 27
Battery (SmartKey) 113, 117 Replacing bulbs 449 Replacing bulbs 444
Brakes 383 Light alloy wheels, cleaning 375 Switching on 56
CHECK ENGINE 384, 385 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 288 Lubricants 491
Coolant 386 Lighting Lumbar support 131
Distance warning lamp* 255 Daytime running lamp mode 139
M
Engine diagnostics 384, 385 Lighting, Exterior and interior 137
Maintenance 12
Engine malfunction 27, 384, 385 Limp-Home Mode 197
Calling up service indicator 368
ESP® 27, 381, 382 Loading 273
Clearing service indicator
Fog lamps 140 Loading see Vehicle loading
message 367
Front passenger front air bag off 29, Locator lighting 174
FSS (Canada vehicles) 366
74, 81, 393, 394 Lock button
Maintenance System (U.S.
Fuel reserve 27, 387 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 65
vehicles) 366
High beam headlamps 27 Locking the vehicle 61
Resetting service indicator 368
Instrument cluster 380, 381, 382, In an emergency 437
Service indicator 366
383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 390, 391 Loss of
Service indicator message 366
Low beam headlamps 27 Key, Mechanical 119
Service term exceeded 367
Seat belt telltale 27 Key, SmartKey 119
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Seat belts 388 Key, SmartKey with
Manual shift program E 63 AMG 194
Seat belts telltale 388 KEYLESS-GO* 119
Deactivating 196
SRS 69 Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Maximum load rating, Tires 360
Turn signals 27 Booklet 475
Maximum loaded vehicle weight, Tire infla-
Language, Setting 169
tion pressure 360
LATCH-type child seat anchors see Chil-
Maximum tire inflation pressure 361
dren in the vehicle
Mechanical key 436
510
Index
Memory function see Seats Door 430 N

Menus see Control system menus Engine oil 418 NAV* menu 163
Minispare wheel see Spare wheel ESP® 398, 402, 413 Navigation system
Mirrors Fog lamps 422, 423, 424, 425 See separate COMAND operating
Adjusting 47 Hood 430 instructions 163
Auto-dimming 198 Light sensor 424 Net, parcel 284
Exterior rear view mirror 47 Parking brake 413 Neutral gear position, Automatic
Exterior rear view mirror parking Parking lamps 423 transmission 184, 186
positions 200 PRE-SAFE® 398, 407 Night security illumination 140
Interior rear view mirror 47 Reserve fuel 419 Normal occupant weight 361
MON 322 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 420, Number, vehicle identification (VIN) 477
Multicontour seat* 131 421
O
Multifunction display 151 SRS 429
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Changing settings see Control system Taillamps 425
Occupant distribution 361
menus and Control system sub- Tele Aid 429
Occupant safety 68
menus Telephone* 430
Air bags 70
Selecting language 169 Tires 427
Children and air bags 71
Multifunction display messages Trunk 430
Children in the vehicle 88
ABS 398, 413 Turn signals 426
Fastening the seat belt 49
Batteries 412 Windshield washer fluid 430
Front passenger front air bag off indica-
Brake fluid 413 Multifunction steering wheel 28, 152
tor lamp 79
Brake pads 412 Button operation 152
Infant and child restraint systems 89
Check engine 384, 385
LATCH-type child seat anchors 94
Coolant 414, 415, 416
OCS 75
Cruise control 399
Seat belts 49, 72
Distronic* 399
511
Index
OCS 75 Parcel net Passenger compartment

Self-test 80 Front passenger footwell 284 Interior lighting 145
Odometer 151 Parking 61, 313 Interior rear view mirror 47
Oil see Engine oil On hills 61, 313 Main fuse box 470
One-touch gearshifting Over things that burn, Potential Parcel net in front passenger
Gear selector lever 191 consequences 61, 313 footwell 284
Steering wheel gearshift Parking brake 55, 62 Passenger safety see Occupant safety
control* 192 Message in display 413 Pedals 309
Operating safety 16 Parking position Phone see Telephone*
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 372 Exterior rear view mirrors 136, 200 Plastic parts, cleaning 375
Outside temperature see Displays Gear position 52 Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 434
Overdue maintenance service 366, 367 Parktronic* Poly-V-belt drive
Overhead control panel 31 Activating/deactivating 272 Layout 478
Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 319 Cleaning system sensors 373 Positions (Memory function) see Seats
Malfunctioning 272 Power assistance 310
P
Minimum distance 270 Power outlet 289
Paintwork, Cleaning 370
Range 269 Power seat see Seats
Panic alarm 96
System sensors 373 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 242
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Warning indicators 25, 271 Power tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama
panel* 245
Parts service 474 roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Cleaning 375
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Emergency operations 439
Opening/closing 246
Front passenger front air bag off indica-
Opening/closing in an
tor lamp
emergency 439
Stopping 248
Synchronizing 248
512
Index
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Push-start see Tow-start Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts,
Opening/closing 242 Telltale 388
R
Opening/closing in an Remote control see Key, SmartKey
Radio
emergency 439 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 300
Selecting stations 161
Stopping 244 Replacing bulbs
Selecting stations (satellite*) 161
Synchronizing 244 Additional turn signals 448
Radio transmitters 318
Power washer 370 Brake lamps 446
Reading lamp, front 146
Power windows 237 Headlamps 446
Reading lamp, rear 147
Cleaning 374 High beam headlamps 444
Rear bench seat*, foldable 276
Operating 237 High mounted brake lamp 445
Rear door ashtray see Ashtray
Rear door window, Blocking License plate lamps 445, 449
Rear door window
operation 95 Low beam headlamps 444, 446
Blocking operation 95
Synchronizing 239 Parking lamps 445, 448
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps 141
Practical hints 380 Side marker lamps 443
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
PRE-SAFE® Side marker lamps, front 448
Rear seat head restraints see Head re-
Messages in display 398, 407 Tail lamps 445, 448
straints
Problems Turn signal lamps 443, 444, 447
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
While driving 60 Reporting safety defects 18
Rear window defroster 203
With vehicle 17 Research Octane Number see RON
Rear window sunshade* 202
Product information 9 Reserve fuel
Recommended tire inflation
Production options weight 361 Message in display 419
pressure 361
Program mode see Automatic transmis- Reset button, In instrument cluster 148,
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
sion, Automatic shift program 166
(Tele Aid) 301
Program mode selector switch Reset tool
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 495
Automatic shift program 190 Depository 440
Refueling 321
PSI 361
Regular checks 323
513
Index
Restraint system see Children in the vehi- Seat belts 82 Self-test

cle Children in the vehicle 88 BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
Retaining hooks 281 Cleaning 376 system 81
Reverse gear position, Automatic Fastening 49 OCS 80
transmission 184, 186 Height adjustment 51 Tele Aid 295
Rims 361, 481 Proper use of 51, 84 Service and warranty information 10
Roadside Assistance 12 Safety guidelines 72 Service intervals see Maintenance, Service
Roller sunblind* 202 Telltale 27, 388 indicator
RON 322 Warning lamp 388 Service life, Tires 334
Roof rack* 273 Seating capacity 337 Service see Maintenance
Rubber parts, cleaning 375 Seats 41, 129 Service system see FSS (Canada vehicles)
Run Flat Indicator 343 Easy-entry/exit feature 46 or Maintenance System (US vehicles)
Heater* 132 Service, Parts 474
S
Memory function 134 Settings 116
Safety
Multicontour seat* 131 Control system menus and
Driving safety systems 97
Ventilation* 133 submenus 153
Occupant 68
Seats, Rear bench seat* 276 Date 172, 173
Reporting defects 18
Securing cargo Individual, Vehicle 166
Safety belts see Seat belts 49
Cargo tie-down rings 280 Memory function 135
Satellite radio* 161
Selective setting see SmartKey Resetting all, Control system 166
Seat belt force limiter 85
Selector lever Selective, SmartKey with
Message in the display 407 KEYLESS-GO* 117
Selector lever see Gear selector lever Time 172
Shelf below rear window, cleaning 376
Shift program mode, Automatic
transmission 190
514
Index
Shifting, Automatic transmission 184 Starting, Engine 52 Suspension tuning

Side impact air bags 75 Steering column 45 For comfortable driving style 265
Side marker lamps Steering wheel 45 For sporty driving style 265
Cleaning lenses 372 Buttons 28 Suspension tuning see Airmatic DC (Dual
Side windows see Power windows Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch Control)
Sidewall 361 gearshifting* Symbols used in this operator’s
Ski bag* (Canada only) 274 Automatic transmission 192 manual 15
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey 110 Steering wheel, Cleaning 376
T
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see Key, Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 301
Tachometer 27, 149
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 113 Storage compartments 32
Overspeed range 149
Snow chains 365 Cup holder 285
Tail lamps 448
Snow tires 364 Glove box 282
Cleaning lenses 372
Spare fuses 469 Parcel net in front passenger
Messages in display 425
Spare wheel 432 footwell 282
Replacing bulbs 448
Mounting 452 Rear armrest 283
Taillamps
Speed settings Rear center console 282
Cruise control 251 Ruffled storage bags 283
Tar stains 370
Distronic* 259 Storing
Speedometer 27, 255 Tires 335
SRS 68 Submenus
Indicator lamp 27, 390 In control system
Message in display 429 Submenus see Control system menus and
Standing water, Driving through 317 submenus
Starter switch 37 Sun visors 201
Positions 37 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Starting difficulties, Engine 54 Sunshade* 202
515
Index
Technical data Stolen Vehicle Recovery TIN 361

Air conditioning refrigerant 495 services 301 Tire
Brake fluid 495 System self-check 295 Vehicle maximum load on 362
Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants Telephone* 28, 181, 291 Tire and Loading Information
etc. 491 Answering/ending a call 182 Placard 337
Coolant 498 Changing mobile phone cradle 293 Tire and loading terminology 359
Electrical system 488 Compartment 285 Tire Identification Number see TIN
Engine 479 Hands-free microphone 31 Tire inflation pressure
Engine oil additives 495 Inserting in mobile phone cradle 292 Checking 341
Engine oils 495 Installing a different mobile phone Checking tire pressure electronically
Fuel requirements 496 cradle 294 with the Advanced Tire Pressure
Gasoline additives 497 Message in display 430 Monitoring System (Advanced
Premium unleaded gasoline 496 Operation 181 TPMS)*, (Canada only) 345
Rims and tires 481 Phone book 183 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
Weight 490 Redialing 183 the fuel filler flap
Windshield washer and headlamp Temperature Tire load rating 361
cleaning system 494 Coolant 149 Tire ply composition and material
Tele Aid 294 Interior temperature 210, 227 used 361
Emergency calls 295 Outside 170 Tire speed rating 362
Information 298 Setting display unit 170
Initiating an emergency call Tether attachment points, see Children in
manually 297 the vehicle
Messages in display 429 Tie-down rings, Trunk 280
Remote door unlock 300 Tightening torque 458
Roadside Assistance 297 Time 172, 173
SOS button 297 Setting minutes 172
516
Index
Tires 333, 481 Sizes 482 Traveling abroad 317

Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Snow 364 Tread 362
System (Advanced TPMS)*, Spare wheel Tread depth 335, 364
(Canada only) 345 Speed rating 315, 352, 362 Treadwear indicators 362
Advanced TPMS malfunction Storing 335 Trip computer 179
telltale 391 Temperature 342, 358 Trip odometer 149
Air pressure 341 Terminology 359 Trunk
Care and maintenance 334 Tire Identification Number see TIN Cargo area 279
Chains 365 Traction 314, 362 Closing the lid 122
Cleaning 335 Tread 362 Fuse box 470
Direction of rotation, Spinning 336 Tread depth 335, 364 Lamp 147
Driving instructions 313 Treadwear indicators 362 Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 118
Important notes, Tire inflation Wear pattern 362, 363 Message in display 430
pressure 342 Winter 364 Opening 120, 121
Inflation pressure 342, 349 Tools 434 Tie-down rings 280
Information Placard 337 Top tether Trunk lid emergency release 125
Inspection 334 Children in the vehicle 92 Unlocking in an emergency 437
Load rating 361 Total load limit 362 Valet locking 126
Messages in display 427 Towing eye bolt 468 Turn signals 57
Ply composition and material Towing the vehicle 466 Additional in mirrors 444
used 361 Tow-start 464, 466 Bulbs 444
Problems under-/overinflation 349 Traction 362 Cleaning lenses 372
Retreads 333 Transmission fluid level 329 Indicator lamps 27
Rims and tires 481 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear Messages in display 426
Rotation 362 selector lever Replacing bulbs 447
Service life 334 Transmission see Automatic transmission Turning off engine 63
517
Index
U V Vehicle loading
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Vacuum line routing diagram label 477 Cargo tie-down rings 280
Standards 362 Valet locking 126 Instructions 279
Units, Settings Vehicle Load limit 338
Speedometer 169 Battery 460 Roof rack* 273
Temperature 169 Care 369 Ski bag* (Canada only) 274
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 496 Control system, settings menu 151 Split rear bench seat* 276
Unlocking the vehicle 36 Dimensions 489 Terminology 359
In an emergency 436 Individual settings 166, 168 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 362
Uphill driving Locking/unlocking 36, 61, 110 Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
Cruise control 250 Locking/unlocking in an (Tele Aid) 301
Upholstery emergency 436, 437 Vehicle status message memory 164
Cleaning 376 Lowering 458 Vehicle tool kit 434
Useful features 282 Modifications and alterations, Operat- Vehicle washing 371
ing safety 16
W
Towing 466
Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
Washing 369
warning
Weight 490
Warning sounds
Vehicle jack 432, 434
Distance warning function* 261
Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC
Distronic* 256
(Dual Control)
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt 85
Vehicle lighting 324
Parking brake 56
Parktronic system* 272
Seat belt telltale 388, 389
Warranty coverage 475
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
518
Index
Washer reservoir level 500 Windshield wipers 58

Washing the vehicle 369 Cleaning 374
Wear pattern, Tires 363 Replacing wiper blade 450
Weight, Vehicle 490 Winter driving
Wheel Block heater* (Canada only) 365
Change 452 Snow chains 365
Removing 455 Tires 364
Spare 455 Winter driving instructions 316
Tightening torque 458 Winter tires 364
Wheels, Sizes 482 Wood trims, cleaning 377
Wheels, Tires and 333
Window curtain air bags 75
Windows see Power windows 237
Windows, cleaning 374
Windshield
Cleaning 59
Cleaning wiper blades 374
Defogging 213, 230
Windshield washer fluid 500
Mixing ratio 500
Refilling 332
Wiping 59
Windshield washer system 500
519
520
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.

Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time August 02, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in U. S. A.

2007 e Class Sedan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 e Class Sedan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 e Class Sedan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the operator's manual?

What is the purpose of the operator's manual?

What safety recommendations are made in the manual?

What safety recommendations are made in the manual?

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 35

Anti-theft systems ............................. 106 Seats ................................................ 129

Power windows.................................. 237 Parktronic system

At the gas station .............................. 321 Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

Proper use of the vehicle

For the USA only:

Reporting safety defects

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Gasoline 496 Engine oil 327 d Exterior rear view mirror 47

5 Doors Coolant 330 Parking position 136

앫 Locking and unlocking 110 e Headlamp cleaning system* 198

앫 Opening and closing 119

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

3 Speedometer indicator lamp ± Engine malfunction 384

Item Page Item Page

2 Selecting the submenu or è for next menu

6 Central unlocking switch 127 c Seat ventilation*, driver’s 133

Lower part Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Position 0

Warning! G Warning! G According to accident statistics, children

i Depending on the set height of the head re-

Manually adjust the head restraint. 1 Head restraint side adjustment

To adjust the head restraint sides:

Easy-entry/exit feature With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with

i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

i The memory function (컄 page 134) lets you

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

For more information, see the “Controls in

Diesel engine: Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

Parking brake Driving

컄컄 ! If you hear a warning signal and the mes- Switching on headlamps

Warning! G For more information on driving, see “Driv-

High beam Turn signals The combination switch resets automati-

Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

Switching off headlamps Turning off with the SmartKey

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* Releasing seat belts Locking

Warning! G Warning! G If it is necessary to modify an air bag system

앫 Occupants, especially children, should

or door frame trims, and installation of

Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

When the OCS senses that the front passen-

컄컄 Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation The 75 indicator lamp locat-

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G